OWNER’S MANUAL 2019 OWNER’S
2019 GIULIA Printed in U.S.A. Printed ©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. US LLC. ©2018 FCA S.p.A., used with permission. Group Marketing of FCA ROMEO is a registered trademark ALFA 19GABASE-126-AA 19GABASE-126-AA ROMEO GIULIA ALFA Second Edition Manual Owner’s VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA This manual illustrates and describes the operation of With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name features and equipment that are either standard or op- FCA US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a FCA Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore. description of features and equipment that are no longer available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please DRIVING AND ALCOHOL disregard any features and equipment described in this Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of manual that are not on this vehicle. accidents. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve- drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non- ments to its products without imposing any obligation drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans- upon itself to install them on products previously manu- portation. factured.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower, and your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking. Never drink and then drive. Copyright © 2018 FCA US LLC DEAR CUSTOMER Dear Customer, We would like to congratulate and thank you for choosing Alfa Romeo. We have written this Owner’s Manual to help you get to know all of the features of your vehicle and use it in the best possible way. Please take the necessary time to familiarize yourself with all the dynamic features of your vehicle. Here you will find important information and warnings regarding the use of your vehicle, and how to achieve the best performance from the technical features of your Alfa Romeo. Youare advised to read through the Owner’s Manual before taking it on the road for the first time. It is important to become familiar with the controls of your vehicle, especially with sections concerning the brakes, handling, transmission, and vehicle behavior on different road surfaces. This Owner’s Manual also provides a description of special features and tips, as well as essential information for the safe driving, care, and maintenance of your Alfa Romeo over time. In the provided Warranty Booklet, you will also find a description of the services that Alfa Romeo offers to its customers. The New Vehicle Limited Warranty will detail the terms and conditions for maintaining its validity. We are sure that these will help you to get in touch with and appreciate both your new vehicle and the service provided by the people at Alfa Romeo. For questions or comments pertaining to your vehicle, please contact: Alfa Romeo Customer Care Center: P.O.Box 21–8004 Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA (1-844-253-2872) Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada): P.O.Box 1621 Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French) READ THIS CAREFULLY
Refueling Do not use fuel containing methanol or ethanol E85. Using these mixtures may cause misfiring and driving issues, as well as damage vital components of the supply system. For further details on the use of the correct fuel, see the "Fuel Requirements" paragraph in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.
Starting The Engine
Make sure that the electric park brake is engaged and that the transmission is in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). Next, press the brake pedal, and then push the engine START/STOP button.
Parking On Flammable Material
The catalytic converter develops high temperatures during operation. Do not park the vehicle on grass, dry leaves, pine needles or other flammable material: fire hazard.
Respecting The Environment
The vehicle is fitted with a system that carries out a continuous diagnosis of the emission-related components in order to help protect the environment.
Electrical Accessories
If you decide to add electrical accessories after purchasing the vehicle, (with the risk of gradually draining the battery), contact your authorized dealer. They can calculate the overall electrical requirement and check that the vehicle's electric system can support the required load.
Scheduled Servicing
Correctly performed maintenance procedures are essential for ensuring that your vehicle continuously maintains its quality in performance and safety features, environmental friendliness, and low running costs. VEHICLE CHANGES / ALTERATIONS Accessories Purchased By The Owner
Warning!
Any change or alteration of the vehicle might seriously affect its safety and road handling, thus causing accidents, in which the occupants could even be fatally injured.
If you decide to install electrical accessories that require a permanent electrical supply (e.g. radio, satellite anti-theft system, etc.) or accessories that in any case drain the electrical supply after purchasing the vehicle, contact your authorized dealer. Dealer personnel will check whether the vehicles's electrical system is able to withstand the load required or whether it needs to be integrated with a more powerful battery. Note: Use caution when adding additional spoilers, alloy wheel rims, or non-standard wheel hubs: they could reduce the ventilation of the brakes and affect efficiency under sharp and repeated braking, or on long descents. Make sure that nothing obstructs the pedals (mats, etc.). FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Installing Electrical/Electronic Devices FCA US LLC authorizes the installation of transceivers provided that installation is carried out at a specialized center, in compliance with manufacturer's specifications. Note: Local authorities may not allow the vehicle on the road if devices that modify the features of the vehicle have been installed. This also may void the warranty in relation to faults caused by the change either directly or indirectly related to it. FCA US LLC shall not be liable for damage caused by the installation of accessories either not supplied or recommended by FCA US LLC and/or not installed in compliance with the provided instructions. Radio Transmitters And Mobile Phones Radio transmitter equipment (vehicle mobile phones, CB (Citizen Band) radios, amateur radio etc.) cannot be used inside the vehicle unless a separate antenna is mounted externally. Transmission and reception of these devices may be affected by the shielding effect of the vehicle body. As far as the use of approved mobile phones is concerned, follow the usage instructions provided by the mobile phone Manufacturer.
Caution!
The use of these devices inside the passenger compartment (without an external antenna) may cause the electrical systems to malfunction. This could compromise the safety of the vehicle in addition to constituting a potential hazard for passengers' health. If mobile phones/laptops/smartphones/tablets are inside the vehicle and/or close to the electronic key, a reduced performance of the Passive Entry/Keyless Start system may occur may occur. HOWTO USE THIS MANUAL Operating Instructions Each time an instruction is given that concerns direction (left/right or forward/backward), it is written to be read from the perspective of an occupant in the driver's seat. If a direction is written from a different perspective, it will be specified as such in the text as appropriate. The figures in the manual are only examples: this might imply that some details of the image do not correspond to the actual arrangement of your vehicle. To identify the chapter with the information necessary, you can consult the index at the end of this manual. Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedicated graphic tabs, located at the side of each odd page. There is also a key for getting to know the chapter order and the relevant symbols in the tabs. Additionally, there is a textual indication of each current chapter at the side of each even page. Warnings And Cautions While reading this Owner’s Manual you will find a series of WARNINGS that must be carefully followed to prevent incorrect use of the components of the vehicle, which could cause accidents or injuries. There are also CAUTIONS to prevent procedures that could damage your vehicle. Therefore all WARNINGS and CAUTIONS must always be carefully followed. WARNINGS and CAUTIONS are recalled in the text with the following symbols: Personal Safety: Vehicle Safety: Note: This Owner’s Manual describes all vehicle models. Optional contents, equipment meant for specific Markets or particular models are not identified as such in the text: you need to consider only the information related to the model you own. Any content introduced throughout the production of the model, outside the specific request of options at the time of purchase, will be identified by the indicator: — if equipped. The data contained in this publication is intended to help you use your vehicle in the best possible way. FCA US LLC aims for constant improvement of the vehicles produced. For this reason, it reserves the right to make changes to the model described for technical and/or commercial reasons. For further information, contact your authorized dealer. Symbols Some car components have colored labels with symbols indicating precautions to be observed when using this component. It is important to follow all warnings when operating your vehicle. See below for a brief description of each symbol.
IT CAN START READ THE OWNER’S DO NOTTOUCH WITH AUTOMATICALLYALSO MANUAL HANDS WITH ENGINE OFF
DO NOT OPEN THE CAP DO NOT OPEN: HIGH PROTECT YOUR EYES WHEN THE ENGINE IS PRESSURE GAS HOT
MOVING PARTS KEEP PARTS KEEP CHILDREN ATA BURSTING OF YOUR BODY AND DISTANCE CLOTHES AWAY
DO NOT APPROACH CORROSIVE LIQUID HIGH VOLTAGE FLAMES GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SAFETY
STARTING AND OPERATING
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
INDEX This page is intentionally left blank GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS
FRONT VIEW
03016S0001EM Front View 1 — Headlights 4 — Doors 2 — Tires And Wheels 5 — Engine Compartment 3 — Power Windows 6 — Windshield
9 REAR VIEW
03026S0001EM Rear View 1 — Tail Lights 2 — Trunk Lid
10 INSTRUMENT PANEL
03036S0050EMB Instrument Panel 1 — Headlight Switch 5 — Instrument Cluster 9 — Climate Control System 2 — Air Vents 6 — Steering Wheel 10 — Glove Compartment 3 — Multifunction Stalk 7 — Windshield Wiper Stalk 11 — Passenger-Side Air Bag 4 — Controls On Steering Wheel 8 — Information And Entertainment System
11 VEHICLE INTERIOR
03046S0001EMB Vehicle Interior 1 — Driver Seat 3 — Gear Selector/Paddle Shifter — If Equipped 2 — Power Windows/Power Mirrors Controls 4 — Hazard Warning Lights 5 — Alfa DNA System
12 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
In this section, you will find important KEYS...... 14 information to help you become familiar IGNITION SYSTEM ...... 16 with the features needed to operate your ENGINE IMMOBILIZER ...... 18 vehicle, and how they function. SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 19 DOORS...... 20 SEATS...... 25 HEAD RESTRAINTS ...... 29 STEERING WHEEL ...... 31 MIRRORS ...... 32 EXTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 34 INTERIOR LIGHTS ...... 37 WINDSHIELD WIPERS ...... 39 CLIMATE CONTROL ...... 41 POWERWINDOWS...... 48 POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . .49 HOOD...... 51 TRUNK ...... 52 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ...... 54 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS...... 58
13 KEYS panic alarm will remain active for three Operation minutes, and can be deactivated: Key Fob Door And Trunk Lid Unlock By pushing the PANIC button again. Yourvehicle uses a keyless ignition Briefly pushing the unlock button on the system. This system includes a key fob Automatically if the vehicle speed key fob will unlock the doors and trunk and a keyless push button ignition. exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h). lid, turn on the interior lights, and flash the turn signals once (if activated from The Remote Keyless Entry key fob allows In both cases, the panic alarm is the Information and Entertainment you to lock or unlock the doors and trunk immediately deactivated. System). or activate the Panic Alarm from distances. The key fob does not need to Push and release the unlock button on the be pointed at the vehicle to activate the Warning! key fob once to unlock the driver side system. front door or twice within one second to unlock all doors and the trunk lid. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic transmission into PARK, apply The current unlock setting can be the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, changed through the Information and remove the key fob from the vehicle and Entertainment System menu, so that the lock your vehicle. system unlocks: Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or All doors unlock on the first push of with access to an unlocked vehicle. the key fob unlock button. Allowing children to be in a vehicle Unlock the driver door on the first GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE unattended is dangerous for a number of push of the key fob unlock button. reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned Flashing of the turn signals upon 04016S0001EM not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal locking/unlocking the doors and Key Fob or the gear selector. activation of the courtesy light upon PANIC Function Do not leave the key fob in or near the unlocking the doors can be activated or The key fob contains a PANIC button. vehicle, or in a location accessible to deactivated through the Information and Should you ever feel threatened, push children. A child could operate power Entertainment System. For further this button and the vehicle security alarm windows, other controls, or move the information, refer to the Information and will sound. vehicle. Entertainment System Owner’s Manual To activate the PANIC function, push and Do not leave children or animals inside Supplement. hold the PANIC button for at least one parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat The doors can also be unlocked by using second. When the panic alarm is active, build-up may cause serious injury or death. the emergency key, located inside the the headlights turn on, the turn signals key fob. flash, the horn honks intermittently, and all interior adjustable lights turn on. The 14 Door And Trunk Lid Lock Pushing the lock or unlock button again Briefly pushing the lock button on the key will restart the lights turn on timer (if the fob will lock the doors and trunk lid, turn parking lights functions were already off the interior lights, and flash the turn active, it will remain active). signals (if activated in the Information This function is available only if the doors and Entertainment System). are closed. If one or more doors are open, these Replacing The Electronic Key Fob doors will also lock, and this is indicated Battery by a rapid flashing of the turn signals. The doors prepare for locking, which To replace the battery, proceed as follows: becomes active from the moment they 04016S0003EM are closed. The doors will unlock again 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward Removing Emergency Key only if the key fob is detected inside the and extract the cover pulling downwards. passenger compartment. 3. Remove the battery plug by rotating it counter clockwise. The doors can be locked by using the emergency key in the driver’s side door lock. Trunk Lid Opening Rapidly push the trunk lid key fob button twice to open the trunk lid. The turn signals will flash to indicate that the trunk lid has been opened. Remote Start
The remote start button on the key fob 04016S0002EM enables engine starting (push the button Key Fob Cover Removal 04016S0004EM twice within five seconds to start the Removing Battery Plug engine). 2. Remove the emergency key from its housing. Car Finder 4. Remove the battery from its slot and replace it with a new one of the same Push the lock or unlock button to type. remotely and temporarily turn on the turn signals and headlights. This is useful for finding the vehicle easily in a crowded area like a parking garage, for example. 15 Duplicating Keys IGNITION SYSTEM If you need a replacement key fob, go to Operation an authorized dealer. To activate the keyless ignition, the key General Information fob must be inside the passenger The following regulatory statement compartment. applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with Industry Canada
04016S0005EM license-exempt RSS standard(s). Battery Location Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Proceed in reverse order to reassemble the key. 1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and Caution! 2. This device must accept any 04026S0001EM interference received, including Keyless Ignition START/STOP Button interference that may cause undesired The battery replacement operation must be operation. The keyless ignition has the following done with care, in order not to damage the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE modes: electronic key. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party STOP: engine off, steering locked. responsible for compliance could void the Some electrical devices (e.g. central door Request For Additional Keys user’s authority to operate the locking system, alarm, etc.) are still The system can recognize up to eight key equipment. available. fobs with remote control. ON: all electrical devices are available. To guarantee that the engine starts and This state can be entered by pushing the the vehicle operates correctly, use only ignition button once, without pressing the electronic key fobs specifically coded for brake pedal. the vehicle’s electronics. AVV: engine starting. This state can be If an electronic key fob is coded for a entered by pushing the ignition button vehicle, it cannot be used on any other once while pressing the brake pedal. vehicle.
16 Note: touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the Starting With A Discharged Key Fob Battery With the keyless ignition in the ON transmission gear selector. position: if 30 minutes pass with the Do not leave the key fob in or near the If the key fob battery is discharged, gear selector in P (Park) and the engine vehicle, (or in a location accessible to proceed as follows to start the vehicle: stopped, the keyless ignition will children), and do not leave the ignition in the automatically reset to the STOP AVVor ON/RUN mode. A child could operate 1. Lift the front armrest. position. power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle. 2. Lay the key fob on the key fob outline With the engine started, it is possible found on the floor of the armrest Be sure the parking brake is fully to remove the key fob from the vehicle. compartment while pushing the disengaged before driving; failure to do so START/STOP button to start the ignition. The engine will remain running and the can lead to brake failure and a collision. instrument cluster will indicate the absence of the key fob when the door is Always fully apply the parking brake when closed. leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause damage or injury. Also be certain to leave For more information on the engine the transmission in PARK. Failure to do so start-up, refer to "Starting The Engine" in may allow the vehicle to roll and cause "Starting And Operating." damage or injury. Driving the vehicle with the parking brake engaged, or repeated use of the parking Warning! brake to slow the vehicle may cause serious damage to the brake system.
04026S0002EM Never use the PARK position as a Key Fob Placement Location substitute for the parking brake. Always Caution! apply the parking brake fully when parked General Information to guard against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. The following regulatory statement If the Brake System Warning Light remains applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) on with the parking brake released, a brake When exiting the vehicle, always make devices equipped in this vehicle: sure the ignition is in the OFF mode, remove system malfunction is indicated. Have the the key fob from the vehicle, and lock your brake system serviced by an authorized This device complies with Part 15 of the vehicle. dealer immediately. FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Operation is subject to the following two with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is conditions: dangerous for a number of reasons. A child 1. This device may not cause harmful or others could be seriously or fatally interference, and injured. Children should be warned not to 17 2. This device must accept any ENGINE IMMOBILIZER possible to start the engine, contact an interference received, including authorized dealer. Engine Immobilizer Operation interference that may cause undesired If the Engine Immobilizer Failure/ operation. The Engine Immobilizer system prevents Break-in Attempt icon is displayed Note: Changes or modifications not unauthorized use of the vehicle by while driving, this means that the system expressly approved by the party disabling engine starting. is running a self-diagnosis (e.g. due to a responsible for compliance could void the The system does not need to be enabled voltage drop). If the display persists, user’s authority to operate the or activated. Operation of the contact an authorized dealer. immobilizer is automatic whether the equipment. Note: vehicle's doors are locked or unlocked. When the ignition is set to ON, the Engine Do not tamper with the Engine Immobilizer system identifies the code Immobilizer system. Any modifications transmitted by the key. If the code is or alterations could cause the protection recognized as valid, the Engine function to be deactivated. Immobilizer system enables engine The Engine Immobilizer system is not starting. compatible with certain aftermarket When the ignition is brought back to remote starting systems. The use of STOP,the Engine Immobilizer system these devices could cause problems deactivates the control unit controlling when starting, as well as the the engine, disabling engine starting. deactivation of the protection function. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE For the correct engine starting All keys provided with the vehicle procedures, refer to “Starting The have been programmed in accordance Engine” in “Starting And Operating.” with the electronics on the vehicle itself. Irregular Operation Each key has its own code which must If the key code is not recognized during be stored by the system's control unit. starting, the Engine Immobilizer Contact an authorized dealer to have Failure/Break-in Attempt icon is new keys (up to eight) stored with a displayed on the instrument panel (refer code. to "Warning Lights And Messages" in "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel"). This condition leads to the engine turning off after two seconds. In this case, switch the ignition to STOP and then to ON; if it is still blocked, try with the other keys provided. If it is still not 18 SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — To Arm The Alarm IF EQUIPPED With the doors, hood, and trunk lid closed Alarm Activation and the keyless ignition system placed in the STOP position, push and release the While armed, the alarm will sound in the lock button on the key fob. The alarm can following scenarios: also be armed by pushing the Passive Opening of doors/hood/trunk lid Entry door handle button, located on the (perimeter protection) exterior door handle. For further information, refer to "Passive Entry" in Operation of ignition with a key which "Doors.” is not validated 04046S0001EM Cutting of the battery cables Lock/Unlock Buttons Movement inside the passenger The activation of the alarm is preceded compartment (volumetric protection — by a self-diagnosis stage: if a fault is if equipped) detected, the system emits a further acoustic signal. Unexpected lifting/tilting of the If a second acoustic signal is emitted vehicle (anti-lift protection — if after the alarm is already armed, wait equipped) about four seconds and disarm the alarm Activation of the alarm triggers the by pushing the unlock button. Verify that acoustic warning and the turn signals. 04056S0003EM the doors, hood, and trunk lid are closed Note: The alarm system is activated by Passive Entry Door Handle Button correctly and then rearm the system by pushing the lock button on the key fob. the Engine Immobilizer system, which is When the alarm is armed, the warning automatically activated when you get out lights on the panels of the interior front If the alarm emits an acoustic signal even of the vehicle with the key fob and lock door handles will flash. when the doors, hood, and trunk lid are the doors. correctly closed, a fault has occurred in system operation. In this case, contact an authorized dealer.
19 To Disarm The Alarm Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection — DOORS If Equipped Push the unlock button to disarm the Locking And Unlocking Doors From The alarm. While disarming, the following To ensure the correct operation of the Inside operations are performed: Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection system, completely close the side windows. If all doors are closed properly, they will Two brief flashes of the turn signals automatically lock once the vehicle has (if programmed) To disable the function, push the exceeded approximately 12 mph Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button (20 km/h) (“Auto Relock” function active). Two brief acoustic signals before activating the alarm. (if programmed) Push the interior lock button on the driver When the function is disabled, this is or passenger side door panel trim to lock Doors are unlocked indicated by the light on the the doors. Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection button The alarm can also be disarmed using the flashing for several seconds. With doors locked, push the unlock Passive Entry System, by grasping one of button on the interior trim panel to the Passive Entry front door handles with unlock the doors. a valid key fob in hand to unlock. For Note: The key fob may not be found if it further information refer to "Passive is located next to a mobile phone, lap top Entry" in "Doors.” or other electronic device; these devices may block the key fob’s wireless signal. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
04046S0002EM Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection Button Any disabling of the Volumetric/Anti-Lift Protection must be repeated each time 04056S0003EM the instrument panel is switched off. Passive Entry Door Handle Button To Disarm The Alarm Using Passive Entry 04056S0001EM Note: The alarm does not disarm when Door Lock And Unlock Switch Panel To completely deactivate the alarm (e.g. the doors are unlocked by inserting the during a long period of vehicle inactivity), blade of the emergency key, found inside insert the blade of the emergency key, found the key fob, into the door handle lock inside the key fob, into the door handle lock cylinder. cylinder and turn the emergency key to the right (clockwise) to lock the door(s). 20 Unlock — Turn the emergency key to the left (counter clockwise) Warning! Caution! Passive Entry Do not leave children or animals inside An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always The Passive Entry system can identify parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat remove the key from the ignition and lock all the presence of a key fob near the doors build-up may cause serious injury or death. of the doors when leaving the vehicle and trunk lid. unattended. For personal security and safety in the The system enables the doors and trunk event of a collision, lock the vehicle doors as lid to be locked or unlocked without you drive as well as when you park and leave Locking/Unlocking Doors From The pushing any button on the key fob. the vehicle. Outside The key fob is detected only after the Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the When locking the doors from the outside system recognizes the presence of a automatic transmission into PARK, apply hand on one of the front door handles. If the parking brake, turn the engine OFF, with the doors closed, push the lock button on the key fob. the detected key fob is valid, the doors remove the key fob from the vehicle and and the trunk lid are unlocked (refer to lock your vehicle. The door lock can be activated with all doors locked and the trunk lid open. When the Information and Entertainment Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or System Owner’s Manual Supplement for with access to an unlocked vehicle. the lock button on the key fob is pushed, all locks are activated, including the open Passive Entry Settings). Allowing children to be in a vehicle trunk lid. The trunk lid will be locked when Note: The key fob may not be able to be unattended is dangerous for a number of it is closed. detected by the vehicle keyless-go reasons. A child or others could be seriously system if it is located next to a mobile or fatally injured. Children should be warned When unlocking the doors from the outside, push the unlock button on the phone, laptop or other electronic device; not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal these devices may block the key fob’s or the gear selector. key fob. wireless signal and prevent the Do not leave the key fob in or near the Locking/Unlocking Doors From The keyless-go system from starting the vehicle, or in a location accessible to Outside In An Emergency vehicle. children. A child could operate power If the battery is discharged or the key fob Grasping the handle of the driver's door windows, other controls, or move the is inoperable, you can lock or unlock the vehicle. unlocks the driver's side door, or all doors doors from the outside by inserting the depending on the mode set using the blade of the emergency key, found inside Information and Entertainment System the key fob, into the door handle lock (refer to the Information and cylinder and turn the emergency key as Entertainment System Owner’s Manual follows. Supplement for Passive Entry Settings). Lock — Turn the emergency key to the Note: If wearing gloves, or if it has rained right (clockwise) and the door handle is wet, the activation 21 sensitivity of the Passive Entry function 2. Remove the emergency key from the may be reduced, resulting in a longer key fob housing. reaction time. 3. Insert the emergency key in the driver Door Locking side door lock cylinder and turn it to the To lock the doors, proceed as follows: left (counter clockwise) to unlock the 1. Make sure that you have the key fob door. and are close to the driver’s or passenger’s side door handle. 2. Push the Passive Entry door handle button or the Passive Entry trunk lid 04056S0005EM button, which is located next to the Exterior Trunk Lid Button exterior trunk lid release button. This will Note: After pushing the Passive Entry lock all doors and the trunk lid. Door door handle button, you must wait two locking will activate the alarm as well. seconds before the doors can be unlocked again using the passive entry door handle button. This feature makes it 04016S0002EM possible to check whether the vehicle has Emergency Key Release Buttons been locked correctly by pulling the door handle within two seconds. The doors will GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE not be unlocked again. The vehicle doors and trunk lid can be locked by pushing the lock button on the key fob or on the interior door lock. Driver Side Door Emergency Opening 04056S0003EM If the key fob does not work, e.g. because Passive Entry Door Handle Button its battery is discharged or the vehicle battery is discharged, the emergency key can be used to unlock the driver side door. 04016S0003EM Emergency Key To remove the emergency key from the key fob, proceed as follows: Note: 1. Push the sides of the key fob inward The emergency key blade is not and extract the cover pulling downwards. directional and can be inserted indifferently into the lock. 22 To avoid leaving the key fob inside While pulling the handle, do not push the the vehicle accidentally, the Passive door lock/unlock button on the handle. Entry function features an automatic door unlocking function. If one of the vehicle doors is open and the "door locking" button on the front door handles or lock button in the interior door lock switch panel is pushed, a check of the inside and outside of the vehicle for the presence of the key fob is made once all the open doors are closed. 04056S0005EM Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button 04056S0004EM Note: Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking If the key fob is inadvertently forgotten inside of the trunk, and an If the key fob is detected inside the attempt is made to close it from outside, vehicle, the Passive Entry function the trunk lid will not lock. With the doors automatically unlocks all the vehicle locked, the trunk lid unlocked, and the doors and flashes the turn signals. key fob detected inside the vehicle, the If one or more key fobs are inside the trunk lid will unlock again and the lights passenger compartment, the lock button flash twice. 04056S0003EM on the key fob inside the passenger Passive Entry Door Handle Button compartment is temporarily disabled. Before driving, make sure the trunk lid is closed correctly. The vehicle will not unlock the doors if an unauthorized key fob has been detected Trunk Lid Lock close to the outside of the vehicle. The trunk lid of the vehicle may still be If the Passive Entry function is disabled locked by pushing the lock button on the using the Information and Entertainment key fob, pushing the door lock button on System, the protections to avoid the door handles, or pushing the lock accidentally leaving the key fob inside button on the interior door panel of the the vehicle are deactivated. vehicle. Trunk Lid Access On vehicles equipped with Passive Entry, Approaching the trunk lid with a valid key the trunk lid and the doors can be locked by pushing the button located near the 04056S0001EM fob, push the opening button to access Interior Lock Switch Panel the trunk lid. opening button of the trunk lid. 23 responsible for compliance could void the Unlocking The Doors With A Discharged user’s authority to operate the Battery equipment. Proceed as follows to unlock the doors if Child Safety Locks the vehicle battery is discharged. To provide a safer environment for small Rear Doors And Passenger Door children riding in the rear seats, the rear 1. With the doors unlocked insert the doors are equipped with Child-Protection emergency key from the key fob or a flat Door Lock system. bladed screwdriver into the door lock This device can be engaged only with the manual release lock cylinder. doors open. 04056S0005EM Exterior Trunk Lid Button System Activation/Deactivation The Passive entry system can be activated or deactivated using the Information and Entertainment System. General Information The following regulatory statement
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE applies to all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle: 04056S0008EM 04056S0007EM Door Lock Manual Release Lock This device complies with Part 15 of the Child Safety Lock Positions Cylinder FCC Rules and with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Lock position: device locked (door 2. Turn the manual release lock cylinder Operation is subject to the following two opened from exterior only) clockwise for the right door locks or conditions: Unlock position: device unlocked (door counterclockwise for the left door locks. 1. This device may not cause harmful may be opened from the inside) 3. Remove the key/screwdriver from the interference, and The Child Safety Locks remain locked manual release lock. even if the doors are unlocked. 2. This device must accept any Proceed in one of the following ways to interference received, including Note: The rear doors cannot be opened realign the door lock device (only when interference that may cause undesired from the inside when the Child Safety the battery charge has been restored): Lock is engaged. operation. Push the lock button on the electronic Note: Changes or modifications not key expressly approved by the party 24 Push the unlock button on the door SEATS panel The front seats can be adjusted to ensure Unlock driver’s door lock with the maximum comfort for the occupants. emergency key When adjusting the driver’s seat, keep Operate the internal door handle the shoulders resting firmly against the backrest, and the wrists within reach of Note: For the rear doors, if the Child the top of the steering wheel. The driver Safety Locks are engaged, and the must also be able to fully press the brake previously described locking procedure is pedal. carried out, operating the internal handle will not open the door. Instead, it will only 04066S0003EM realign the lock release device. To open Warning! Power Seat Adjustment the door, the outside handle must be used. The door central locking/unlocking 1 — Seat Adjustment buttons are not deactivated when the It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, 2 — Recline Adjustment emergency lock is engaged. inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, 3 — Lumbar Adjustment people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats Caution! and seat belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. Do not place any article under a power seat or impede its ability to move as it may cause Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a damage to the seat controls. Seat travel seat and using a seat belt properly. may become limited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat's path. Power Seats Note: The conformation of the seats Forward/Rearward Adjustment may vary according to the versions. Push the seat switch forward or rearward The power seat switches are located on to adjust to your desired position. the outboard side of the seat near the floor. Use these switches to move the driver's seat up, down, forward, rearward, or to recline the seatback.
25 Seatback Recline Driver Memory Seat The angle of the seatback can be Storing and recalling can be done with the adjusted forward or rearward. Push the ignition in the ON mode, vehicle speed at seatback switch in the desired direction, 0 mph (0 km/h), and the driver’s side door and the seat will move in the direction of closed, or for three minutes after having the switch. Release the switch when the opened the driver's side door. An audible desired position is reached. chime is heard to confirm a memory profile is set or recalled. To set a memory Power Lumbar profile, first adjust your seat (and power The power lumbar switch is located on mirror position if desired) until you are in the outboard side of the power seat. Push the desired position. Then, push the the switch forward or rearward to 04066S0015EM Seatback Width Adjustment memory button you want to assign the increase or decrease the lumbar support. set position to for 1.5 seconds. When a Push the switch upward or downward to 4 — Power Adjustable Bolster Buttons new seat position is memorized, the raise or lower the lumbar support. 5 — Driver Memory Seat Buttons previously memorized position on the Height Adjustment same button is automatically overwritten. Recalling a memorized The height of the seats can be adjusted Seat Cushion Extension — If Equipped up or down. Pull upward or push position can also be done for Lift the adjustment lever and push the approximately three minutes after the downward on the seat switch, and the front of the cushion forward or rearward seat will move in the direction of the doors are opened and for approximately to extend the cushion by a few inches one minute after the engine is stopped. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE switch. Release the switch when the (centimeters). desired position is reached. To recall a memorized position, push the assigned button briefly. Seat Angle Adjustment (Tilting) — If Equipped The seat angle can be adjusted in four Warning! directions. Lift or push the front part of seat switch to move the front part of the seat in the corresponding direction. Adjusting a seat while driving may be Release the seat switch when the seat dangerous. Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of control which could has reached the desired position. cause a collision and serious injury or death. Power Bolster Adjustment — Seats should be adjusted before If Equipped 04066S0017EM fastening the seat belts and while the Seat Cushion Extension Push the power bolster adjustment vehicle is parked. Serious injury or death buttons to regulate the width of the 6 — Adjustment Lever could result from a poorly adjusted seat backrest through the lateral padding. belt. 26 Do not ride with the seatback reclined so A quick push of the heated seat button that the shoulder belt is no longer resting will select the heat levels in order of against your chest. In a collision you could highest to lowest. A fourth push of the slide under the seat belt, which could result button will turn the heated seat off. in serious injury or death. The “minimum” setting is automatically deactivated once a certain period of time Heated Seats — If Equipped has elapsed. This varies on a case-by-case basis, in accordance with With the engine in the ON position, push the specific operating conditions. the driver or passenger heated seat Note: The heated seat function can only button located on the instrument be activated in temperatures below 39°F panel. 04036S0050EM (4°C). Rear Heated Seat Buttons Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start Note: To preserve the battery charge, On models that are equipped with remote this function cannot be activated when start, the front heated seats can be the engine is off. programmed to come on during remote start. The feature can be activated through the Information and Warning! Entertainment System. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Persons who are unable to feel pain to the Owner’s Manual Supplement for further skin because of advanced age, chronic information. illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, 04066S0004EM1 Rear Heated Seats medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other Heated Seat Buttons physical condition must exercise care when If equipped with rear heated seats, the Youcan select three heating levels: using the seat heater. It may cause burns controls can be found on the rear of the even at low temperatures, especially if used Maximum — three LED indicators center console and will function the same for long periods of time. illuminated on the buttons as the front heated seat controls. Do not place anything on the seat or Average — two LED indicators seatback that insulates against heat, such illuminated on the buttons as a blanket or cushion. This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting in a seat Minimum — one LED indicator that has been overheated could cause illuminated on the buttons serious burns due to the increased surface temperature of the seat. After selecting a heating level, heat will be felt within a few minutes. 27 Rear Seats Partial Extension Of The Luggage Full Expansion Of The Trunk Compartment (1/3 Or 2/3) The rear seats allow for three Tilting the rear seat forward completely passengers. Extending the right side of the trunk allows maximum loading volume. allows you to carry two passengers on Proceed as follows: Note: Middle Seat: The rear seat is the left part of the rear seat, while designed as a 4+1 seat vehicle. The extending the left side allows you to 1. Completely lower the rear seat head middle seat is of limited use. It is carry one passenger. restraints. recommended that this seat only be used Proceed as follows: 2. Place the seatbelts so that they don't by a person who can use the backrest as a impede the movement of the backrest substitute for the head restraint. 1. Completely lower the rear seat head restraints. while tilting it. 2. Place the seatbelt so that it doesn't 3. From inside the luggage impede the movement of the backrest compartment, use levers 1 and 2 to fold while tilting it. down the backrests; these will fold down forwards automatically. If necessary, 3. From inside the luggage accompany the backrests during the compartment, operate lever 1 to tilt the initial stage of tilting. left part or lever 2 to tilt the right part of the backrest: it will automatically tilt Repositioning The Backrests forward. If necessary, assist the backrest Move the seatbelts to the side, making during the initial stage of tilting. sure that they are correctly extended and GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 04066S0005EM not twisted, and that they are not Rear Seat trapped behind the backrests of the The seats and the seatbelts are seats. Make sure the seatbelts are in the considered components of the vehicle’s front of the seatback and lift the Occupant Restraint System. backrests, pushing them back until you hear the locking click on both latch Note: Refer to the "Seat Belt Systems" in "Safety" for further information. mechanisms. Split Folding Rear Seat The rear seatbacks can be folded forward to provide an additional storage 04066S0007EM area. Seat Release Levers 1 — Left Side Seat Release Lever 2 — Right Side Seat Release Lever 28 Center Backrest Section Repositioning HEAD RESTRAINTS Warning! Using the head restraint, lift the center Head restraints are designed to reduce portion upwards, accompanying it during the risk of injury by restricting head its movement, and lightly push to make movement in the event of a rear impact. Be certain that the seatback is securely sure that it is properly attached. Make Head restraints should be adjusted so locked into position. If the seatback is not sure that the armrest is properly securely locked into position the seat will not that the top of the head restraint is attached by attempting to move it. If it is located above the top of your ear. provide the proper stability for child seats not attached, repeat the operation. and/or passengers. An improperly latched seat could cause serious injury. Easy Entry Function Warning! The Easy Entry function is designed to Center Backrest Section Tilting retract the driver side seat automatically The center backrest can be tilted forward by 2.36 in (60 mm) to make it easier for A loose head restraint thrown forward in the driver to get in and out of the car. a collision or hard stop could cause serious for a “Ski-Pass Through” feature from the injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. trunk. Before tilting the backrest, make The movement is activated only if the Always securely stow removed head sure that the rear center seatbelt is not seat is set to a driving position which is in restraints in a location outside the occupant fastened and that there are not any front of the B pillar of the vehicle. compartment. objects in the middle part of the cushion. The function is associated with power ALL the head restraints MUST be Using the release strap, release the front seats for each of the three stored reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect center part of the backrest from its positions. the occupants. Follow the re-installation housing and tilt it using the head The Easy Entry function can be instructions above prior to operating the restraint. activated/deactivated through the vehicle or occupying a seat. Information and Entertainment System. Do not place items over the top of the Reactive Head Restraint, such as coats, seat covers or portable DVD players. These items may interfere with the operation of the Reactive Head Restraint in the event of a collision and could result in serious injury or death.
Front Head Restraints (Adjustments) The front head restraints may be
04066S0008EM height-adjustable. To adjust them, Center Backrest Section Tilting operate as follows: Upward adjustment: Raise the head restraint until it clicks into place. 29 Downward adjustment: Push the The height of the outboard head 2. Push the adjustment button and the adjustment button and push downward restraints can be adjusted. The head release button at the side of the two on the head restraint to lower. restraint of the center seat can only be supports. removed. The height cannot be adjusted. 3. Remove the head restraints by pulling For upward adjustment, pull up on the them upwards. Warning! head restraint until it clicks into place. For downward adjustment, push in the To reinstall the head restraints, proceed adjustment button and lower the head as follows: All occupants, including the driver, should not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat restraint while holding the button to the 1. Hold down both the adjustment until the head restraints are placed in their desired height. button and release button while placing proper positions in order to minimize the the head restraint post into the holes. risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. 2. Then, reposition the head restraint to Head restraints should never be adjusted the appropriate height for the while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a passengers. vehicle with the head restraints improperly adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or death in the event of a collision. Warning!
Note: To allow maximum visibility for the driver, if the head restraints are not in A loose head restraint thrown forward in GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE use, lower the head restraint all the way. a collision or hard stop could cause serious 04076S0002EM injury or death to occupants of the vehicle. Rear Head Restraints (Adjustments) Rear Head Restraint Always securely stow removed head restraints in a location outside the occupant 1 — Adjustment Button compartment. 2 — Release Button Warning! ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the vehicle to properly protect Note: To allow maximum visibility for the the occupants. Follow the re-installation All occupants, including the driver, should driver, if the head restraints are not in instructions above prior to operating the not operate a vehicle or sit in a vehicle’s seat use, lower the head restraint all the way. vehicle or occupying a seat. until the head restraints are placed in their proper positions in order to minimize the Head Restraints (Removal) risk of neck injury in the event of a crash. To remove the head restraints, proceed Head restraints should never be adjusted as follows: while the vehicle is in motion. Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly 1. Raise the head restraints to their adjusted or removed could cause serious maximum height. 30 injury or death in the event of a collision. STEERING WHEEL Adjustments Warning! This feature allows you to tilt the steering column upward or downward. It Do not adjust the steering column while also allows you to lengthen or shorten the driving. Adjusting the steering column while steering column. The tilt/telescoping driving or driving with the steering column lever is located below the steering wheel unlocked, could cause the driver to lose at the end of the steering column. control of the vehicle. Failure to follow this warning may result in serious injury or death.
To Adjust The Position: 1. Pull the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle down to the open position. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the desired position. 3. Lock the desired position by pushing the Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle to the closed position.
04086S0001EM Warning! Steering Wheel Adjustment
1 — Tilt/Telescoping Control Handle It is absolutely forbidden to carry out any A — Open after-market operation involving steering B — Closed system or steering column modifications (e.g. installation of anti-theft device) that could adversely affect performance. Doing so could void the New Vehicle Limited Warrant, cause SERIOUS SAFETY PROBLEMS INCLUDING INJURY,and also result in the vehicle not meeting type-approval requirements.
31 Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped MIRRORS While the engine is running, push the Warning! Electrochromic Mirror heated steering wheel button on the instrument panel. This mirror automatically adjusts for Persons who are unable to feel pain to the headlight glare from vehicles behind you. skin because of advanced age, chronic The electrochromic mirror has a power illness, diabetes, spinal cord injury, button to activate/deactivate the medication, alcohol use, exhaustion, or other automatic dimming/anti-glaring function. physical conditions must exercise care when using the steering wheel heater. It may cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if used for long periods. Do not place anything on the steering wheel that insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering wheel covers of any type and material. This may cause the steering 04086S0002EM wheel heater to overheat. Heated Steering Wheel Button When the function is enabled, the indicator on the button will illuminate. 04106S0002EM Note: The heated steering wheel Electrochromic Mirror Power Button GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE function can only be activated in temperatures below 39°F (4°C). When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the automatic dimming feature is Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start deactivated. On models that are equipped with remote start, the heated steering wheel can be Outside Power Mirrors programmed to come on during remote Power Adjustment start. The feature can be activated The power mirrors can be adjusted with through the Information and the ignition ON. Entertainment System. Refer to the Information and Entertainment System Select the desired mirror using the power Owner’s Manual Supplement for further mirror control. information.
32 Power Folding Automatic Dimming Mirrors With the power mirror control knob in the Like the electrochromic mirror, an neutral position, move it to the power automatic dimming feature is also folding position. Move the knob again to available on the outside rear view mirrors return the mirrors to the driving position. to prevent glare. The automatic dimming If the power mirror control knob is moved button is the same for all rear view again during door mirror folding (from mirrors. closed to open position and vice versa), the movement direction is reversed. Warning! Automatic Activation 04106S0004EM Activating the central door locking Power Mirror Control system from outside the vehicle Vehicles and other objects seen in an outside convex mirror will look smaller and farther 1 — Power Mirror Control Knob automatically folds the mirrors. The away than they really are. Relying too much A — Left mirrors return to the driving position on side convex mirrors could cause you to when the vehicle is then unlocked. B — Right collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside mirror when judging the size C — Power Folding Position If the door mirrors were folded using the power mirror control knob, they can only or distance of a vehicle seen in a side convex D — Neutral be returned to the driving position by mirror. rotating the knob again. To adjust the selected mirror, push the Note: The power folding operation can Heated Mirrors knob in the direction desired. be enabled only when the vehicle speed is Push the rear defrost button in the Note: Once adjustment is complete, lower than 31 mph (50 km/h). They can climate controls to activate the heated rotate the knob to the neutral position to only be manually controlled up to that mirrors. prevent accidental movements. speed.
33 EXTERIOR LIGHTS The exterior lights can be activated only The DRL can be activated/deactivated when the ignition is in the ON position, from the Information and Entertainment Headlight Switch except for the parking lights. Refer to System, by selecting the following The headlight switch is located to the left "Parking Lights" in this section for more functions in sequence on the main MENU: of the steering wheel on the instrument information. 1. “Settings.” panel. This switch controls the operation The instrument panel and the various of the headlights, parking lights, controls on the dashboard will be 2. “Lights.” instrument panel lights, instrument panel illuminated when the exterior lights are light dimming, interior lights and rear fog turned on. 3. “Daytime Running Lights.” lights. Automatic Headlights Note: The Daytime Running Lights In addition, there are buttons for parking cannot be deactivated in Canadian sensors deactivation and stop/start. This system automatically turns the markets. Refer to “Starting And Operating” for headlights on or off according to ambient further information. light levels. Rear Fog Light Function Activation The rear fog light switch is integrated From the O (off) position, turn the light with the headlight switch. switch to the (AUTO) position. Push the button to turn the rear fog Note: The function can only operate with lights on/off. the ignition position cycled to ON. The rear fog lights turn on only when the headlights or parking lights are turned on. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Function Deactivation The lights can be turned off by pushing To deactivate the function, turn the light the button again or by turning the switch to a position other than the headlight switch to the O (off) position. (AUTO) position. When the engine is stopped with the rear 04126S0001NA Daytime Running Lights (DRL) fog lights on, they will remain off the next Headlight Switch With the ignition cycled to ON, and the time the engine is started. 1 — Parking Sensors Deactivation But- light switch turned to the position, if Parking Lights ton the dusk sensor detects sufficient 2 — Parking Light, Daylight Running external light, the Daytime Running With the ignition in the STOP position, Lights, Headlight Switch Lights will turn on automatically while the turn the headlight switch to the 3 — Instrument Panel Dimmer other lights remain off. position to turn the parking lights on. All of the parking lights will turn on for 4 — Rear Fog Light Button If the turn signals are operated, the eight minutes, and opening the door 5 — Stop/Start Button brightness of the corresponding Daytime activates an audible warning. Running Lights will be decreased as long as the turn signals are on. 34 To leave only the lights on one side Function Deactivation (right/left) illuminated, you must move This function is deactivated by turning on the multifunction lever (located on the the headlights, the side lights, or by left side of the steering wheel) to the side cycling the ignition to ON. that you want to remain on. With the parking lights on, the warning light on Adaptive Frontlight System (AFS the instrument panel will illuminate. Function) — If Equipped Note: Cycling the ignition to ON turns off This is a system combined with Xenon the parking lights, which were only headlights (Bi-Xenon 35 W headlamp if illuminated on one side. equipped) which directs the headlights horizontally, and continuously and Headlight Off Delay automatically adapts them to the driving 04126S0020EM Multifunction Lever The “Headlight Off Delay” function delays conditions around bends or when the turning off of the headlights for a set cornering. The high beam headlights are turned off time when the ignition is cycled OFF. The system directs the headlights to light by pulling the lever to its original position. The function can be activated from the up the road in the best way, taking into The warning light/icon will turn off in Information and Entertainment System account the speed of the vehicle and the the instrument panel when the headlights by selecting the following functions in bend or corner angle, as well as the speed are turned off. sequence on the main menu: of steering. Flashing The Headlights The adaptive lights are automatically 1. “Settings.” Pulling the multifunction lever toward the activated when the vehicle is started. steering wheel will activate the high 2. “Lights.” High Beam Headlights beam headlights manually. The lights will remain on as long as the lever is held. 3. “Headlight Off Delay.” To activate the fixed high beam Once the lever is released, the lights will The side lights and the headlights stay on headlights, push the multifunction lever, resume the previous position. for a time that can be set between 30, located on the left side of the steering 60, and 90 seconds. wheel, towards the instrument panel. The Automatic High Beam Headlights — headlight switch must be turned to the If Equipped Function Activation (AUTO) or (ON) position. The Automatic High Beam Headlights With the headlights on, cycle the ignition With high beam headlights on, the system provides increased forward to STOP,the timer will then start. High Beam Indicator on the lighting at night by automating high beam Note: To activate this function, the instrument panel will illuminate. control through the use of a digital headlights must be deactivated within camera mounted on the windshield. This two minutes after the ignition has been camera detects vehicle specific light and cycled to STOP. automatically switches from high beams to low beams until the approaching vehicle is out of view. 35 This function is enabled with the Note: “Lane Change” Function Information and Entertainment System, If the system recognizes heavy Tap the lever up or down once, without and can only be activated with the light traffic areas, the automatic functions moving beyond the detent, and the turn switch turned to (AUTO). remain disabled independently of the signal (right or left) will flash five times. If the high beam headlights are on, the vehicle’s speed. Then, the turn signal (right or left) will blue icon/warning light will illuminate automatically turn off. in the instrument panel. The Automatic High Beam To turn off the flashing before the end of When the speed is higher than 37 mph functionality may also be influenced by: the cycle, move the lever in the opposite (60 km/h) and the function is active, the Reflections on road signs direction until the first click (about half lights will turn off if the multifunction way). lever is pushed again. Dim headlights from oncoming traffic Static Bending Light Function (SBL) — When the speed is lower than 15 mph Poor weather conditions If Equipped (25 km/h) and the function is active, the Presence of dirt or other The SBL function utilizes Light Emitting function switches the high beam obstructions on the sensor headlights off. Diodes (LEDs) in order to better If the high beam headlights are operated Damage to the windshield illuminate the street and increase the light angle while turning. This function is quickly again (pushing the multifunction Turn Signals lever towards the instrument panel), the enabled by rotating the light switch to warning light/icon will illuminate in the To activate the turn signals function, position or (AUTO). The SBL LEDs instrument panel, and the high beam move the multifunction lever, located on activate when the speed is below 25 mph GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE headlights will turn on constantly until the left side of the steering wheel, up or (40 km/h) and the steering radius is the speed exceeds 37 mph (60 km/h). down until it reaches the detent. Moving below 0.3 miles (500 m). When the speed of 37 mph (60 km/h) is the lever upward flashes the right turn This function can be activated/ exceeded again, the automatic signal and moving the lever downward deactivated on the Information and functioning is reactivated. will flash the left turn signal. Entertainment System by selecting the The or turn signal will blink on the following functions in sequence on the If the multifunction lever is pushed again main menu: with the Automatic High Beam instrument panel. Headlights activated, the Automatic High The turn signals turn off automatically 1. “Settings.” Beam Headlights function deactivates. when the vehicle is brought back onto a 2. “Lights.” To deactivate the automatic headlight straight course. function, rotate the headlight switch to 3. “Cornering Lights.” the position.
36 INTERIOR LIGHTS being drained once the doors are closed. After 15 minutes to preserve the If a light is left on accidently, the battery. Front Map Reading Lights overhead lights turn off automatically Timing While Getting Out Of The The front map/reading and overhead approximately 15 minutes after the Vehicle lights are mounted in the overhead engine has been turned OFF. After cycling the ignition to STOP,the console. Each light can be turned on by Overhead Light Timing overhead lights will turn on as follows: pushing the corresponding switch on the console. These switches are backlit for To assist getting in and out of the vehicle For a few seconds after the engine night time visibility. To turn the lights off, at night or in poorly-lit areas, two timed stops. push the switch a second time. modes are available to keep the interior lighting on after the engine is cycled OFF. For approximately three minutes when Timing While Getting Into The Vehicle one of the doors is opened. The overhead lights will illuminate as For a few seconds when the last door follows: is closed. For a few seconds when the doors are The timing ends automatically when the unlocked. doors are locked. For approximately three minutes when Vanity Mirror Lights one of the doors is opened. On the driver and passenger sun visor, For a few seconds when the doors are there is a light which illuminates the sun visor mirror when folded down. 04136S0001EM locked. Overhead Console Timing is interrupted when the ignition is 1 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light Switch cycled to ON. 2 — Rear Overhead Lights Switch Exiting Overhead Light Timing 3 — Overhead Lights Switch The overhead lights will turn off as 4 — Front Map Reading Lights Switch follows: 5 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light After all doors are closed upon Switch entering the vehicle, the three minute 6 — Passenger’s Reading/Map Light timer will stop and a second timer will 7 — Center Reading/Map Light start for the overhead lights. This timing 8 — Driver’s Reading/Map Light will end when the ignition is cycled to ON. 04136S0002EM Sun Visor Mirror When the doors are locked (either with Note: Before getting out of the vehicle, key fob or with key inserted on driver’s 1 — Sun Visor Mirror Cover ensure that the overhead lights are off. side door). This will prevent the battery level from 37 The courtesy light turns on automatically Door Light by lifting the cover. This vehicle is equipped with door Glove Compartment Light courtesy lamps that illuminate the entry way for the driver or passenger when the This light turns on automatically when the door is opened, and turns off when it is glove compartment is opened and turns closed. off when it is closed. The light turns on and off regardless of The light turns on and off regardless of the ignition status. the ignition status.
04136S0005EM Exterior Door Handle Light Rear Overhead Light The rear overhead lights are activated or deactivated by two on/off switches located within the lights on the ceiling above the rear seats.
04136S0007EM 04136S0003EM
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Door Light Glove Compartment Light As part of the "Passive Entry" system, Interior Ambient Lighting another light can be found under each The brightness of the interior lighting can exterior door handle. be adjusted via the Information and Entertainment System. To access the adjustment function, on the main menu select the following items in
sequence: 04136S0004EM Rear Overhead Light 1. "Settings." 1 — Passenger Rear Overhead Light 2. "Interior Ambient Lighting." 2 — Driver Rear Overhead Light 3. "Lights." 3 — Driver Rear Overhead Light Switch The lights can be adjusted to seven 4—Passenger Rear Overhead Light Switch different levels of brightness. 38 The light turns on when a door is opened. Instrument Panel Dimmer Control WINDSHIELD WIPERS Note: The light will turn off With the daytime running lights or Windshield Wiper Stalk automatically after a few minutes if a headlights on, rotate the dimmer control door is left open. To turn it on again, open upward to increase the instrument panel The windshield wiper stalk is located on another door or close and reopen the brightness and the control button icons. the right side of the steering wheel. same door. Rotate the dimmer control downward to The windshield wipers will only operate Courtesy Trunk Lights decrease brightness. with the ignition cycled to ON. The trunk features two courtesy lights. Caution! These courtesy lights turn on automatically when the trunk is opened and turn off when it is closed. Turn the windshield wipers off when driving through an automatic car wash. Damage to the windshield wipers may result if the wiper control is left in any position other than off. In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and allow the wipers to return to the 04126S0055EM “Park” position before turning off the Dimmer Control engine. If the wiper switch is left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is restarted. 04136S0006B Always remove any buildup of snow that Courtesy Trunk Lights prevents the windshield wiper blades from The courtesy lights will turn on and off returning to the off position. If the regardless of the ignition status. windshield wiper control is turned off and the blades cannot return to the off position, Note: If the trunk is left open, the lights damage to the wiper motor may occur. will automatically turn off after 15 minutes to preserve battery life.
39 Windshield Wiper/Washers Rain Sensors Rotating the switch to the position, Warning! activates the first, less sensitive level of the Rain Sensing function. Rotating the switch to the position, Sudden loss of visibility through the activates the second, more sensitive windshield could lead to a collision. You level of the Rain Sensing function. Refer might not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of the to “Rain Sensor” in this section for more windshield during freezing weather, warm information on how this system the windshield with the defroster before and functions. during windshield washer use. Windshield Washer Operation
04146S000118 Pull the stalk toward the steering wheel Rain Sensor Windshield Wiper Switch to operate the windshield washer. The Rain Sensor is located behind the Operation: The switch on the wiper Keep the stalk pulled to activate both the interior rear view mirror. This feature stalk can be set to the following windshield washer jet and the windshield senses moisture on the windshield and positions: wiper with a single movement. The wipers automatically activates the wipers for and washers will continue to operate until Windshield Wiper Off. the driver. you let go of the stalk. Low Sensitivity Rain Sensing. The windshield wiper stops working three
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE High Sensitivity Rain Sensing. strokes after the stalk is released, Low Continuous Wiper Speed. followed by a final stroke six seconds High Continuous Wiper Speed. later to complete the cycle. Windshield Wiper Operation Mist Rotating the switch to the position Use this feature when weather activates the first (low) level continuous conditions make occasional usage of the speed of the windshield wipers in manual wipers necessary. Push the stalk upward mode. to the MIST position and release for a Rotating the switch to the position single wiping cycle. This function is useful 04146S0002B activates the second (high) level to remove small deposits of dust from Rain Sensor the windshield or morning dew. continuous speed of the windshield The feature is especially useful for road wipers in manual mode. Note: This function does not activate the splash or over spray from the windshield windshield washer. To spray windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate the washer fluid onto the windshield, the end of the multifunction lever to one of washing function must be used. four settings to activate this feature. 40 The sensor has an adjustment range that The sensor continues to operate and it is CLIMATE CONTROL varies progressively from wiper still (no possible to set the windshield wiper to stroke) when the windshield is dry, to continuous mode or . The failure Passenger Compartment Air Vents wiper at continuous speed (fast indication remains on for as long as the Side Air Vents operation) with intense rain. sensor is active. To adjust the position of the Side Air Activation The rain sensor is able to recognize and Vents, move the Side Air Vent Adjuster automatically adjust itself in the Rotating the wiper switch to position (2) in any direction. presence of the following conditions: or activates the rain sensor. Rotate the Side Air Vent Adjuster (2) The activation of the rain sensor system Presence of dirt on the controlled to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Side is done by tapping the wiper stalk surface (e.g. salt, dirt, etc.). Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close upwards while the switch is in the or Presence of streaks of water caused the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise position. by the worn window wiper blades. will open the vent. The variation in sensitivity during rain sensor operation is also signaled by a Difference between day and night. stroke of the wiper (command acquired and implemented). This stroke is also executed with the windshield dry. If the windshield washer is used with the rain sensor activated, the normal washing cycle is performed, after which the rain sensor resumes its normal automatic operation. Note: Keep the glass in the sensor area clean. 04156S0002EM Side Air Vents Deactivation 1 — Demister Air Vents Use the wiper switch or cycle the ignition 2 — Side Air Vent Adjuster to STOP. In the event of malfunction of the rain sensor while it is active, the windshield Central Air Vents wiper operates intermittently at a speed To adjust the position of the Central consistent with the sensitivity setting of Air Vents, move the Central Air Vent the rain sensor, whether or not there is Adjuster (2) up or down. rain on the glass for as long as the sensor failure is indicated on the display. Rotate the Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster (3) to adjust the air flow. 41 Rotating Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster (3) up will open the vents, allowing for maximum airflow. Rotating it down will close the vents.
04156S0004EM Rear Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Rear Air Vents 2 — Rear Air Vent Adjuster 04156S0003EM Central Air Vents 1 — Adjustable Central Air Vents 2 — Central Air Vent Adjuster 3 — Central Air Vent Air Flow Adjuster
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 4 — Windshield Front Defroster Vent
Rear Air Vents To adjust the position of the Rear Air Vents, move the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) in any direction. Rotate the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) to adjust the air flow. Rotating the Rear Air Vent Adjuster (2) clockwise will close the vent. Rotating it counterclockwise will open the vent.
42 Automatic Dual-Zone Climate Control System Controls
04156V0005EM Automatic Climate Control System 1 — Driver Temperature Adjustment 6 — Rear Defrost Button 11 — Passenger Heated Seat Button — Knob If Equipped 2 — Driver Side AUTO Button (Auto- 7 — Passenger Side Air Distribution 12 — Air Conditioning Button matic Operation) Selection Button 3 — Driver Side Air Distribution Selec- 8 — Passenger Side AUTO Button (Au- 13 — Steering Wheel Heater Button — tion Button tomatic Operation) If Equipped 4 — Max Defrost Button 9 — Passenger Temperature Adjust- 14 — Driver Side Heated Seat Button ment Knob — If Equipped 5 — Blower Speed Adjustment Knob 10 — SYNC Button (Set Temperature 15 — Air Recirculation Button Alignment) Driver/Passenger Side
43 Air recirculation Rear Defroster Caution! The Climate Control System can also be System deactivation operated manually by using the buttons and knobs on the faceplate. Operating Mode The system uses R1234yf refrigerant, which Manual selections will override the does not pollute the environment in the The Climate Control system can be event of accidental leakage. Under no automatic settings, which are stored until activated in different ways. It is circumstances, use R134a and R12 fluids, the AUTO button is pushed. If the system recommended to use the automatic which are incompatible with the components intervenes for safety reasons, the function. Push the AUTO button and set of this system. automatic setting will take control of the the desired temperatures. system. The automatic system adjusts the Description The below operations will not deactivate temperature, quantity, and distribution the automatic (AUTO) function: of air introduced into the passenger The Automatic Dual Zone Climate compartment. It also controls air Control System adjusts the temperature Air Recirculation activation/ deactivation recirculation and the activation of the air and air distribution independently conditioner. between the driver and passenger. A/C activation/deactivation At any time during automatic operation, The system maintains the set SYNC function activation you can change the temperature, activate temperature inside the passenger or deactivate the Rear Defroster, compartment and compensates for Rear Window Defrost activation/ activate SYNC, activate or deactivate outside temperature change. deactivation the air conditioner, and activate or GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE Note: The reference temperature is When in AUTO mode, the vehicle’s deactivate air recirculation. The system 72 °F (22 °C) for optimal comfort internal temperature is controlled will automatically adjust to the new management. according to the set temperature. settings. The automatic setting will adjust the The following can be manually set or Climate Control Display Settings following to maintain comfort within the adjusted: passenger compartment: The Climate Control settings are visible Driver/passenger air temperature on the Information and Entertainment Air temperature from the driver/front System radio screen. passenger side vents Blower speed (continuous variation) The display on the Information and Air distribution from the driver/front Air distribution (seven positions for Entertainment System is a pop up passenger side vents driver and passenger) window (1), which is activated by pushing Fan speed (continuous variation of the A/C activation the buttons or turning the knobs on the air flow) Climate Control system. The indicator Front Defroster lights located on the number of buttons Compressor variations (for Air recirculation and knobs indicate that the selected cooling/dehumidifying the air) feature is on/off. If no operation is 44 performed for a predetermined time, the these functions, rotate the Temperature Air flow distributed between the pop-up will close on the display. Adjustment Knob to the desired floor vents, windshield, and front temperature. side window defrosting/demisting Rear passengers’ temperature is linked vents. This distribution setting to driver side selection. warms the passenger compartment Air Distribution Selection while preventing the windows from Push the Air Distribution Selection fogging up. button on the faceplate to change the In AUTO mode, the Climate Controls mode of air distribution. automatically manage the air distribution. When set manually, the Air flow to the windshield and respective symbols on the Information demister window vents to and Entertainment System indicate the 0521128655US demist/defrost them. air distribution setting. 1 — Climate Control Pop-up Display Air flow at the central and side Fan Speed Adjustment Air Temperature Adjustment dashboard vents to ventilate the Turn the Blower Speed Knob to increase chest and the face. Rotate the driver or passenger or decrease the blower speed. The speed Temperature Adjustment Knob clockwise Air flow to the front and rear floor is displayed with lighted indicators in the for warmer temperatures or vents. This setting heats the Information and Entertainment System counterclockwise for cooler display. temperatures. The set temperatures are passenger compartment the shown on the Information and quickest. Maximum fan speed = all indicators illuminated on the Information and Entertainment System. Air flow distributed between the Entertainment System display Push the SYNC button to sync the driver floor vents (hotter air) and the and passenger air temperatures. central and side dashboard vents Minimum fan speed = one indicator Rotate the passenger Temperature (cooler air). This air distribution illuminated on the Information and Adjustment Knob to cancel the SYNC setting is useful on sunny days Entertainment System display function. This will set a new passenger during spring and autumn. The fan can be turned off by rotating the side temperature. Blower Speed Knob counterclockwise to Rotate the Temperature Adjustment the off position (all segments on the Knob fully clockwise to engage the HI Information and Entertainment System (maximum heating) setting or fully display are turned off). counterclockwise to engage the LO Note: To restore automatic control of (maximum cooling) setting. To deactivate the fan speed, push the AUTO button.
45 AUTO Button temperature and return to separate air In automatic operation, air recirculation temperature management. will be controlled by the system When the AUTO button is pushed according to outside environmental (indicator illuminated), the Climate Air Recirculation And Air Quality conditions. Control system automatically adjusts the System (AQS) following settings: Air Recirculation is managed according to Note: Quantity and distribution of air flow in the following operating mode: With the AQS function active and the passenger compartment Automatic engagement: indicator is after the internal air recirculation The air conditioner illuminated above the “A”on the Air system has been functioning for a set Recirculation Button amount of time, the Climate Control Air recirculation System enables air intake to cycle the Forced activation (air circulation Cancels any manual settings air in the passenger compartment for a always activated): indicator illuminated set time. The AQS function is disabled Selecting the AUTO function illuminates above the icon on the Air during the air changes. the indicator on the A/C button or . Recirculation Button The engagement of the recirculation If air distribution or the fan speed is Forced deactivation (air recirculation system makes it possible to reach the manual adjusted, the AUTO button always off with intake of outside air): required heating or cooling conditions indicator turns off to indicate that the both indicators not illuminated on the Air faster. It is, however, inadvisable to use Climate Control system is no longer in Recirculation Button it on rainy/cold days as it can increase AUTO mode. The three operating conditions are the possibility of the windows fogging. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE After a manual adjustment, push the When the outside temperature is low, AUTO button to resume the automatic obtained by pushing the Air Recirculation Button in sequence. recirculation is forced off to prevent the system. windows from fogging up. SYNC Button Enabling The Air Quality System (AQS) Function — If Equipped A/C Compressor Push the SYNC button (indicator When the automatic recirculation Push the A/C button to activate or illuminated) to sync the passenger side function is selected, the AQS function deactivate the A/C compressor (indicator air temperature with the driver side air automatically activates internal air illuminated when activated). The A/C temperature. recirculation when the outside air is compressor will remain off even after the This function makes temperature polluted (e.g. in heavy traffic and tunnels). engine has stopped. regulation easier when the driver is At low external temperatures or in high When the A/C compressor is turned off, traveling alone. humidity, the automatic function turns the system deactivates air recirculation Turn the passenger Temperature off to avoid fogging up the windows. The to prevent the windows from fogging up. Adjustment Knob or push the passenger user can select the function again by If the climate control system can side Air Distribution Selection Button to pushing the Air Recirculation Button. maintain the temperature, with the A/C change the passenger side air turned off, the AUTO feature will remain 46 on and the AUTO button indicator light Adjust the air flow towards the When outside temperature is low, the will not switch off. windshield and front side windows system may turn the compressor on and turn air recirculation off for safer driving. To restore automatic control of the A/C Activate the Rear Window Defroster compressor, push the A/C button or the Switching Off/On The Climate Control Display the fan speed (indicators AUTO button. With the A/C compressor System off, the air speed can be set manually illuminated) and current air distribution using the Air Speed Adjustment Knob. setting Switching Off The Climate Control When the A/C compressor is on, and the Note: The MAX-DEF function remains System engine is running, air speed cannot be active for approximately three minutes Rotate the Air Speed Adjustment Knob lower than the minimum speed (only one once the engine coolant reaches the completely counterclockwise to turn off indicator light is lit). proper temperature. the Climate Control System. Note: When the A/C is off the Climate When the function is on, AUTO mode will With the air conditioner off: Control system can not produce air that deactivate. The only manual operations Air recirculation is on is colder than the current outside possible are adjusting blower speed and temperature. Under certain turning off the Rear Window Defroster. The A/C compressor is off environmental conditions, windows could Pushing the button switches off the The fan is off fog up rapidly, since the air is not MAX-DEF function. dehumidified. The heated rear window can be Rear Defroster activated/deactivated Front Defroster And MAX-DEF Function Push the Rear Defroster button to Note: The climate control system stores activate (indicators illuminated) the Rear the previously set temperatures and Push the Front Defroster button Defroster. resumes operation when any button on (indicator illuminated) to defrost the The Rear Defroster will turn off after the system is pushed. windshield and side windows. 20 minutes or once the engine is turned Switching On The Climate Control While in MAX-DEF function, the air off. To reactive the Rear Defroster, push System conditioner will: the Rear Defroster button. To switch the climate control system on Activate the air conditioner Note: To avoid damage, do not apply in automatic mode, push the AUTO compressor when the weather allows stickers over the interior heating button. filaments of the Rear Defroster. Turn air recirculation off Stop/Start Humidity Sensor Set the maximum air temperature (HI) The climate control system manages the on both the driver and passenger side The Humidity Sensor helps to prevent the Stop/Start system. Stop/Start has the windows from fogging up. The AUTO engine shut off when vehicle speed is Activate a blower speed based on the function (indicator illuminated) must be temperature of the engine coolant 0 mph (0 km/h) to maintain comfort on for the Humidity Sensor to function. within the vehicle. 47 Stop/Start will deactivate in the Note: POWER WINDOWS following scenarios: In harsh climate conditions, limit the Power Window Switches The climate control system is in AUTO use of the Stop/Start system to prevent mode (indicator illuminated), and the the compressor from continuously The power window switches work with vehicle has yet to reach the set switching on and off. This will cause the ignition in the ON position and for temperature rapid misting of the windows and the three minutes after the ignition has been accumulation of humidity in the placed in the STOP position. When one of The climate control system is in LO passenger compartment. the front doors is opened, this operation maximum cooling is disabled. When the Stop/Start system is on, The climate control system is in HI Driver Side Front Door Controls the climate control system will always maximum heating The switches are located on the door take air in from outside, reducing the panel trim. All windows can be controlled The climate control system is in the probability of the windows fogging up. from the driver side door panel. MAX-DEF status Additional Heater — If Equipped When the Stop/Start system is active, Note: The additional heater the engine will restart if the inside automatically operates if the outside temperature changes significantly, or if temperature and engine coolant the LO setting, or MAX-DEF setting, is temperature are low. The heater will not activated. operate if battery voltage is low. With Stop/Start system on, air flow is
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE reduced to keep the compartment System Maintenance comfort conditions for longer. In winter, the Climate Control System Until the temperature drastically must be turned on at least once a month changes within the cabin, the climate for approximately ten minutes. 04166S0001EM control system will continue to maintain Have the system inspected at an Power Window Switches the temperature while the engine is off. authorized dealer before the summer. By deactivating the Stop/Start system 1 — Front Left 4 — Window with the button located on the Window Switch Lockout Switch dashboard, the climate control system 2 — Front Right 5 — Rear Left will take priority over the engine shutting Window Switch Window Switch off. 3 — Rear Right Window Switch
48 Window Opening This device is also useful if the windows POWER SUNROOF — Push the buttons to open the desired are activated accidentally by children IF EQUIPPED window. inside the vehicle. Power Sunroof Each button has two position steps. Push The anti-pinch safety function is gently (first position step) for manual activated both during the manual and the The power sunroof consists of two glass "burst" window travel, while pushing the automatic operation of the window. panels (the front one is power and the same button harder (second position When the anti-pinch system is activated, rear one fixed) and is fitted with a power step) activates "continuous automatic" the window closing is immediately sunshade in the front, as well as a operation. interrupted. Then the window closing is manually operated sunshade in the rear. If the button is pushed again, the window automatically reversed and the window Operation of the sunroof is only possible will stop in the desired position. lowers by about eight inches (20 cm) in with the ignition cycled to the ON Window Closing relation to the first stop position. The position. Refer to “Ignition” in this window cannot be operated during this chapter for further information. Pull the window switch up to move the time. window upward. Hold the switch for at The sunroof has three preset positions: Note: In the event of an error, or if the least half of a second and the window will Fully closed. go up automatically. anti-pinch protection is activated three consecutive times, the automatic closing Comfort (intermediate opening). To stop the window during Auto-Up operation of the window will be Fully open. operation, push or pull the window switch deactivated. In order to restore the again. correct operation of the system, the Note: Youcannot have the sunshade Passenger Side Front Door/Rear Door window must be lowered. closed when the sunroof is open. Controls Power Window System Initialization There are single window controls on the If power supply is interrupted, the passenger and rear door trim panels electric window automatic operation Warning! which operate the door windows. must be reinitialized. Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch To perform the initialization procedure, Never leave children unattended in a Protection which must be done on each door with the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked The vehicle may be equipped with an doors closed, manually fully close the vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or near anti-pinch safety device for closing the window to be initialized. the vehicle, or in a location accessible to windows. children. Do not leave the ignition of a If the safety system senses any obstacle vehicle equipped with keyless ignition in the ON mode. Occupants, particularly while the window is closing, it will stop unattended children, can become entrapped the window’s movement and reverse it, by the power sunroof while operating the depending on its position. power sunroof switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury or death. 49 In a collision, there is a greater risk of Vent Opening being thrown from a vehicle with an open To bring the roof into vent position, push sunroof. Youcould also be seriously injured and release the vent button. or killed. Always fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are This type of vent opening can be also properly secured. activated regardless of the position of the sunroof. When starting with the roof Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow your fingers, other in the closed position, pushing the vent body parts, or any object, to project through button automatically causes the sunroof the sunroof opening. Injury may result. to open to the vent position. If the roof is already open, the button must be held 04186S0001EM until the roof reaches the vent-opening Opening Sunroof And Power Shade Buttons position. To open the sunroof’s front panel, push 1 — Power Shade Open/Close Pushing vent button again during the open/close button toward the rear of 2 — Open/Close Button automatic movement of the roof will stop the vehicle to open to the comfort 3 — Vent Open/Close it. position (half way). Pushing the button a Sun Shade Movement second time will open to the fully open position. The front sunshade is power operated. The automatic motion can be interrupted Caution! Push the Power Shade open/close button in any position by pushing the open/close toward the rear of the vehicle to open the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE button again. front sun shade to the three quarter open Do not open the sun roof if a roof rack or position. Pushing the button a second crossbars are fitted. Do not open the sun time will open the sunshade completely. roof if there is snow or ice on it: you may damage it. Push the Power Shade open/close button toward the front of the vehicle to close the sun shade. Closing The automatic motion can be interrupted From the fully open position, push the in any position by pushing the Power open/close button toward the front of Shade on/off button again. the vehicle. The roof will close To open the rear sunshade, pull sunshade completely. manually toward the rear of the vehicle. The automatic motion can be interrupted in any position by pushing the open/close button again.
50 Pinch Protect Feature 5. Within five seconds, hold the HOOD open/close button down. The roof will The sunroof has an anti-pinch safety perform a complete automatic opening Opening system capable of detecting the and closing cycle (to indicate that the presence of an obstacle during the To open the hood, proceed as follows: initialization procedure has been closing movement. If an obstacle is successful). If this does not occur, the 1. Pull the release lever located on the detected, the system intervenes and the procedure must be restarted from the driver’s side kick panel. movement of the sunroof is immediately beginning. reversed into opening. Initialization Procedure Automatic operation of the sunroof must be initialized again in case of faulty sunroof operation. It may also be necessary to initialize the sunroof after the vehicle’s battery as been disconnected and then reconnected. Note: The anti-pinch safety device is deactivated during the initialization 04196S0001EM procedure. Hood Release Lever Proceed as follows: 2. Go to the outside of the vehicle and position yourself in front of the grille. 1. Push the open/close button to bring the roof into the completely closed 3. Lift the hood slightly. position. 4. Move the under-hood latch from right 2. Cycle the ignition to the STOP to left to release the hood. position and wait at least ten seconds. 3. Cycle the ignition to the AVVposition. Refer to “Ignition” in this chapter for further information. 4. Hold the open/close button down for at least ten seconds. Youshould then hear the mechanical stop of the roof motor.
51 Closing TRUNK To close, lower the hood to The trunk unlocking is electrically approximately 16 inches (40 cm) from operated and is deactivated when the the engine compartment then let it drop. vehicle is in motion. Make sure that the hood is completely closed and fully latched. Do this by trying Opening to open it. If it is not perfectly closed, do Opening From The Outside not try to push the hood lid down, but When unlocked, the trunk lid can be open it and repeat the procedure. opened from outside the vehicle using Note: Always check that the hood is the exterior trunk lid release button closed correctly to prevent it from located between the plate lights. Push opening while the vehicle is travelling. the button until you hear a “click.” The Since the hood is equipped with a double trunk lid can also be opened by quickly locking system, one for each side, you pushing the exterior trunk lid release must check that it is closed on both its button on the key fob twice. side ends. 04196S0002B Release Hood Latch To The Left Warning! 5. Raise the hood completely. The operation is assisted by the addition of GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE two gas props which hold it in the open Be sure the hood is fully latched before position. driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open when the vehicle is in Note: motion and block your vision. Failure to follow this warning could result in serious Do not tamper with the props and injury or death. assist the hood while lifting it. 04056S0005EM Use both hands to lift the hood. Exterior Trunk Lid Release Button Before lifting, check that the windshield wiper arms are not raised from the The turn signal indicators will blink and windshield or in operation, that the the interior lights will turn on when the vehicle is stationary and that the electric trunk lid is opened. They turn off park brake is engaged. automatically when the trunk lid is closed. The lights turn off automatically after a few minutes if the trunk lid is left open. 52 Opening From The Inside Pull the lever in the direction indicated by Trunk Initialization When unlocked, the trunk lid can be the arrow to open the trunk lid. The lever Note: If the battery is disconnected or opened from inside the vehicle using the can be seen in the dark. the protection fuse blows, the trunk lid interior trunk lid release button, located Closing opening/closing mechanism must be under the dashboard near the engine re-initialized as follows: Grip one of the handles and lower the hood opening lever. Push the trunk lid 1. Close all the doors and the trunk lid. release button until you hear a “click.” trunk lid until it clicks. 2. Push the lock button on the remote control. 3. Push the unlock button on the remote control. Trunk Specifications Rear Cargo Tie–Downs — If Equipped There are four hooks inside the trunk for attaching the cargo net or cables which can safely secure the cargo.
04206S0002EM 04206S0003EM Interior Trunk Lid Release Button Trunk Lid Interior Handles Trunk Lid Emergency Opening Note: A lever can be found in the trunk lid over It will not be possible to open the the lock to allow opening from the inside. trunk lid with a key or by pushing the button in the passenger compartment when the battery is disconnected. So, always position the manual trunk lid opening strap on the trunk lid lock before disconnecting the battery. Refer to “Storing The Vehicle” in “Servicing And 04206S0005EM Rear Cargo Tie-Downs Maintenance” for the procedure. Note: Do not apply a load greater than 22 lbs (10 kg) on a single hook. Cargo Net — If Equipped
04206S0006EM This is useful for correctly arranging the Emergency Release Button cargo and/or for transporting light materials. 53 INTERNAL EQUIPMENT Sun Visors Homelink Glove Compartment The sun visors are located at the sides of Description the interior rear view mirror. They can be Homelink is a fixed system installed on To open the glove compartment proceed adjusted forward and toward the side as follows: the vehicle. It can sync up to three window. different devices that activate garage 1. If equipped with a lock, unlock the To direct the visor toward the side doors, gates, lighting systems, and home glove compartment by placing the window, detach the visor from the or office alarm systems. emergency key in the lock on the handle. interior rear view mirror side hook and Programming turn it towards the side window. 2. Pull handle to open the glove compartment. From this position, the sun visor can also be extended toward to rear of the vehicle Warning! for additional blockage of sunlight. Courtesy mirrors with lights are fitted on the back of the sun visors and can be Vehicle exhaust contains carbon used even in poor light conditions. monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. Yourmotorized door or gate will open and close while you are programming the GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE universal transceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people, pets or other objects 04246S0001EM are in the path of the door or gate. Only use Opening The Glove Compartment this transceiver with a garage door opener When the glove compartment is opened, that has a “stop and reverse” feature as a light turns on to illuminate the inside of required by Federal safety standards. This the compartment. includes most garage door opener models 04246S0002EM manufactured after 1982. Do not use a Note: Do not insert large objects that Rotate Sun Visor Toward Passenger garage door opener without these safety will prevent the glove compartment from Window features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, closing completely. Always make sure on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety that the glove compartment is Note: A rear facing child restraint information or assistance. completely closed when driving. system should never be fitted in the front passenger seat. Always comply with the instructions on the sun visor. Refer to Note: Without starting the engine, "Child Restraints" in "Safety" for more activate the handbrake and place the information. ignition in the ON position. 54 The following operation will delete the inches from the HomeLink system 1. Read the garage door or gate motor manufacture’s standard codes and does (keeping the programmable button manufacturer manual. not need to be repeated during the pushed down). subsequent button programming: 2. The portable remote control seems to 2. If the indicator does not begin to flash have programmed to the HomeLink Push and hold the outer buttons (1 and quickly, change the distance between the system, but the garage door or gate can 3). After about ten seconds, the lighted HomeLink and the portable remote be neither opened or closed. indicators will start to flash. Release both control and try the procedure again. buttons. 3. Push the programmed button and 3. The HomeLink indicator flashes, first keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). With an slowly and then quickly. When the alternative code system, the indicator indicator starts to flash quickly, release flashes briefly, and then remains off for both buttons. two seconds. This sequence is repeated for 20 seconds. Using The Homelink System The HomeLink system activates the garage door or gate motor, just like the Warning! portable remote control. The car must be within the range of the garage door and the ignition must be in the ON position. Vehicle exhaust contains carbon Push the programmed button (1, 2 or 3). monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your 04246S0006NA vehicle in the garage while programming the Garage Door Opener (Homelink) While the signal is being transmitted, the indicator is lit and the system (garage transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious Buttons injury or death. door, gate, etc.) will respond. 1 — Homelink Button 1 If the HomeLink system does not Yourmotorized door or gate will open and 2 — Homelink Button 2 operate, the original portable remote close while you are programming the universal transceiver. Do not program the 3 — Homelink Button 3 control may be equipped with an 4 — Homelink Indicator transceiver if people, pets or other objects alternative code (refer to “Alternative are in the path of the door or gate. Only use Code Synchronization”). this transceiver with a garage door opener Note: Follow the steps below to begin If necessary, the original remote control that has a “stop and reverse” feature as programming your remote control to one can still be used to operate the system. required by Federal safety standards. This of the HomeLink buttons: includes most garage door opener models Alternative Code Synchronization manufactured after 1982. Do not use a 1. Push and hold the desired HomeLink To check whether the garage door or gate garage door opener without these safety button (1, 2 or 3). When the HomeLink motor has an alternative code, proceed features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, indicator begins to flash slowly, move the as follows: on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance. portable remote control one to three 55 Note: To program Homelink using an Programming A Single Key 2. When the HomeLink indicator begins Alternative Code, the car must be within It is possible to program another original to flash slowly, move the portable remote range of the garage door. Activate the remote control on an already control 1 to 3 inches from the system handbrake and turn the ignition to ON, programmed HomeLink key by canceling (keeping the programmable button without starting the engine. the previously stored frequency. pressed down). Proceed as follows: If the indicator does not begin to flash quickly, change the distance between the 1. Locate the “Learn” or “Train” button on Warning! the garage door or gate motor. The color HomeLink and the portable remote and position may vary depending on the control and try the procedure again. manufacturer (consult the garage door or Vehicle exhaust contains carbon The HomeLink indicator flashes, first gate manual). Push the “Learn” or “Train” monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your slowly and then quickly. When the button (this normally activates the vehicle in the garage while programming the indicator starts to flash quickly, release setting warning light). transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause serious injury or death. both buttons on the remote control. 2. Push the desired HomeLink button Yourmotorized door or gate will open and The system previously programmed to (1, 2 or 3). When the HomeLink indicator close while you are programming the HomeLink has now been deleted and the begins to flash slowly, move the portable universal transceiver. Do not program the new system is ready to use. This does not remote control one to three inches from transceiver if people, pets or other objects affect the other two HomeLink buttons in the HomeLink system (keeping the are in the path of the door or gate. Only use any way. programmable button pushed down). this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as Deleting Programmed Keys GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE 3. Within 30 seconds, push the required by Federal safety standards. This It is recommended to delete HomeLink programmed key (1, 2 or 3) and release it. includes most garage door opener models programming before selling the car. Push the programmed button a second manufactured after 1982. Do not use a All three keys are deleted garage door opener without these safety time and release it to conclude the simultaneously. operation. For some motors, the features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety Proceed as follows: operation will probably have to be information or assistance. repeated a third time to end the setting. 1. Push and hold the outer buttons The motor should now be capable of (1 and 3). After about ten seconds, the Note: Activate the handbrake and place recognizing the signal transmitted by indicator will start to flash. the ignition to ON without starting the HomeLink and then open/close the door engine. 2. Release both keys. or gate. Proceed as follows: 1. Push the desired HomeLink button and keep it pushed (1, 2 or 3). Do not release the button until the last operation has been performed. 56 Technical Information For After Sales Center Console Cupholder Service The center console storage compartment Two cupholders are available in the If you are unable to set up HomeLink is located between the front seats. center console. successfully after following the above To access the center console storage, lift instructions, contact After Sales Service the upper part of the center console as (HomeLink free hotline number shown below. 1-800-355-3515 ) with the following information: Vehicle make and model, including manufacturing year and country of purchase; Make, model, age and frequency of use of the original portable remote control (if known). 04246S0005EM General Information Cupholders In Center Console The following regulatory statement 1— Cover applies to all Radio Frequency (RF) 04246S0004EM devices equipped in this vehicle: Center Console To access the cupholders, slide the cover This device complies with Part 15 of the forward. To close the compartment, push FCC Rules and with Industry Canada Warning! the cover and it will close automatically. license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: Do not operate this vehicle with a console compartment lid in the open position. Driving 1. This device may not cause harmful with the console compartment lid open may interference, and result in injury in a collision. 2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Note: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment. 57 ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION SYSTEMS The following systems are used for reducing engine emissions: Catalytic Converter Oxygen Sensors Evaporation Control System GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE
58 GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
This section gives you all the information INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . .60 you need to understand and use INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY . .62 the instrument panel correctly. WARNING LIGHTS AND MESSAGES ON THE INSTRUMENT PANEL .....67 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM . . .87 EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ...... 87
59 INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES Instrument Cluster
05026S0005EM Instrument Cluster 1. Tachometer
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 2. Digital Engine Oil Temperature Gauge With Overheating Warning Light 3. Instrument Cluster Display 4. Digital Fuel Level Gauge (The Triangle On The Left Side Of The Symbol Indicates The Fuel Door Location) 5. Speedometer (Speed Indicator)
60 Tachometer Under normal usage, the temperature Note: If the low fuel warning light turns should remain around the middle of the on, refuel the vehicle at your nearest fuel The Tachometer indicates the engine digital scale according to the working station. Revolutions Per Minute (Giri). conditions. Adjusting Instrument Panel Lighting The warning light will turn on to signal Caution! (Brightness Sensor) the excessive increase of the engine oil Inside the Tachometer there is a light temperature. sensor capable of detecting light and In the event of excessive engine oil Do not travel with the fuel tank almost adjusting the brightness of the temperature, stop the engine empty: any gaps in fuel supply could damage instrument panel and the Information and immediately and contact an authorized the catalytic converter. Entertainment System display. dealer. Speedometer Engine Oil Temperature Gauge Fuel Level Gauge The speedometer shows the vehicle The digital indicator monitors the The digital fuel gauge monitors the speed in miles per hour and/or kilometers temperature of the engine oil and starts amount of fuel in the tank. per hour (mph/km/h). supplying indications when the oil When the warning light turns on, a temperature reaches approximately message is displayed, and a chime is 122° F (50°C). sound when 2.38 Gallons (9.0 L) of fuel are left in the tank.
61 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY Instrument Cluster Display Description This vehicle is equipped with a driver-interactive display that is located in the instrument cluster. When one or more of the doors have been opened or closed and the ignition is in the OFF position, the instrument cluster will display the vehicle mileage for a few seconds. Reconfigurable Instrument Cluster Display During operation, the instrument cluster display is divided into multiple sections which show driving data, warnings and failure indications. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
05036S0001QV Instrument Cluster Display
62 Reconfigurable Display Items 4. Speed Limit Warning Light Depending on the driving mode chosen using the Alfa DNA (Dynamic, Natural, 1. Headlight Warning Lights Shows information regarding the Speed Limiter function. and Advanced Efficiency, the screens can Displays the headlight warning light for be graphically different. Navigation either of the following active modes: 5. Compass instructions and call information can be set and displayed in the Information and Headlights 6. Reconfigurable Main Area Entertainment System. Automatic Headlights Can display the following screens: Home Home 2. Gear Selector Information The parameters shown on the display, for Displays the following information Trip A the modes: Dynamic, Natural and controlled by the gear selector function: Trip B (can be activated/deactivated Advanced Efficiency are: P = PARK through the Information and Time Entertainment System) R = REVERSE Outside Temperature Performance N = NEUTRAL Current Speed (shown if the repeat The screens can be selected, on rotation, modes of the Phone and Navigation D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) by pushing the MENU selection button on functions are not active) AutoStick: + shifting to higher gear in the windshield wiper stalk. Range manual (sequential) driving mode – shifting to lower gear in sequential driving mode
3. Forward Collision, Lane Departure, Cruise Control Displays operations for the following modes: Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If Equipped Lane Departure Warning (LDW) — If 05036S0002EM MENU Selection/Reset Button 05036S0004NA Equipped Instrument Cluster Display Cruise Control (CC) or Active Cruise Control (ACC) — If Equipped
63 efficiency of the driving style, with a view to limiting consumption. Advanced Efficiency
05036S0007NA 0401144046US Instrument Cluster Display Instrument Cluster Display To reset the values, press and hold down Trip A And B the button on the windshield wiper stalk. For all driving modes (Dynamic, Natural, Performance 05036S0011NA and Advanced Efficiency) and with the Dynamic Driving Style The displayed parameters differ ignition device ON, the "Trip computer" The three central icons on the screen according to the active mode. The modes can be used to display the measurements indicate the effectiveness of the driving which can be selected using the Alfa DNA regarding the operating state of the style, linked to the following parameters: system are: vehicle. This function is characterized by acceleration, deceleration and gear two separate records, called “Trip A”and Natural shifts, with a view to limiting “Trip B” (the latter can be deactivated by consumption. The bar below the icons Information and Entertainment System), shows current consumption and the where the “complete missions” (journeys) green line represents the optimal area. are recorded in a reciprocally The globe lights up gradually according to independent manner. lower consumption. “Trip A”and “Trip B” are used to display Dynamic GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL the values relating to: Distance travelled Average fuel consumption
Average speed 05036S0009NA Active trip Efficiency Consumption Graph Fuel consumption indicator The screen graphically reproduces some parameters closely linked to the 64 9. Odometer Entertainment System. This section Indicates the total miles travelled. describes only the basic settings: U.S. Federal regulations require that Units & Language upon transfer of vehicle ownership, the Time&Date seller certify to the purchaser the correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. Cluster If your odometer needs to be repaired or To access the settings list in the serviced, the repair technician should Information and Entertainment System, leave the odometer reading the same as proceed as follows: it was before the repair or service. If s/he Press the MENU button to access the 05036S0013NA cannot do so, then the odometer must be main menu. Acceleration Gauge set at zero, and a sticker must be placed The displayed parameters are related to in the door jamb stating what the mileage Select “Settings” from the main menu vehicle stability, the graphs illustrate the was before the repair or service. It is a using the Rotary Knob. trend of the longitudinal/lateral good idea for you to make a record of the accelerations (G-meter information), odometer reading before the considering gravity acceleration as a repair/service, so that you can be sure reference unit. that it is properly reset, or that the door jamb sticker is accurate if the odometer Lateral acceleration peaks are also must be reset at zero. indicated. Customer Programmable Settings 7. Vehicle Range Indicates the miles left before the fuel tank is empty. 05036S0040EM Displays the position by indicating the MENU button cardinal direction. 8. Failure Warning Lights Area dedicated to displaying failures, the following symbols could be displayed on 05036S0015EM rotation: Information And Entertainment System Low criticality symbols (yellow amber) Multiple settings can be programmed by High criticality symbols (red) the user using the Information and 65 Units & Language Clock & Date Cluster
0401135760US 0501142760US 0401135762US Units & Language Menu Clock & Date Menu Instrument Cluster Display Menu The following settings can be modified The following settings can be modified The following settings can be modified under the “Units & Language” menu: under the “Clock & Date” menu: under the “Cluster” menu: Units: select US, metric, or custom. Sync With GPS Time: activates or Warning Buzzer Volume: set the The custom option allows for individual deactivates the clock synchronization volume of the warning buzzer selection of the unit measures through the GPS. If the function is Trip B: activate or deactivate the Trip Language: change the language of the deactivated, the options Set Time and function system Set Date are enabled Phone Repeat: activate or deactivate Restore Settings: restores the factory Set Time: set the time manually repeating the Phone function screens on settings Time Format: set the time format to the instrument cluster display To access and change the setting, turn either a 12-hour and a 24-hour clock Restore Settings: restores the factory and push the Rotary Pad. Set Date: set the date manually settings
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL Restore Settings: restores the factory To access and change the setting, turn settings and push the Rotary Pad. To access and change the setting, turn and push the Rotary Pad.
66 WARNING LIGHTS AND precautionary and as such must not be faults. Serious faults are indicated by a MESSAGES ON THE considered as exhaustive and/or repeated and prolonged warning "cycle.” INSTRUMENT PANEL alternative to the information contained Less serious faults are indicated by a in the Owner’s Manual, which you are warning "cycle" with a shorter duration. The following pages consist of warning advised to read carefully in all cases. Youcan stop the warning cycle in both lights and messages. Always refer to the information in this cases by pushing the button located on Note: section in the event of a failure the windshield wiper stalk. The indication. instrument panel warning light will stay The warning light turns on together on until the cause of the failure is The failure indicators appearing on with a dedicated message and/or chime eliminated. when applicable. These indications are the display are divided into two categories: very serious and less serious
Red Warning Lights
Warning Light What It Means What To Do INSUFFICIENT BRAKE FLUID/ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by ON turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the This light monitors various brake functions, including ON/RUN position. The light should illuminate for brake fluid level and parking brake application. If the approximately four seconds. The light should then turn brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake off unless the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is is applied, that the brake fluid level is low, or that there is detected. If the light does not illuminate, have the light a problem with the anti-lock brake system reservoir. inspected by an authorized dealer. If the light remains on when the parking brake has been The light also will turn on when the parking brake is disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the applied with the ignition switch in the ON/RUN position. master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake This light shows only that the parking brake is applied. It hydraulic system malfunction or that a problem with the does not show the degree of brake application. Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake For low brake fluid level, go to an authorized dealer to System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. have the system checked as soon as possible. In this case, the light will remain on until the condition has Release the electric park brake, then check that the been corrected. If the problem is related to the Brake warning light has turned off. Booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, If the warning light stays on, contact an authorized dealer. and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.
67 Warning Light What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC BRAKING FORCE DISTRIBUTION (EBD) FAILURE The simultaneous turning on of the BRAKE (red) and Drive very carefully to the nearest authorized dealer to (amber) warning lights with the engine on indicates have the system inspected immediately. either a failure of the EBD system or that the system is not available. In this case, the rear wheels may suddenly lock and the vehicle may swerve when braking abruptly. AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This light will If the problem persists, contact an authorized dealer. illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. SEATBELTREMINDER WARNING LIGHT When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN position, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the light will turn on. When driving, if the driver or Always wear your seat belt when operating the vehicle. front passenger seat belt remains unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL and a chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in “Safety” for further information.
Stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as OIL TEMPERATUREWARNING LIGHT possible. If the problem persists, contact an authorized This telltale indicates engine oil temperature is high. dealer.
68 Warning!
The fault of the warning light is signaled by the turning on of the icon on the instrument panel. In this case, the warning light may not indicate any faults with the restraint systems. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately. If the warning light does not turn on when the ignition device is moved to ON or if it stays on when driving (together with the message on the display), there might be a fault in the restraint systems; in this case, the air bags or pretensioners may not deploy in the event of an accident or, in a lower number of cases, they could deploy erroneously. Before proceeding, contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked immediately.
Amber Warning Lights
Warning Light What It Means What To Do ANTI-LOCK BRAKE (ABS) INDICATOR LIGHT This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position and may stay on for as long as four seconds. If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system is not functioning and service is required. However, the Drive carefully and contact an authorized conventional brake system will continue to operate normally if the brake dealer as soon as possible. indicator light is not on. If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock Brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position, have the light inspected by an authorized dealer.
69 Warning Light What It Means What To Do TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING INDICATOR LIGHT The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire Continue driving for up to 50 miles (80 km) pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is at a speed no higher then 50 mph (80 km/h). occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be Contact an authorized dealer to have the guaranteed. tire repaired. Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.
Each tire, including the spare (if Please note that the TPMS is not a prevent the TPMS from functioning provided), should be checked monthly substitute for proper tire maintenance, properly. Always check the TPMS when cold and inflated to the inflation and it is the driver’s responsibility to malfunction telltale after replacing one pressure recommended by the vehicle maintain correct tire pressure, even if or more tires or wheels on your vehicle, to manufacturer on the vehicle placard or under-inflation has not reached the level ensure that the replacement or alternate tire inflation pressure label. (If your to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tires and wheels allow the TPMS to vehicle has tires of a different size than tire pressure telltale. continue to function properly. the size indicated on the vehicle placard Yourvehicle has also been equipped with or tire inflation pressure label, you should a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate Caution! determine the proper tire inflation when the system is not operating pressure for those tires.) properly. The TPMS malfunction As an added safety feature, your vehicle indicator is combined with the low tire The TPMS has been optimized for the original has been equipped with a Tire Pressure pressure telltale. When the system equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates detects a malfunction, the telltale will and warning have been established for the tire a low tire pressure telltale when one or flash for approximately one minute and size equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable more of your tires is significantly then remain continuously illuminated. system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL under-inflated. Accordingly, when the low This sequence will continue upon that is not of the same size, type, and/or style. tire pressure telltale illuminates, you subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor should stop and check your tires as soon as the malfunction exists. When the damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may possible and inflate them to the proper malfunction indicator is illuminated, the cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System pressure. Driving on a significantly system may not be able to detect or (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After under-inflated tire causes the tire to signal low tire pressure as intended. using an aftermarket tire sealant it is overheat and can lead to tire failure. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a recommended that you take your vehicle to an Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency variety of reasons, including the authorized dealership to have your sensor and tire tread life, and may affect the installation of replacement or alternate function checked. vehicle’s handling and stopping ability. tires or wheels on the vehicle that 70 Warning Light What It Means What To Do
Tire Pressure Low In any situation in which the message on the display The indicator light will illuminate to indicate that the tire is "See Manual", it is ESSENTIAL to refer to pressure is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow “Auxiliary Driving Systems” in “Safety,” strictly pressure loss is occurring. In these cases, optimal tire duration complying with the indications that you find there. and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. ESC System Intervention: Intervention by the system is indicated by the flashing of the indicator light: it indicates that the vehicle is in critical stability and grip conditions.
ESC System Failure: If the indicator light does not turn off, or if it stays on with the engine running, a failure was found in the ESC system. In these cases, contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Hill Start Assist System Failure: The illumination of the indicator light indicates a Hill Start Assist system failure. ELECTRONIC STABILITY CONTROL (ESC) OFF INDICATOR LIGHT When the ignition is cycled to ON, the indicator light illuminates, but should turn off as soon as the engine is started. The indicator light illuminates to indicate that some active safety systems have been partially or totally deactivated. For further details about the active safety systems, refer to “Active Safety Systems” in “Safety.” When the active safety systems are reactivated, the indicator light turns off.
REAR FOG LIGHT The indicator illuminates when the rear fog light is activated.
71 Warning Light What It Means What To Do ENGINE CHECK/MALFUNCTION INDICATOR LIGHT (MIL) Under these conditions, the vehicle can continue In normal conditions, when the ignition is cycled to ON, the travelling at moderate speed but without indicator light illuminates, but it should turn off as soon as the demanding excessive effort from the engine or high engine is started. speed. Prolonged use of the vehicle with the The operation of the indicator light may be checked by the traffic indicator light on constantly may cause damage. police using specific devices. Comply with the laws and Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. regulations of the country where you are driving.
Caution!
If, turning the ignition device to ON, the warning light does not turn on or if it turns on steadily or flashing when travelling (on some versions together with the message on the display), contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible.
Warning Light What It Means What To Do FORWARD COLLISION WARNING SYSTEM (FCW) — IF EQUIPPED Drive carefully and contact an authorized dealer as soon This indicator light informs the driver that the frontal as possible. collision alarm function is not enabled. FUEL RESERVE / LIMITED RANGE The indicator light (or the symbol in the display) Refuel the vehicle. illuminates when about 2.4 gallons (9 liters) of fuel is left GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL in the tank.
Warning!
If the warning light (or the icon on the display) flashes while driving, contact an authorized dealer.
72 Green Telltale Indicator Lights
Indicator light What It Means What To Do PARK/HEADLIGHT ON INDICATOR LIGHT This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on. Headlight Off Delay This function allows the headlights to remain on for 30, 60 or 90 seconds after the ignition was placed in the STOP position. LEFTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the left turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved down (left). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the right directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed. RIGHTTURN SIGNAL The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the right turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected when the multifunction lever is moved up (right). This directional arrow will flash in conjunction with the left directional arrow when the hazard warning light button is pushed.
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED This indicator light will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.
73 Blue Telltale Indicator Light
Indicator Light What It Means What To Do HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Push the lever a second time to switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high beam on, “flash to pass” scenario. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
74 Red Symbols
Symbol What It Means What To Do LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE This telltale indicates low engine oil pressure. If the telltale turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this telltale turns on. Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This telltale does not indicate how much oil is in the engine. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Note: Do not use the vehicle until the failure has been solved. The turning on of the telltale does not indicate the amount of oil in the engine: the oil level can be checked on the display upon entering the vehicle and also by activating the "Oil level" function on the Information and Entertainment System.
Caution!
If the LOW ENGINE OIL PRESSURE symbol switches on when driving, stop the engine immediately and contact an authorized dealer.
75 Symbol What It Means What To Do In normal driving conditions: stop the car, turn off the engine and check that the coolant level in the reservoir is not below the MIN mark. In this case, wait for the engine to cool down, then slowly and carefully open the cap, fill with coolant and check that the level is between the MIN and MAX marks on the reservoir itself. Also check visually for any fluid leaks. Contact an authorized dealer if the ENGINE COOLANTTEMPERATURETOO HIGH telltale comes on when the engine is started again. The telltale lights up when the engine has overheated. If the vehicle is used under demanding conditions (e.g. in high-performance driving): slow down and, if the warning light stays on, stop the vehicle. Stop for 2 or 3 minutes with the engine running and slightly accelerated to facilitate better coolant circulation, then turn the engine off. Check that the coolant level is correct as described above. POWER STEERING FAILURE If the telltale remains on, you could not have steering assistance and the effort required to operate the steering wheel could be increased; steering is, however, possible. Note: Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. After the battery is disconnected, the steering wheel must be initialized. The Power Steering Failure light on the instrument panel will illuminate to indicate this. To carry out this procedure, simply turn the steering wheel all the
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL way from one end to the other, and then turn in back to the central position. DOOR OPEN The telltale turns on when one or more doors are not Close the doors properly. completely shut. An acoustic signal is activated with the doors open and the car moving.
76 Symbol What It Means What To Do HOOD CAP NOT PROPERLYSHUT The telltale turns on when the hood cap is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an Close the hood properly. open hood cap appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the hood cap is open and the vehicle is moving. TRUNK LID NOT PROPERLYSHUT The telltale turns on when the trunk lid is not properly closed, along with the icon, an image of the vehicle with an Close the trunk lid properly. open trunk lid appears on the display. A buzzer is heard when the trunk lid is open and the vehicle is moving.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. Caution! AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FAILURE Driving the vehicle with this symbol on may severely The telltale turns on, together with a buzzer warning, to damage the gearbox, with resulting breakage. The oil indicate that the automatic transmission is faulty. may also overheat: contact with hot engine or with exhaust components at high temperature could cause fires.
Symbol What It Means What To Do ELECTRONIC THROTTLE CONTROL (ETC) WARNING LIGHTS Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This warning light, along with the related message, signals a failure in the Electronic Throttle Control system (ETC).
77 Symbol What It Means What To Do Place the gear selector in the P (Park) position and the ignition in the off position: the warning light should switch If a failure is detected, the warning light turns on while the off. If the warning light stays on with engine running, the engine is running. vehicle can still be driven. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the failure eliminated. If the warning light flashes with the engine running, immediate intervention is required. A loss of Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have performance, irregular/high idling speed or engine the failure eliminated. stopping might take place and the vehicle may need to be towed.
INSUFFICIENT ENGINE OIL LEVEL The telltale turns on, along with the related message on Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. the display, to indicate low engine oil level.
ALFA STEERING TORQUE (AST) FAILURE The switching on of the telltale signals a failure in the Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. automatic steering correction system.
ALTERNATOR FAILURE The switching on of the telltale with engine on Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. corresponds to an alternator failure. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
78 Amber Symbols
Symbol What It Means What To Do ENGINE IMMOBILIZER FAILURE / BREAK-IN ATTEMPT
Engine Immobilizer System Failure Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the Engine Immobilizer system.
Break-In Attempt The telltale will illuminate when the ignition is cycled to ON position, to indicate a possible break-in attempt detected by the alarm system. Electronic Key Not Recognized The telltale will illuminate when the engine is started and the electronic key is not recognized by the system. Alarm System Failure The telltale will illuminate to report an alarm system failure.
For reactivating the fuel cut-off system, refer to FUEL CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT “Enhanced Accident Response System” in “Occupant The telltale will illuminate after an accident has occurred Restraint Systems" in "Safety” for further information. If it and the system has shut the fuel off. is not possible to restore the fuel supply, contact an authorized dealer.
PARK SENSORS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate when the system has failed or is Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. not available.
79 Symbol What It Means What To Do ENGINE OIL CHANGE REQUIRED — IF EQUIPPED The telltale is illuminated only for a limited time. Note: After the first indication, each time the engine is started the symbol will continue to illuminate as described above until the oil is changed. Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. If the telltale flashes, this does not mean that there is a fault on the vehicle, rather it simply reports that it is now necessary to change the oil as a result of regular use of the vehicle. The deterioration of engine oil is accelerated by using the vehicle for short drives, preventing the engine from reaching operating temperature.
Caution!
Deteriorated engine oil should be replaced as soon as possible after the symbol is switched on, and never more than 500 miles (805 km) after it first switches on. Failure to observe the above may result in severe damage to the engine and invalidate the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. When this symbol comes on, it does not mean that the level of engine oil is low, so if it flashes you do not need to top up the engine oil.
Symbol What It Means What To Do
ENGINE OIL PRESSURE SENSOR FAILURE GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. pressure sensor failure.
ENGINE OIL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of engine oil level Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. sensor failure.
80 Symbol What It Means What To Do FORWARD COLLISION WARNING (FCW) SYSTEM FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Forward Collision Warning system.
STOP/START SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have This telltale will illuminate to report a Stop/Start system the failure eliminated. failure.
RAIN SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic windshield wiper.
DUSK SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the case of failure of the Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. automatic low beam alignment.
BLIND SPOT MONITORING SYSTEM FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the event of a Blind Spot Monitoring system failure.
FUEL LEVEL SENSOR FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel level sensor Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.
EXTERIOR LIGHTS FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate a failure on the The failure may be caused by a blown bulb, a blown following lights: daytime running lights (DRLs) / parking protection fuse, or an interruption of the electrical lights / trailer turn signal indicators (if present) / trailer connection. lights (if present) / side lights / turn signal indicators / Replace the bulb or the relevant fuse. Contact an rear fog light / reversing light / brake lights / license plate authorized dealer. lights.
81 Symbol What It Means What To Do
KEYLESS SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of keyless system Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. failure.
FUEL CUT-OFF SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate in the event of fuel cut-off Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. system failure.
LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. The telltale will illuminate in the event of a fault in the Lane Departure Warning system. AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the the failure eliminated. automatic high beam headlights. GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
82 Symbol What It Means What To Do AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION FLUID OVERHEATING The telltale will illuminate in the case of transmission Wait for the telltale to turn off with the engine off or overheating, after a particularly demanding use. In this idling. case an engine performance limitation is carried out.
AUDIO SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have The telltale will illuminate to report a failure of the audio the failure eliminated. system.
SPEED LIMITER SYSTEM FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have While driving, the telltale will illuminate to signal a Speed the failure eliminated. Limiter system failure.
LOOSE FUEL FILLER CAP Lights up if the fuel tank cap is open or not properly Tighten the cap properly. closed.
ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE FAILURE The telltale will illuminate and a message will display to signal a failure in the electric park brake system. If you are still able to drive the vehicle (park brake is not This failure may partially or completely block the vehicle engaged), drive to the nearest authorized dealer and because the park brake could remain activated even if remember, when executing any maneuvers/commands, automatically or manually disengaged using the relevant that the electric park brake is not operational. controls. In these circumstances, you can disengage the park brake following the emergency disengagement procedure described in “In Case Of Emergency.”
Warning!
If a failure is present with sharp braking, the rear wheels may lock and the vehicle may swerve.
83 Symbol What It Means What To Do
LOW COOLANT LEVEL — IF EQUIPPED This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the vehicle Top up, as described in "Servicing And Maintenance.” coolant level is low.
SERVICE ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM This light will illuminate when the Adaptive Cruise Control Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. (ACC) is not operating and needs service.
Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible. WEAR ON BRAKE PADS Note: This light will illuminate when the brake pads have Always use genuine parts or similar because the reached their wear limit. Integrated Brake System (IBS) system could detect anomalies.
Symbol What It Means What To Do
DYNAMIC DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to signal a failure in the dynamic drive control system.
WINDSHIELD WIPER FAILURE Contact an authorized dealer. Signals a windshield wiper failure.
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL GENERIC INDICATION Signals information and failures. The accompanying messages describe the failure.
ALL WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE This telltale will illuminate along with an accompanying Contact an authorized dealer as soon as possible to have message when the AWD dynamic control system is the failure eliminated. temporarily deactivated to prevent damage. The traction system will work in RWD mode in this instance. 84 Symbol What It Means What To Do TEMPORARY ALL-WHEEL DRIVE FAILURE — IF EQUIPPED In the event that this telltale illuminates, reduce the load This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the AWD to allow the system to cool down. The AWD system will dynamic control system is temporarily deactivated to resume normal operation when the symbol disappears prevent damage. The traction system will work in RWD from the display. mode in this instance.
ABS ACTIVATION This telltale will illuminate to indicate that the ABS system has activated.
ADAPTIVE FRONT-LIGHTING SYSTEM FAILURE The telltale will illuminate to indicate the automatic Go to an authorized dealer to have the system checked. directional light system failure.
SOFT SUSPENSION CALIBRATION INSERTION — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the most comfortable suspension setting is activated.
SHOCK ABSORBERS FAILURE (ADC) While driving, if the telltale illuminates, it signals a failure Contact an authorized dealer to have the system checked. in the suspension system.
To refill the liquid, refer to “Engine Compartment” in WINDSHIELD WASHER LIQUID LEVEL “Servicing And Maintenance.” Always use liquid with the The telltale will illuminate to indicate that the level of the features indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section windshield and headlight washing fluid (if any) is low. in “Technical Specifications.”
85 Green Symbols
Symbol What It Means
HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the headlights are turned on.
AUTOMATIC HEADLIGHTS The symbol lights up when the automatic headlights are on.
STOP/START OPERATION The telltale will illuminate in the case of Stop/Start system intervention (stopping the engine). When the engine is restarted, the telltale will shut off. (For further information on engine restarting modes, refer to “Stop/Start System” in “Starting And Operating”).
SPEED CONTROL ACTIVATED The telltale will illuminate when the Speed Control system is activated.
ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED The symbol comes on when the Adaptive Cruise Control system is activated.
Blue Symbols
Symbol What it means GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AUTOMATIC HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS — IF EQUIPPED The telltale will illuminate when the automatic high beam headlights are activated.
HIGH BEAM HEADLIGHTS The telltale will illuminate when the high beam headlights are activated.
86 ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II) EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND SYSTEM Cybersecurity MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS Operation Yourvehicle is required to have an In some localities, it may be a legal The OBD (Onboard Diagnostic system) Onboard Diagnostic system (OBD II) and requirement to pass an inspection of your carries out a continuous diagnosis of the a connection port to allow access to vehicle's emissions control system. components of the vehicle related to information related to the performance Failure to pass could prevent vehicle emissions. of your emissions controls. Authorized registration. service technicians may need to access For states that require It also alerts the driver of when these this information to assist with the components are no longer in peak an Inspection and diagnosis and service of your vehicle and Maintenance (I/M), this condition by switching on the warning emissions system. light on the instrument panel (see check verifies the “Warning Lights And Messages” “Malfunction Indicator paragraph in this chapter). Warning! Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not on The aim of the OBD system (Onboard when the engine is running, and that the Diagnostic) is to: OBD II system is ready for testing. ONLYan authorized service technician Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. Monitor the efficiency of the system should connect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order to read the VIN, The OBD II system may not be ready if Indicate an increase in emissions diagnose, or service your vehicle. your vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery Indicate the need to replace damaged If unauthorized equipment is connected to replacement. If the OBD II system should components the OBD II connection port, such as a be determined not ready for the I/M test, driver-behavior tracking device, it may: The vehicle also has a connector, which your vehicle may fail the test. can interface with appropriate tools, that Be possible that vehicle systems, Yourvehicle has a simple ignition makes it possible to read the error codes including safety related systems, could be actuated test, which you can use prior to stored in the electronic control units impaired or a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in an accident going to the test station. To check if your together with a series of specific involving serious injury or death. vehicle's OBD II system is ready, you parameters for engine operation and must do the following: diagnosis. This check can be carried out Access, or allow others to access, by your authorized dealer. information stored in your vehicle systems, 1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON including personal information. position, but do not crank or start the Note: After eliminating a fault, to check engine. the system completely, your authorized dealer is obliged to run tests and, if Note: If you crank or start the engine, necessary certain road tests. you will have to start this test over.
87 2. As soon as you cycle the ignition The I/M station can fail your vehicle switch to the ON position, you will see the because the MIL is on with the engine “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” running. symbol come on as part of a normal bulb check. 3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will happen: The MIL will flash for about ten seconds and then return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is not ready and you should not proceed to the I/M station. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully illuminated until you place the ignition in the off position or start the engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD II system is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station. If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement, you may need to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as you
GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL normally would in order for your OBD II system to update. A recheck with the above test routine may then indicate that the system is now ready. Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II system is ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced before going to the I/M station. 88 SAFETY
This very important section describes ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS ...... 90 the safety systems that your vehicle may AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS ....93 be equipped with, and provides OCCUPANT RESTRAINT instructions on how to use them SYSTEMS ...... 102 correctly. SAFETYTIPS ...... 126
89 ACTIVE SAFETY SYSTEMS surface where the grip of the left and can it increase braking or steering efficiency The vehicle may be equipped with the right wheels varies, such as in a corner. beyond that afforded by the condition of the following active safety devices: The Electronic Braking Force Distribution vehicle brakes and tires or the traction (EBD) system works with the ABS, afforded. Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System
SAFETY allowing the brake force to be distributed The ABS cannot prevent collisions, Drive Train Control (DTC) System between the front and rear wheels. including those resulting from excessive System Intervention speed in turns, following another vehicle too Electronic Stability Control (ESC) closely, or hydroplaning. System The ABS equipped on this vehicle is The capabilities of an ABS equipped Traction Control System (TCS) provided with the "Brake-by-wire" (Integrated Brake System - IBS) function. vehicle must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner that could jeopardize Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System With this system, the command given by the user’s safety or the safety of others. Hill Start Assist (HSA) System pressing the brake pedal is not transmitted hydraulically, but electrically. Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Therefore, the light pulsation that is felt Drive Train Control (DTC) System — System on the pedal with the traditional system If Equipped For the operation of the systems, see the is no longer noticeable. Some models of this vehicle are equipped following pages. with an All-Wheel Drive system (AWD), which offers an optimal drive for Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System Warning! countless driving conditions and road An integral part of the braking system, surfaces. The system reduces the the ABS prevents one or more wheels The ABS contains sophisticated slipping of the tires to a minimum, from locking and slipping in all road electronic equipment that may be automatically redistributing the torque surface conditions, regardless of the susceptible to interference caused by to the front and rear wheels as needed. intensity of the braking action. The improperly installed or high output radio To maximize fuel savings, the vehicle with system ensures that the vehicle can be transmitting equipment. This interference AWD automatically passes to rear-wheel controlled even during emergency can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking drive (RWD) when the road and braking, allowing the driver to optimize capability. Installation of such equipment environmental conditions are such that stopping distances. should be performed by qualified professionals. they wouldn't cause the tires to slip. The system intervenes during braking When the road and environmental when the wheels are about to lock, Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will conditions require better traction, the typically in emergency braking or diminish their effectiveness and may lead to vehicle automatically goes to AWD mode. low-grip conditions where locking may be a collision. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just press firmly on your The driving mode, RWD or AWD, is shown more frequent. brake pedal when you need to slow down or on the instrument cluster display. The system also improves control and stop. Note: If the system failure symbol stability of the vehicle when braking on a The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws switches on, after starting the engine or while driving, it means that the AWD 90 of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor system is not working properly. If the System Intervention system can increase the risk of loss of warning message activates frequently, it The intervention of the system is vehicle control, vehicle rollover, personal is recommended to carry out the indicated by the flashing of the ESC injury and death. maintenance operations. warning light on the instrument panel, to Electronic Stability Control (ESC) inform the driver that the vehicle Traction Control System (TCS) stability and grip are critical. System The system automatically operates in the The ESC system improves the directional event of slipping, loss of grip on wet control and stability of the vehicle in roads (hydroplaning), and acceleration on Warning! various driving conditions. one or both drive wheels on roads that The ESC system corrects the vehicle’s are slippery, snowy, icy, etc. Depending understeer and oversteer, distributing Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot on the slipping conditions, two different the brake force on the appropriate prevent the natural laws of physics from control systems are activated: wheels. The torque supplied by the acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road If the slipping involves both drive engine can also be reduced in order to wheels, the system intervenes, reducing maintain control of the vehicle. conditions. ESC cannot prevent accidents, including those resulting from excessive the power transmitted by the engine. The ESC system uses sensors installed speed in turns, driving on very slippery If the slipping only involves one of the on the vehicle to determine the path that surfaces, or hydroplaning. ESC also cannot the driver intends to follow and prevent accidents resulting from loss of drive wheels, the Brake Limited compares it with the vehicle’s effective vehicle control due to inappropriate driver Differential (BLD) function is activated, path. When the real path deviates from input for the conditions. Only a safe, automatically braking the wheel which is the desired path, the ESC system attentive, and skillful driver can prevent slipping (the behavior of a self-locking intervenes to counter the vehicle’s accidents. The capabilities of an ESC differential is simulated). This will understeer or oversteer. equipped vehicle must never be exploited in increase the engine torque transferred to a reckless or dangerous manner which could the wheel which isn't slipping. Oversteer occurs when the vehicle is jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety of turning more than it should according to others. System Intervention the angle of the steering wheel. Vehicle modifications, or failure to The intervention of the system is properly maintain your vehicle, may change indicated by the flashing of the ESC Understeer occurs when the vehicle is the handling characteristics of your vehicle, warning light on the instrument panel, to turning less than it should according to and may negatively affect the performance inform the driver that the vehicle the angle of the steering wheel. of the ESC system. Changes to the steering stability and grip are critical. system, suspension, braking system, tire type and size or wheel size may adversely Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System affect ESC performance. Improperly The PBA system is designed to improve inflated and unevenly worn tires may also the vehicle’s braking capacity during degrade ESC performance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle maintenance emergency braking. that reduces the effectiveness of the ESC 91 The system detects emergency braking Hill Start Assist (HSA) System by monitoring the speed and force with This is an integral part of the ESC system Warning! which the brake pedal is pressed, and and facilitates starting on slopes, consequently applies the optimal brake activating automatically in the following pressure. This can reduce the braking There may be situations where the Hill Start
SAFETY cases: distance: the PBA system therefore Assist (HSA) will not activate and slight complements the ABS. Uphill: vehicle stationary on a road rolling may occur, such as on minor hills or with a gradient higher than 5%, engine Maximum assistance from the PBA with a loaded vehicle, or while pulling a running, brake pressed and transmission system is obtained by pressing the brake trailer. HSA is not a substitute for active in NEUTRAL (N) or gear other than driving involvement. It is always the driver’s pedal very quickly. In addition, the brake REVERSE (R) engaged. responsibility to be attentive to distance to pedal should be pressed continuously other vehicles, people, and objects, and most during braking, avoiding intermittent Downhill: vehicle stationary on a road importantly brake operation to ensure safe presses, to get the most out of the with a gradient higher than 5%, engine operation of the vehicle under all road system. Do not reduce pressure on the running, brake pressed and reverse gear conditions. Yourcomplete attention is brake pedal until braking is no longer engaged. always required while driving to maintain necessary. safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow When setting off, the ESC system control these warnings can result in a collision or The PBA system is deactivated when the unit maintains the braking pressure on serious personal injury. brake pedal is released. the wheels until the engine torque necessary for starting is reached, or in Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) System Warning! any case for a maximum of two seconds, allowing your right foot to be moved The DST function uses the integration of easily from the brake pedal to the the ESC system with the electric power The Panic Brake Assist (PBA) cannot prevent accelerator. steering to increase the safety level of the natural laws of physics from acting on The system will automatically deactivate the whole vehicle. the vehicle, nor can it increase the traction after two seconds without starting, In critical situations (braking on surfaces afforded by prevailing road conditions. PBA with different grip conditions), the ESC cannot prevent collisions, including those gradually releasing the braking pressure. resulting from excessive speed in turns, During this release stage, it is possible to system controls the steering through the driving on very slippery surfaces, or hear a typical mechanical brake release DST function to implement an additional hydroplaning. The capabilities of a noise, indicating the imminent movement torque contribution on the steering wheel PBA-equipped vehicle must never be of the vehicle. in order to suggest the most correct exploited in a reckless or dangerous manner, maneuver to the driver. which could jeopardize the user's safety or the safety of others.
92 The coordinated action of the brakes and AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS vehicle was detected. If equipped, an steering increases the sensation of audible chime will also be heard to alert safety and control of the vehicle. The following auxiliary driving systems the driver (if option is selected within the are available in this vehicle: Note: The DST feature is only meant to Information and Entertainment System). help the driver realize the correct course Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) — If of action through small torques on the Equipped steering wheel, which means the Forward Collision Warning (FCW) — If effectiveness of the DST feature is highly Equipped dependent on the driver’s sensitivity and overall reaction to the applied torque. It Tire Pressure Monitoring System is very important to realize that this (TPMS) feature will not steer the vehicle, meaning the driver is still responsible for Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) System steering the vehicle. — If Equipped The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system 06016S0002EM uses two radar sensors, located in the BSM Indicator Light rear bumper (one for each side), to detect the presence of other vehicles in the rear When the engine is started the warning side blind spots of your vehicle. light turns on to signal the driver that the system is active. Sensors The sensors are activated when any forward gear is engaged at a speed higher than 6 mph (10 km/h) or when REVERSE is engaged. The sensors are temporarily deactivated when the vehicle is in PARK. The detection area of the system covers approximately one lane on both sides of 06016S0001B the vehicle. Rear Sensor Location This area begins from the door mirror and The system warns the driver about the extends for 19 ft (6 m) towards the rear presence of other vehicles in the part of the vehicle. detection area by illuminating the When the sensors are active, the system warning light located within the door monitors the detection areas on both mirror on the side in which the other 93 sides of the vehicle and warns the driver Rear View Note: about the possible presence of vehicles The system detects vehicles coming from If the sensors are covered by objects in these areas. the rear part of your vehicle on both sides or vehicles, the system will not warn the While driving, the system monitors the and entering the rear detection area with driver.
SAFETY detection area from three different a difference in speed of less than 31 mph points (side, rear and front) to check (50 km/h) with relation to your vehicle. For the system to operate correctly, whether an alert needs to be sent to the the rear bumper area where the radar Overtaking Vehicles driver. The system can detect the sensors are located must stay free from presence of a vehicle in one of these If another vehicle is overtaken slowly, snow, ice and dirt gathered from the three areas. with a difference in speed of less than road surface. 15 mph (25 km/h) and the vehicle stays in Note: the blind spot for approximately Do not cover the rear bumper area where the radar sensors are located with The system does not alert the driver 1.5 seconds, the warning light on the door mirror of the corresponding side any object (e.g. adhesives, bike rack, for the presence of fixed object (e.g. etc.). safety barriers, poles, walls, etc.). illuminates. However, in some circumstances, the If the difference in speed between the system may activate in the presence of two vehicles is greater than 15 mph Warning! these objects. This is normal and does (25 km/h), the warning light will not not indicate a system malfunction. illuminate. Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) is not a The system does not alert the driver Rear Cross Path Detection (RCP) back up aid system. It is intended to be used about the presence of vehicles coming System to help a driver detect an oncoming vehicle in from the opposite direction, in the This system helps the driver during a parking lot situation. Drivers must be adjacent lanes. reverse maneuvers in the case of reduced careful when backing up, even when using visibility. RCP.Always check carefully behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure to check The RCP system monitors the rear for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, Warning! detection areas on both sides of the obstructions, and blind spots before backing vehicle to detect objects moving towards up. Failure to do so can result in serious the sides of the vehicle, with a minimum injury or death. The Blind Spot Monitoring system is only an speed between 1 mph (1 km/h) and aid to help detect objects in the blind spot zones. The BSM system is not designed to 2 mph (3 km/h) and objects moving at a detect pedestrians, bicyclists, or animals. maximum speed of 21 mph (35 km/h), in Even if your vehicle is equipped with the areas such as parking lots. BSM system, always check your vehicle’s The system activation is signaled to the mirrors, glance over your shoulder, and use driver by an audible warning. your turn signal before changing lanes. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or 94 death. Operating Mode General Information The system may be activated/ This vehicle has systems that operate on deactivated via the Information and radio frequency that comply with Part Entertainment System. To access the 15 of the Federal Communications function, select the following items on Commission (FCC) rules and with the main menu in sequence: Industry Canada Standards RSS- 1. “Settings.” GEN/210/220/310. Operation is subject to the following two 2. “Safety.” conditions: 3. “Blind Spot Alert.” 1. The device may not cause harmful 06016S0003B "Blind Spot Alert” Visual Mode interference. Front Bumper Radar Location When the system is enabled, the warning 2. The device must accept any light within the door mirror on the side of interference received, including the detected object illuminates. interference that may cause undesired The visual warning on the mirror will blink operation of the device. if the driver activates the turn signals, Changes or modifications to any of these indicating a lane change. systems by other than an authorized The warning will be fixed if the driver service facility could void authorization stays in the same lane. to use this equipment. "Blind Spot Alert" Function Forward Collision Warning (FCW) Deactivation System — If Equipped When the system is deactivated ("Blind This is a driving assistance system which Spot Alert" mode off), the BSM or RCP 06016S0004B comprises a radar located behind the systems will not emit an audible or a Windshield Camera Location front bumper and a camera located in the visual warning. central part of the windshield. In the event of an imminent collision, the The BSM system will store the operating system intervenes by automatically mode running when the engine was braking the vehicle to prevent the stopped. Each time the engine is started, collision or reduce its effects. the operating mode stored previously will The system provides the driver with be recalled and used. audible and visual signals through dedicated messages on the instrument cluster display. The system may lightly brake to warn the driver if a potential front end collision is 95 detected (limited braking). Signals and Engagement/Disengagement Activation/Deactivation limited braking are intended to allow the The following functions can be selected The Forward Collision Warning system is driver time to intervene. in sequence using the Information and activated whenever the engine is started In situations with the risk of collision, if Entertainment System: regardless of what is shown on the
SAFETY the system detects no intervention by Information and Entertainment System. 1. “Settings.” the driver, it provides automatic braking Following a deactivation, the system will to help slow the vehicle and mitigate the 2. “Safety.” not warn the driver about the possible potential front end collision (automatic collision with the preceding vehicle, braking). If intervention by the driver on 3. “Forward Collision Warning.” regardless of the setting selected with the brake pedal is detected, but not 4. “Mode.” the Information and Entertainment deemed sufficient, the system may System. intervene in order to improve the Select from among three operating modes: Note: Each time the engine is started, reaction of the braking system by the system is activated regardless of reducing vehicle speed further Warning And Brake: the system (if what setting was selected when the (additional assistance in braking stage). active), in addition to the visual and engine was turned OFF The system will intervene automatically audible warnings, provides limited The system is active: in case of imminent collision or impact braking, automatic braking, and against a pedestrian crossing the road additional assistance in braking stage Each time the engine is started. (speed under 31 mph (50 km/h)). where the driver does not brake In the Information and Entertainment Note: For safety reasons, when the sufficiently in the event of a potential System. vehicle has stopped, the brake calipers front end collision. When the ignition is in the ON position. may remain blocked for about two Only Warning: the system (if active), seconds. Make sure to press the brake does not provide limited braking, but The vehicle speed is between 4 mph pedal if the vehicle moves slightly guarantees automatic braking or (7 km/h) and 124 mph (200 km/h). forward. additional assistance in braking stage When the front seat belts are where the driver does not brake at all or fastened. not sufficiently enough in the event of a Warning! potential front end collision. Changing The System Sensitivity The sensitivity of the system can be Disabled: the system does not provide changed through the Information and Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not visual and audible warnings, limited Entertainment System menu, choosing intended to avoid a collision on its own, nor braking, automatic braking, or additional can FCW detect every type of potential from one of the following three options: assistance in braking stage. The system "Near", "Med" or "Far". Refer to the collision. The driver has the responsibility to will therefore provide no indication of a avoid a collision by controlling the vehicle via description in the “Information and braking and steering. Failure to follow this possible collision. Entertainment System Supplement” for warning could lead to serious injury or death. how to change the settings. 96 The default setting is "Med". With this Although the vehicle can still be driven in In certain cases, this dedicated message setting, the system warns the driver of a normal conditions, the system may be not could be displayed when the radar is not possible collision with the vehicle in front completely available. detecting any vehicles or objects within when that vehicle is at a standard When the conditions limiting the system its view range. distance, between that of the other two functions end, this will go back to normal If atmospheric conditions are not the settings. and complete operation. Should the fault reason behind this message, check if the With the system sensitivity set to "Far", persist, contact your authorized dealer. sensor is dirty. It could be necessary to the system will warn the driver of a System Failure Signaling clean or remove any obstructions in the possible collision with the vehicle in front If the system turns off and a dedicated area. when that vehicle is at a greater distance, message is shown on the display, it If the message appears frequently, even thus providing the possibility of acting on means that there is a fault with the in the absence of atmospheric conditions the brakes more lightly and gradually. system. such as snow, rain, mud or other This setting provides the drivers with the In this case, it is still possible to drive the obstructions, contact your authorized maximum possible reaction time to dealer for a sensor alignment check. prevent a potential collision. vehicle, but you are advised to contact you authorized dealer as soon as In the absence of visible obstructions, With the option set to "Near", the system possible. manually removing the decorative cover will alert the driver of a possible collision Radar Indication Not Available trim and cleaning the radar surface could with the vehicle in front when that vehicle be required. Have this operation is close. This setting offers the driver a If conditions are such that the radar performed at your authorized dealer. lower reaction time compared to the cannot detect obstacles correctly, the system is deactivated and a dedicated Note: It is recommended that you do not "Med" and "Far" settings, in the event of a install devices, accessories, or potential collision, but permits more message appears on the display. This generally occurs in the event of poor aerodynamic attachments in front of the dynamic driving of the vehicle. sensor or darken it in any way, as this can The system sensitivity setting is kept in visibility, such as when it is snowing or raining heavily. compromise the correct functioning of the memory when the engine is turned the system. The function of this system can also be OFF. Frontal Collision Alarm With Active System Limited Operation Signal temporarily reduced due to obstructions such as mud, dirt or ice on the bumper. In Braking If a dedicated message is displayed, a such cases, a dedicated message will be If this function is selected, the brakes are condition limiting the system operation shown on the display and the system will operated to reduce the speed of the may have occurred. The possible reasons be deactivated. This message can vehicle in the event of potential collision. of this limitation are if something is sometimes appear in conditions of high This function applies an additional blocking the camera view, or a fault is reflectivity (e.g. tunnels with reflective braking pressure if the braking pressure present. tiles or ice or snow). When the conditions applied by the driver does not suffice to If an obstruction is signaled, clean the limiting the system functions end, it will prevent potential collision. area of the windshield. go back to normal and complete The function is active with speed above operation. 4 mph (7 km/h). 97 Driving In Special Conditions in the presence of small vehicles, such as In certain driving conditions, system bicycles or motorcycles. intervention might be unexpected or delayed. The driver must therefore be
SAFETY very careful, keeping control of the vehicle. Driving close to a bend. The vehicle ahead is leaving a roundabout.
Vehicles with small dimensions and/or 06016S0005EM not aligned in the driving lane. Driving Around Wide Curves Lane change by other vehicles. The Vehicle Ahead Is Leaving A 06016S0006EM Roundabout Driving Near Small Vehicles Vehicles traveling at right angles to the On a roundabout, the system could Lane Change By Other Vehicles vehicle. intervene if it detects a vehicle ahead Vehicles suddenly changing lanes to enter Note: In particularly complex traffic which is leaving the roundabout. the same lane as your vehicle within the conditions, the driver can deactivate the operating range of the radar sensor, may system manually through the Information cause the system to intervene. and Entertainment System. Driving Close To A Bend When entering or leaving a wide bend, the system may detect a vehicle in front you, but not in the same driving lane. In cases such as these, the system may intervene.
06016S0010EM Driving In Roundabouts Vehicles With Small Dimensions 06016S0007EM And/Or Not Aligned In The Driving Lane Other Vehicles Changing Lanes The system cannot detect vehicles in front of you but outside the range of the radar sensor and may therefore not react 98 Vehicles Traveling At Right Angles To parking lots or tunnels, or due to a glare on Tire Pressure Monitoring System The Vehicle the road surface. These possible activations (TPMS) The system may temporarily react to a are a consequence of the real driving This vehicle is equipped with a Tire vehicle that is passing through the radar scenario coverage by the system and must Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that sensor’s operating range at right angles. not be regarded as faults. sends the inflation pressure information The system has been designed for road of each tire to the control unit, and will use only. If the vehicle is driven on a track, signal the driver in the event of the system must be deactivated to avoid insufficient tire pressure. unnecessary warnings. Automatic Tire pressure will vary with temperature deactivation is signaled by the dedicated warning light/symbol switching on in the by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every instrument panel (refer to the instructions in 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the the "Warning Lights And Messages On The outside temperature decreases, the tire Instrument Panel" in "Getting To Know Your pressure will also decrease. Tire pressure Instrument Panel" for further information). should always be set based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not 06016V0008EM General Information been driven for at least three hours, or Other Vehicle Passing Through Radar driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a Range This vehicle has systems that operate on radio frequency that comply with Part three hour period. The cold tire inflation 15 of the Federal Communications pressure must not exceed the maximum Commission (FCC) rules and with inflation pressure molded into the tire Warning! Industry Canada Standards RSS- sidewall. Refer to “Tires” in “Servicing GEN/210/220/310. And Maintenance” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s tires. The system has not been designed to Operation is subject to the following two conditions: The tire pressure will also increase as the prevent impacts and cannot detect possible vehicle is driven. This is normal, and there conditions leading to an accident in 1. The device may not cause harmful should be no adjustment for this advance. Failure to take into account this warning may lead to serious or fatal injuries. interference. increased pressure. 2. The device must accept any The TPMS will signal the driver if The system may activate, assessing the pressure falls below the warning limit for trajectory of the vehicle, for the presence of interference received, including reflecting metal objects different from interference that may cause undesired any reason, including the effects of low other vehicles, such as safety barriers, road operation of the device. temperature and normal loss of pressure signs, barriers before parking lots, tollgates, from the tire. level crossings, gates, railways, objects near Changes or modifications to any of these The TPMS will stop indicating insufficient road constructions sites or higher than the systems by other than an authorized tire pressure when pressure is equal to or vehicle (e.g. a fly-over). In the same way, the service facility could void authorization greater than the prescribed cold inflation system may intervene inside multi-story to use this equipment. 99 level. Therefore, if insufficient tire Insufficient Tire Pressure Indication pressure is indicated by the ( ) warning Caution! If an insufficient pressure value is light displaying in the instrument cluster, detected on one or more tires, the increase the inflation pressure up to the warning light in the instrument cluster prescribed cold inflation value.
SAFETY The TPMS has been optimized for the will display alongside the dedicated The system will automatically update, original equipment tires and wheels. TPMS messages, the system will highlight the and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale pressures and warning have been tire or tires with insufficient pressure Light” will turn off once the system established for the tire size equipped on graphically, and an acoustic signal will be receives the updated tire pressures. The your vehicle. Undesirable system operation emitted. vehicle may need to be driven for up to or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the In this case, stop the vehicle, check the 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in same size, type, and/or style. The TPM inflation pressure of each tire, and inflate order for the TPMS to receive this sensor is not designed for use on the necessary tire or tires to the correct information. aftermarket wheels and may contribute to a cold inflation pressure value, shown on Operating Example poor overall system performance or sensor the display or in the dedicated TPMS damage. Customers are encouraged to use menu. For example, your vehicle may have a OEM wheels to assure proper TPM feature recommended cold (parked for more than operation. TPMS Temporarily Disabled — TPMS three hours) placard pressure of 33 psi Check Message (227 kPa). If the ambient temperature is Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System When a system fault is detected, the “Tire 68°F (20°C), and the measured tire (TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. After Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will pressure is 28 psi (193 kPa), a using an aftermarket tire sealant it is flash on and off for 75 seconds, and then temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will recommended that you take your vehicle to remain on solid. The system fault will also decrease the tire pressure to your authorized dealer to have your sensor sound a chime. If the ignition is cycled, approximately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire function checked. this sequence will repeat, provided that pressure is low enough to turn on the After inspecting or adjusting the tire the system fault still exists. The “Tire “Tire Pressure Monitoring Warning Light.” pressure always reinstall the valve stem Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will Driving the vehicle may cause the tire cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from turn off when the fault condition no pressure to rise to approximately 28 psi entering the valve stem, which could longer exists. A system fault can occur (193 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure damage the TPMS sensor. due to any of the following: Monitoring Telltale Light” will still be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure Jamming due to electronic devices or Monitoring Warning Light” will turn off driving next to facilities emitting the only after the tires are inflated to the same radio frequencies as the TPMS vehicle’s recommended cold placard sensors. pressure value. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting that affects radio wave signals. 100 Accumulation of snow or ice around Instead, dashes (--) will remain in place of The TPMS is not a substitute for the wheels or wheel housings. the pressure values. proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain Using tire chains on the vehicle. To reactivate the TPMS, replace all four wheel and tire assemblies (road tires) correct tire pressure using an accurate Using wheels/tires not equipped with with tires equipped with TPM sensors. tire pressure gauge, even if TPMS sensors. Then, drive the vehicle for up to underinflation has not reached the level After the punctured tire has been 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h). The to trigger illumination of the “Tire repaired with the original tire sealant TPMS will chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”. contained in the Tire Repair Kit, the will flash on and off for 75 seconds and Seasonal temperature changes will previous condition must be restored so then turn off. The instrument cluster will affect tire pressure, and the TPMS will that the warning light is off during display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” monitor the actual tire pressure in the normal driving. message and then display pressure tire. values in place of the dashes. On the next TPMS Deactivation ignition switch cycle the "SERVICE TPM General Information The TPMS can be deactivated by SYSTEM" message will no longer be replacing all four wheel and tire displayed, as long as no system fault The following regulatory statement assemblies (road tires) with wheel and exists. applies to all radio frequency (RF) tire assemblies that do not have TPMS devices equipped in this vehicle: Sensors, such as when installing winter Note: This device complies with Part 15 of the wheel and tire assemblies on your The TPMS is not intended to replace FCC rules and RSS-210 of Industry vehicle. normal tire care and maintenance, or to Canada. Operation is subject to the To deactivate the TPMS, first replace all provide warning of a tire failure or following two conditions: four wheel and tire assemblies (road condition. (1) This device may not cause harmful tires) with tires not equipped with Tire The TPMS should not be used as a interference. Pressure Monitoring (TPM) Sensors. tire pressure gauge while adjusting your (2) This device must accept any Then, drive the vehicle for 20 minutes tire pressure. interference received, including above 15 mph (24 km/h). The TPMS will interference that may cause undesired chime, the "TPM Telltale Light" will flash Driving on a significantly operation. on and off for 75 seconds and then underinflated tire will cause the tire to Note: Changes or modifications not remain on. The instrument cluster will overheat, and can lead to tire failure. expressly approved by the party display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” Underinflation also reduces fuel responsible for compliance could void the message and then display dashes (--) in efficiency and tire tread life, and may user’s authority to operate the place of the pressure values. affect the vehicle’s handling and equipment. Beginning with the next ignition switch stopping ability. cycle, the TPMS will no longer chime or display the “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message in the instrument cluster. 101 OCCUPANT RESTRAINT 2. A child who is not big enough to wear 9. If the air bag system in this vehicle SYSTEMS the vehicle seat belt properly (Refer to needs to be modified to accommodate a “Child Restraints” in this section for disabled person, refer to the “Customer Some of the most important safety further information) must be secured in Assistance” section for customer service features in your vehicle are the restraint the appropriate child restraint or contact information. SAFETY systems: belt-positioning booster seat in a rear Occupant Restraint Systems Features seating position. Seat Belt Systems 3. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in Warning! a rear-facing child restraint) must ride in Supplemental Restraint Systems the front passenger seat, move the seat (SRS) Air Bags Never place a rear-facing child restraint in as far back as possible and use the front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Child Restraints proper child restraint (Refer to “Child front air bag can cause death or serious Restraints” in this section for further injury to a child 12 years or younger, Some of the safety features described in information). including a child in a rear-facing child this section may be standard equipment restraint. on some models, or may be optional 4. Never allow children to slide the Never install a rear-facing child restraint equipment on others. If you are not sure, shoulder belt behind them or under their arm. in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a ask an authorized dealer. rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If Important Safety Precautions 5. Youshould read the instructions the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not provided with your child restraint to transport a rear-facing child restraint in Please pay close attention to the make sure that you are using it properly. that vehicle. information in this section. It tells you how to use your restraint system 6. All occupants should always wear Seat Belt Systems properly, to keep you and your their lap and shoulder belts properly. passengers as safe as possible. Buckle up even though you are an 7. The driver and front passenger seats Here are some simple steps you can take excellent driver, even on short trips. should be moved back as far as practical Someone on the road may be a poor to minimize the risk of harm from a to allow the front air bags room to inflate. deploying air bag: driver and could cause a collision that 8. Do not lean against the door or includes you. This can happen far away 1. Children 12 years old and under window. If your vehicle has side air bags, from home or on your own street. should always ride buckled up in the rear and deployment occurs, the side air bags Research has shown that seat belts save seat of a vehicle with a rear seat. will inflate forcefully into the space lives, and they can reduce the between occupants and the door and seriousness of injuries in a collision. occupants could be injured. Some of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking 102 the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a BeltAlert Warning Sequence the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is motor vehicle should be belted at all The BeltAlert warning sequence is recommended that pets be restrained in times. activated when the vehicle is moving the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet carriers that are Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder above a specified vehicle speed range and the driver or outboard front seat secured by seat belts, and cargo is System (BeltAlert) passenger is unbuckled (if equipped with properly stowed. Driver and Passenger BeltAlert outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) Lap/Shoulder Belts (If Equipped) (the outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active when the outboard BeltAlert is a feature intended to All seating positions in your vehicle are front passenger seat is unoccupied). The remind the driver and outboard front equipped with lap/shoulder belts. BeltAlert warning sequence starts by seat passenger (if equipped with The seat belt webbing retractor will lock blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) only during very sudden stops or sounding an intermittent chime. Once the to buckle their seat belts. The Belt Alert collisions. This feature allows the BeltAlert warning sequence has feature is active whenever the ignition shoulder part of the seat belt to move completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light switch is in the AVV/START or ON/RUN freely with you under normal conditions. will remain on until the seat belts are position. However, in a collision the seat belt will buckled. The BeltAlert warning sequence lock and reduce your risk of striking the Initial Indication may repeat based on vehicle speed until inside of the vehicle or being thrown out If the driver is unbuckled when the the driver and occupied outboard front of the vehicle. ignition switch is first in the AVV/START seat passenger seat belts are buckled. or ON/RUN position, a chime will signal The driver should instruct all occupants for a few seconds. If the driver or to buckle their seat belts. Warning! outboard front seat passenger (if Change of Status equipped with outboard front passenger If the driver or outboard front seat seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the Relying on the air bags alone could lead to passenger (if equipped with outboard ignition switch is first in the AVV/START more severe injuries in a collision. The air front passenger seat BeltAlert) or ON/RUN position the Seat Belt bags work with your seat belt to restrain unbuckles their seat belt while the Reminder Light will turn on and remain on you properly. In some collisions, the air bags vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat until both outboard front seat belts are sequence will begin until the seat belts belt even though you have air bags. buckled. The outboard front passenger are buckled again. seat BeltAlert is not active when an In a collision, you and your passengers can outboard front passenger seat is The outboard front passenger seat suffer much greater injuries if you are not unoccupied. BeltAlert is not active when the outboard properly buckled up. Youcan strike the front passenger seat is unoccupied. interior of your vehicle or other passengers, BeltAlert may be triggered when an or you can be thrown out of the vehicle. animal or other items are placed on the Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are buckled up properly. outboard front passenger seat or when 103 It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, A twisted seat belt may not protect you replaced immediately. Do not disassemble inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, properly. In a collision, it could even cut into or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt people riding in these areas are more likely you. Be sure the seat belt is flat against your assemblies must be replaced after a to be seriously injured or killed. body, without twists. If you can’t straighten collision. a seat belt in your vehicle, take it to an SAFETY Do not allow people to ride in any area of authorized dealer immediately and have it your vehicle that is not equipped with seats fixed. Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating and seat belts. A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong Instructions Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a buckle will not protect you properly. The lap seat and using a seat belt properly. portion could ride too high on your body, 1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Occupants, including the driver, should possibly causing internal injuries. Always Sit back and adjust the seat. always wear their seat belts whether or not buckle your seat belt into the buckle nearest 2. The seat belt latch plate is above the an air bag is also provided at their seating you. position to minimize the risk of severe injury back of the front seat, and next to your or death in the event of a crash. A seat belt that is too loose will not arm in the rear seat (for vehicles protect you properly. In a sudden stop, you equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could could move too far forward, increasing the make your injuries in a collision much worse. latch plate and pull out the seat belt. possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt Slide the latch plate up the webbing as Youmight suffer internal injuries, or you snugly. could even slide out of the seat belt. Follow far as necessary to allow the seat belt to these instructions to wear your seat belt A seat belt that is worn under your arm is go around your lap. safely and to keep your passengers safe, dangerous. Yourbody could strike the inside too. surfaces of the vehicle in a collision, 3. When the seat belt is long enough to increasing head and neck injury. A seat belt fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle Two people should never be belted into a worn under the arm can cause internal until you hear a “click.” single seat belt. People belted together can injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder crash into one another in a collision, hurting bones. Wear the seat belt over your one another badly. Never use a lap/shoulder shoulder so that your strongest bones will belt or a lap belt for more than one person, take the force in a collision. no matter what their size. A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you from injury during a collision. Youare more likely to hit your head in a Warning! collision if you do not wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be used together. A lap belt worn too high can increase the A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt in a collision and leave you with no forces won’t be at the strong hip and pelvic 06046S0001NA protection. Inspect the seat belt system bones, but across your abdomen. Always Seat Belt Latch Plate Inserted Into Seat periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or wear the lap part of your seat belt as low as Belt Buckle loose parts. Damaged parts must be possible and keep it snug. 104 4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Second Row Center Seat Belt and lies low across your hips, below your Procedure Operating Instructions abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To Use the following procedure to untwist a loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the twisted lap/shoulder belt. latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug 1. Position the latch plate as close as seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under possible to the anchor point. the seat belt in a collision. 2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) 5. Position the shoulder belt across the above the latch plate, grasp and twist the shoulder and chest with minimal, if any seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create slack so that it is comfortable and not a fold that begins immediately above the resting on your neck. The retractor will latch plate. withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt. 3. Slide the latch plate upward over the 6. To release the seat belt, push the red folded webbing. The folded webbing button on the buckle. The seat belt will must enter the slot at the top of the latch automatically retract to its stowed plate. position. If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the seat 4. Continue to slide the latch plate up belt to retract fully. until it clears the folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.
06056S0002EM Second Row Seat Belts 1 — Seat Belt 2 — Seat Belt Buckle Latch Plate 3 — Mini Latch 4 — Mini Seat Belt Plate Buckle 5 — Mini Buckle Release
105 The second row center seat belt features risk of sliding under the seat belt in a Seat Belts And Pregnant Women a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and collision. buckle, which allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when the 8. Position the shoulder belt on your seat is folded. The mini-latch plate and chest so that it is comfortable and not SAFETY regular latch plate can then be stored out resting on your neck. The retractor will of the way in the parcel tray for added withdraw any slack in the seat belt. convenience to open up utilization of the 9. To release the seat belt, push the red storage areas behind the front seats button on the buckle. when the seat is not occupied. 10. To disengage the mini-latch plate 1. Remove the mini-latch plate and from the mini-buckle for storage, insert 0226075266 regular latch plate from its stowed the regular latch plate into the black Pregnant Women And Seat Belts position in the right rear side trim panel. button on the top of the mini-buckle. The Seat belts must be worn by all occupants 2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt will automatically retract to its including pregnant women: the risk of seat belt over the seat. stowed position. If necessary, slide the injury in the event of an accident is latch plate down the webbing to allow the reduced for the mother and the unborn 3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside seat belt to retract fully. Insert the child if they are wearing a seat belt. of the right head restraint. mini-latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed position. Position the lap belt snug and low below 4. When the seat belt is long enough to the abdomen and across the strong fit, insert the mini-latch plate into the bones of the hips. Place the shoulder belt mini-buckle until you hear a “click.” across the chest and away from the neck. Warning! Never place the shoulder belt behind the 5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch back or under the arm. plate up the webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go around your If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are Seat Belt Pretensioner lap. not properly connected when the seat belt is used by an occupant, the seat belt will not The front outboard seat belt system is 6. When the seat belt is long enough to be able to provide proper restraint and will equipped with pretensioning devices that fit, insert the latch plate into the buckle increase the risk of injury in a collision. are designed to remove slack from the until you hear a “click.” When reattaching the mini-latch plate seat belt in the event of a collision. These and mini-buckle, ensure the seat belt devices may improve the performance of 7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug webbing is not twisted. If the webbing is the seat belt by removing slack from the and lies low across your hips, below your twisted, follow the preceding procedure to seat belt early in a collision. abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt detach the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle, Pretensioners work for all size portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To untwist the webbing, and reattach the occupants, including those in child loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on mini-latch plate and mini-buckle. restraints. the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the 106 Note: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat belt placement by the Warning! occupant. The seat belt still must be worn snugly and positioned properly. The pretensioners are triggered by the Never place a rear-facing child restraint in Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC). front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Like the air bags, the pretensioners are front air bag can cause death or serious single use items. A deployed injury to a child 12 years or younger, pretensioner or a deployed air bag must including a child in a rear-facing child restraint. be replaced immediately. 06086S0102NA ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking Never install a rear-facing child restraint Energy Management Feature Retractor in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a If the passenger seating position is rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If The front outboard seat belt system is the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not equipped with an Energy Management equipped with an ALR and is being used transport a rear-facing child restraint in feature that may help further reduce the for normal usage, only pull the seat belt that vehicle. risk of injury in the event of a collision. webbing out far enough to comfortably The seat belt system has a retractor wrap around the occupant’s mid-section How To Engage The Automatic Locking assembly that is designed to release so as to not activate the ALR. If the ALR Mode webbing in a controlled manner. is activated, you will hear a clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the 1. Buckle the combination lap and Switchable Automatic Locking webbing to retract completely in this shoulder belt. Retractors (ALR) case and then carefully pull out only the amount of webbing necessary to 2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull The seat belts in the passenger seating comfortably wrap around the occupant’s downward until the entire seat belt is positions are equipped with a Switchable mid-section. Slide the latch plate into the extracted. Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) which buckle until you hear a "click." is used to secure a child restraint system. 3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder For additional information, refer to seat belt retracts, you will hear a clicking belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat “Installing Child Restraints Using The sound. This indicates the seat belt is now belt will still retract to remove any slack Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child in the Automatic Locking Mode. in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Restraints” section of this manual. The Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is How To Disengage The Automatic figure below illustrates the locking installed in a seating position that has a Locking Mode feature for each seating position. seat belt with this feature. Children Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder 12 years old and under should always be belt and allow it to retract completely to properly restrained in the rear seat of a disengage the Automatic Locking Mode vehicle with a rear seat. and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode. 107 Air Bag System Components The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the instrument panel for Warning! Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) approximately four to eight seconds for a Air Bag Warning Light self-check when the ignition switch is The seat belt assembly must be replaced first in the ON/RUN position. After the SAFETY if the switchable Automatic Locking Steering Wheel and Column self-check, the Air Bag Warning Light will Retractor (ALR) feature or any other seat Instrument Panel turn off. If the ORC detects a malfunction belt function is not working properly when in any part of the system, it turns on the checked according to the procedures in the Knee Impact Bolsters Air Bag Warning Light, either Service Manual. Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags momentarily or continuously. A single Failure to replace the seat belt assembly chime will sound to alert you if the light could increase the risk of injury in collisions. Seat Belt Buckle Switch comes on again after initial startup. Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode Supplemental Side Air Bags The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate the instrument panel Air to restrain occupants who are wearing the Supplemental Knee Air Bags seat belt or children who are using booster Bag Warning Light if a malfunction is seats. The locked mode is only used to Front and Side Impact Sensors detected that could affect the air bag install rear-facing or forward-facing child system. The diagnostics also record the Seat Belt Pretensioners restraints that have a harness for nature of the malfunction. While the air restraining the child. Seat Track Position Sensors bag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following Supplemental Restraint Systems Air Bag Warning Light occurs, have an authorized dealer service (SRS) the air bag system immediately. Some of the safety features described in The Air Bag Warning Light does not this section may be standard equipment come on during the four to eight seconds on some models, or may be optional The ORC monitors the readiness of the when the ignition switch is first in the equipment on others. If you are not sure, electronic parts of the air bag system ON/RUN position. ask an authorized dealer. whenever the ignition switch is in the START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition The Air Bag Warning Light remains on The air bag system must be ready to switch is in the OFF position or in the ACC after the four to eight-second interval. protect you in a collision. The Occupant position, the air bag system is not on and The Air Bag Warning Light comes on Restraint Controller (ORC) monitors the the air bags will not inflate. internal circuits and interconnecting intermittently or remains on while wiring associated with the electrical Air The ORC contains a backup power supply driving. Bag System Components. Yourvehicle system that may deploy the air bag system even if the battery loses power or Note: If the speedometer, tachometer, may be equipped with the following Air or any engine related gauges are not Bag System Components: it becomes disconnected prior to deployment. working, the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In 108 this condition the air bags may not be For additional information regarding the ready to inflate for your protection. Have Redundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to an authorized dealer service the air bag “Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel” system immediately. section of this manual. Front Air Bags Warning! This vehicle has front air bags and lap/shoulder belts for both the driver and front passenger. The front air bags are a Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have supplement to the seat belt restraint the air bag system to protect you in a systems. The driver front air bag is 06106S0002EM collision. If the light does not come on as a mounted in the center of the steering Passenger Air Bag bulb check when the ignition is first turned wheel. The passenger front air bag is on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if mounted in the instrument panel, above it comes on as you drive, have an authorized the glove compartment. The words “SRS dealer service the air bag system AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on immediately. the air bag covers.
Redundant Air Bag Warning Light
If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is detected, which could affect the Supplemental Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will 0502122443US illuminate on the instrument panel. The Front Air Bag/Knee Bolster Locations Redundant Air Bag Warning Light will 1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air Bags stay on until the fault is cleared. In 06106S0001EM 2 — Driver And Passenger Knee Impact addition, a single chime will sound to alert Driver Air Bag Bolsters/Supplemental Knee Air Bags you that the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light has come on and a fault has been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or remains on while driving have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately. 109 The first stage inflator is triggered bags work with your seat belt to restrain immediately during an impact that Warning! you properly. In some collisions, air bags requires air bag deployment. A low won’t deploy at all. Always wear your seat energy output is used in less severe belts even though you have air bags. Being too close to the steering wheel or collisions. A higher energy output is used SAFETY for more severe collisions. instrument panel during front air bag Front Air Bag Operation deployment could cause serious injury, This vehicle may be equipped with a including death. Air bags need room to driver and/or front passenger seat belt Front Air Bags are designed to provide inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending buckle switch that detects whether the additional protection by supplementing your arms to reach the steering wheel or instrument panel. driver or front passenger seat belt is the seat belts. Front air bags are not buckled. The seat belt buckle switch may expected to reduce the risk of injury in Never place a rear-facing child restraint adjust the inflation rate of the Advanced rear, side, or rollover collisions. The front in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger Front Air Bags. air bags will not deploy in all frontal front air bag can cause death or serious collisions, including some that may injury to a child 12 years or younger, This vehicle may be equipped with driver including a child in a rear-facing child and/or front passenger seat track produce substantial vehicle damage — restraint. position sensors that may adjust the for example, some pole collisions, truck inflation rate of the Advanced Front Air underrides, and angle offset collisions. Never install a rear-facing child restraint in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a Bags based upon seat position. On the other hand, depending on the type rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If and location of impact, front air bags may the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not deploy in crashes with little vehicle transport a rear-facing child restraint in Warning! front-end damage but that produce a that vehicle. severe initial deceleration. Because air bag sensors measure vehicle No objects should be placed over or near Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag the air bag on the instrument panel or deceleration over time, vehicle speed and Features steering wheel because any such objects damage by themselves are not good could cause harm if the vehicle is in a indicators of whether or not an air bag The Advanced Front Air Bag system has collision severe enough to cause the air bag should have deployed. multistage driver and front passenger air to inflate. Seat belts are necessary for your bags. This system provides output Do not put anything on or around the air protection in all collisions, and also are appropriate to the severity and type of bag covers or attempt to open them needed to help keep you in position, away collision as determined by the Occupant manually. Youmay damage the air bags and from an inflating air bag. Restraint Controller (ORC), which may you could be injured because the air bags When the ORC detects a collision receive information from the front may no longer be functional. The protective requiring the front air bags, it signals the impact sensors (if equipped) or other covers for the air bag cushions are designed to open only when the air bags are inflating. inflator units. A large quantity of system components. non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the Relying on the air bags alone could lead to front air bags. 110 more severe injuries in a collision. The air The steering wheel hub trim cover and Air Bags provide enhanced protection Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air the upper passenger side of the during a frontal impact by working Bags (SABs) are located in the outboard instrument panel separate and fold out of together with the seat belts, side of the front seats. The SABs are the way as the air bags inflate to their full pretensioners, and front air bags. marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or size. The front air bags fully inflate in less “AIRBAG” on a label or on the seat trim on time than it takes to blink your eyes. The the outboard side of the seats. front air bags then quickly deflate while The SABs may help to reduce the risk of helping to restrain the driver and front occupant injury during certain side passenger. impacts, in addition to the injury Knee Impact Bolsters reduction potential provided by the seat belts and body structure. The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the driver and front passenger, and position the front occupants for improved interaction with 06096S0102NA the front air bags. Driver Knee Air Bag
Warning!
Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact bolsters in any way. 06106S0004EM Do not mount any accessories to the knee Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side impact bolsters such as alarm lights, Air Bag stereos, citizen band radios, etc. When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the outboard side of the seatback’s Supplemental Driver And Front 06096S0103NA trim cover. The inflating SAB deploys Passenger Knee Air Bags Front Passenger Knee Air Bag through the seat seam into the space between the occupant and the door. The Supplemental Side Air Bags This vehicle is equipped with a SAB moves at a very high speed and with Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air such a high force that it could injure mounted in the instrument panel below Bags (SABs) occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are positioned in the the steering column and a Supplemental This vehicle is equipped with area where the SAB inflates. Children are Passenger Knee Air Bag mounted in the Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air at an even greater risk of injury from a instrument panel below the glove Bags (SABs). compartment. The Supplemental Knee deploying air bag. 111 outboard occupants in certain side Side Impacts impacts, in addition to the injury Warning! The Side Air Bags are designed to reduction potential provided by the seat activate in certain side impacts. The belts and body structure. Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) Do not use accessory seat covers or place
SAFETY The SABIC deploys downward, covering determines whether the deployment of objects between you and the Side Air Bags; the side windows. An inflating SABIC the Side Air Bags in a particular impact the performance could be adversely pushes the outside edge of the headliner event is appropriate, based on the affected and/or objects could be pushed into out of the way and covers the window. severity and type of collision. The side you, causing serious injury. The SABICs inflate with enough force to impact sensors aid the ORC in injure occupants if they are not belted determining the appropriate response to Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable and seated properly, or if items are impact events. The system is calibrated Curtains (SABICs) positioned in the area where the SABICs to deploy the Side Air Bags on the impact This vehicle is equipped with inflate. Children are at an even greater side of the vehicle during impacts that Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable risk of injury from a deploying air bag. require Side Air Bag occupant protection. Curtains (SABICs). The SABICs may help reduce the risk of In side impacts, the Side Air Bags deploy Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable partial or complete ejection of vehicle independently; a left side impact deploys Curtains (SABICs) are located above the occupants through side windows in the left Side Air Bags only and a side windows. The trim covering the certain side impact events. right-side impact deploys the right Side SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or Air Bags only. Vehicle damage by itself is “AIRBAG.” not a good indicator of whether or not Warning! Side Air Bags should have deployed. The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions, including some collisions Do not mount equipment, or stack at certain angles, or some side collisions luggage or other cargo up high enough to that do not impact the area of the block the deployment of the SABICs. The passenger compartment. The Side Air trim covering above the side windows where the SABIC and its deployment path are Bags may deploy during angled or offset located should remain free from any frontal collisions where the front air bags obstructions. deploy. In order for the SABICs to work as intended, Side Air Bags are a supplement to the do not install any accessory items in your seat belt restraint system. Side Air Bags 06106S0005EM vehicle which could alter the roof. Do not add deploy in less time than it takes to blink Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable an aftermarket sunroof to your vehicle. Do your eyes. Curtain (SABIC) Location not add roof racks that require permanent SABICs may help reduce the risk of head attachments (bolts or screws) for installation on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of and other injuries to front and rear seat the vehicle for any reason. 112 Note: Air bag covers may not be obvious Steering Wheel and Column in the interior trim, but they will open Warning! Instrument Panel during air bag deployment. Knee Impact Bolsters Rollover Events Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags Occupants, including children, who are up Side Air Bags are designed to activate in against or very close to Side Air Bags can be certain rollover events. The ORC Seat Belt Buckle Switch seriously injured or killed. Occupants, determines whether the deployment of including children, should never lean on or Supplemental Side Air Bags sleep against the door, side windows, or the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover Supplemental Knee Air Bags event is appropriate, based on the area where the side air bags inflate, even if Front and Side Impact Sensors they are in an infant or child restraint. severity and type of collision. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indicator Seat Belt Pretensioners Seat belts (and child restraints where of whether or not Side Air Bags should appropriate) are necessary for your Seat Track Position Sensors protection in all collisions. They also help have deployed. keep you in position, away from an inflating The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all If A Deployment Occurs Side Air Bag. To get the best protection rollover events. The rollover sensing from the Side Air Bags, occupants must system determines if a rollover event may The front air bags are designed to deflate wear their seat belts properly and sit be in progress and whether deployment is immediately after deployment. upright with their backs against the seats. appropriate. In the event the vehicle Note: Front and/or side air bags will not Children must be properly restrained in a experiences a rollover or near rollover deploy in all collisions. This does not mean child restraint or booster seat that is something is wrong with the air bag system. appropriate for the size of the child. event, and deployment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the rollover sensing system If you do have a collision which deploys will also deploy the seat belt pretensioners the air bags, any or all of the following Warning! on both sides of the vehicle. may occur: The SABICs may help reduce the risk of The air bag material may sometimes partial or complete ejection of vehicle cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not occupants through side windows in lean against the door or window. Sit upright the occupants as the air bags deploy and in the center of the seat. certain rollover or side impact events. unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those you might get Being too close to the Side Air Bags Air Bag System Components sliding along a carpet or gymnasium floor. during deployment could cause you to be Note: The Occupant Restraint Controller severely injured or killed. They are not caused by contact with (ORC) monitors the internal circuits and chemicals. They are not permanent and Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could interconnecting wiring associated with normally heal quickly. However, if you lead to more severe injuries in a collision. The electrical Air Bag System Components haven’t healed significantly within a few Side Air Bags work with your seat belt to listed below: days, or if you have any blistering, see restrain you properly. In some collisions, Side Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) your doctor immediately. Air Bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your Air Bag Warning Light seat belt even though you have Side Air Bags. 113 As the air bags deflate, you may see After any collision, the vehicle should –Engine some smoke-like particles. The particles be taken to an authorized dealer –Electric Motor (if equipped) are a normal by-product of the process immediately. that generates the non-toxic gas used for –Electric power steering air bag inflation. These airborne particles Enhanced Accident Response SAFETY –Brake booster may irritate the skin, eyes, nose, or System throat. If you have skin or eye irritation, –Electric park brake rinse the area with cool water. For nose In the event of an impact, if the –Automatic transmission gear or throat irritation, move to fresh air. If communication network remains intact, selector the irritation continues, see your doctor. and the power remains intact, depending If these particles settle on your clothing, on the nature of the event, the ORC will –Horn follow the garment manufacturer’s determine whether to have the Enhanced –Front wiper instructions for cleaning. Accident Response System perform the following functions: Do not drive your vehicle after the air –Headlamp washer pump bags have deployed. If you are involved in Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped) Note: After an accident, remember to another collision, the air bags will not be Cut off battery power to the electric cycle the ignition to the STOP in place to protect you. motor (If Equipped) (OFF/LOCK) position and remove the key from the ignition switch to avoid draining Flash hazard lights as long as the the battery. Carefully check the vehicle Warning! battery has power for fuel leaks in the engine compartment Turn on the interior lights, which and on the ground near the engine Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners remain on as long as the battery has compartment and fuel tank before cannot protect you in another collision. Have power or for 15 minutes from the resetting the system and starting the the air bags, seat belt pretensioners, and the intervention of the Enhanced Accident engine. If there are no fuel leaks or seat belt retractor assemblies replaced by an Response System. damage to the vehicle electrical devices authorized dealer immediately. Also, have the (e.g. headlights) after an accident, reset Occupant Restraint Controller System Unlock the power door locks. the system by following the procedure serviced as well. Yourvehicle may also be designed to described below. If you have any doubt, perform any of these other functions in contact an authorized dealer. Note: response to the Enhanced Accident Air bag covers may not be obvious in Response System: the interior trim, but they will open Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off during air bag deployment. the HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circulation Door Cut off battery power to the: 114 Enhanced Accident Response System Reset Procedure After the event occurs, when the system is active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is displayed. Turn the ignition switch from ignition AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compartment and on the ground near the engine compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system and starting the engine. Depending on the nature of the event the left and right turn signal lights, located in the instrument panel, may both be blinking and will continue to blink. In order to move your vehicle to the side of the road, you must follow the system reset procedure.
Customer Will See Customer Action Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds 1. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed in Neutral State). Right turn light BLINKS. 2. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 3. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 4. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light BLINKS. 5. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. Right turn light BLINKS. 6. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light is OFF. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 7. Turn right turn signal switch ON. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is OFF. 8. Place turn signal in neutral state. Left turn light BLINKS. Right turn light is ON SOLID. 9. Turn left turn signal switch ON. Left turn light is ON SOLID. 10. Turn left turn signal switch OFF. (Turn Signal Switch Must be placed Right turn light is OFF. in Neutral State). Left turn light is OFF. 115 Customer Will See Customer Action Note: Each step MUST BE held for at least two seconds
SAFETY 11. Turn ignition STOP/OFF/LOCK. 12. Turn ignition MAR/ACC/ON/RUN. (Entire sequence needs to be System is now reset and the engine may be started. completed within one minute or sequence will need to be repeated). Turn hazard flashers OFF (Manually). If a reset procedure step is not completed within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights will blink and the reset procedure must be performed again in order to be successful.
Maintaining Your Air Bag System system service. If your seat, including your time, typically 30 seconds or less. The trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced EDR in this vehicle is designed to record in any way (including removal or such data as: Warning! loosening/tightening of seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to an authorized How various systems in your vehicle dealer. Only manufacturer approved seat were operating; Modifications to any part of the air bag accessories may be used. If it is necessary system could cause it to fail when you need Whether or not the driver and to modify the air bag system for persons passenger safety belts were it. Youcould be injured if the air bag system with disabilities, contact an authorized is not there to protect you. Do not modify dealer. buckled/fastened; the components or wiring, including adding How far (if at all) the driver was any kind of badges or stickers to the depressing the accelerator and/or brake steering wheel hub trim cover or the upper Event Data Recorder (EDR) passenger side of the instrument panel. Do pedal; and, not modify the front bumper, vehicle body This vehicle is equipped with an event How fast the vehicle was traveling. structure, or add aftermarket side steps or data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of running boards. an EDR is to record, in certain crash or These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in It is dangerous to try to repair any part of near crash-like situations, such as an air the air bag system yourself. Be sure to tell bag deployment or hitting a road which crashes and injuries occur. anyone who works on your vehicle that it obstacle, data that will assist in Note: EDR data are recorded by your has an air bag system. understanding how a vehicle’s systems vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation Do not attempt to modify any part of your performed. The EDR is designed to occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR air bag system. The air bag may inflate record data related to vehicle dynamics under normal driving conditions and no accidentally or may not function properly if and safety systems for a short period of personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, modifications are made. Take your vehicle and crash location) are recorded. to an authorized dealer for any air bag However, other parties, such as law 116 enforcement, could combine the EDR available. According to crash statistics, instructions and warnings in the child data with the type of personally children are safer when properly restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the identifying data routinely acquired during restrained in the rear seats rather than in labels attached to the child restraint. a crash investigation. the front. Before buying any restraint system, To read data recorded by an EDR, special make sure that it has a label certifying equipment is required, and access to the Warning! that it meets all applicable Safety vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition Standards. Youshould also make sure to the vehicle manufacturer, other that you can install it in the vehicle where parties, such as law enforcement, that In a collision, an unrestrained child can you will use it. have the special equipment, can read the become a projectile inside the vehicle. The information if they have access to the force required to hold even an infant on your Note: vehicle or the EDR. lap could become so great that you could not For additional information, refer to hold the child, no matter how strong you are. Child Restraints The child and others could be badly injured or http://www.nhtsa.gov/ killed. Any child riding in your vehicle should parents-and-caregivers or call: Everyone in your vehicle needs to be be in a proper restraint for the child’s size. 1–888–327–4236 buckled up at all times, including babies and children. Every state in the United Canadian residents should refer to States, and every Canadian province, There are different sizes and types of Transport Canada’s website for requires that small children ride in proper restraints for children from newborn size additional information: http:// restraint systems. This is the law, and you to the child almost large enough for an www.tc.gc.ca/eng/ can be prosecuted for ignoring it. adult safety belt. Always check the child motorvehiclesafety/ seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm Children 12 years or younger should ride have the correct seat for your child. properly buckled up in a rear seat, if Carefully read and follow all the Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles
Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who are two years old or younger and Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child Infants and Toddlers who have not reached the height or weight Restraint, facing rearward in a rear seat of the limits of their child restraint vehicle Children who are at least two years old or who Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a Small Children have outgrown the height or weight limit of five-point Harness, facing forward in a rear their rear-facing child restraint seat of the vehicle
117 Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint Children who have outgrown their Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle Larger Children forward-facing child restraint, but are too seat belt, seated in a rear seat of the vehicle
SAFETY small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt Children 12 years old or younger, who have Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in a rear seat of the Children Too Large for Child Restraints outgrown the height or weight limit of their vehicle booster seat
Infant And Child Restraints outgrown the rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing Warning! Safety experts recommend that children convertible child seat. Children should ride rear-facing in the vehicle until they remain in a forward-facing child seat with are two years old or until they reach Never place a rear-facing child restraint a harness for as long as possible, up to either the height or weight limit of their in front of an air bag. A deploying passenger the highest weight or height allowed by rear-facing child restraint. Two types of front air bag can cause death or serious the child seat. child restraints can be used rear-facing: injury to a child 12 years or younger, All children whose weight or height is infant carriers and convertible child including a child in a rear-facing child above the forward-facing limit for the seats. restraint. child seat should use a belt-positioning The infant carrier is only used rear-facing Never install a rear-facing child restraint booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts in the vehicle. It is recommended for in the front seat of a vehicle. Only use a fit properly. If the child cannot sit with children from birth until they reach the rear-facing child restraint in the rear seat. If knees bent over the vehicle’s seat weight or height limit of the infant carrier. the vehicle does not have a rear seat, do not cushion while the child’s back is against Convertible child seats can be used either transport a rear-facing child restraint in that vehicle. the seatback, they should use a rear-facing or forward-facing in the belt-positioning booster seat. The child vehicle. Convertible child seats often and belt-positioning booster seat are have a higher weight limit in the Older Children And Child Restraints held in the vehicle by the seat belt. rear-facing direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used rear-facing by Children who are two years old or who children who have outgrown their infant have outgrown their rear-facing carrier but are still less than at least two convertible child seat can ride years old. Children should remain forward-facing in the vehicle. rear-facing until they reach the highest Forward-facing child seats and weight or height allowed by their convertible child seats used in the convertible child seat. forward-facing direction are for children who are over two years old or who have 118 Children Too Large For Booster 5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip? Warning! Seats If the answer to any of these questions Children who are large enough to wear was “no,” then the child still needs to use a the shoulder belt comfortably, and whose Improper installation can lead to failure booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is legs are long enough to bend over the of an infant or child restraint. It could come using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat front of the seat when their back is loose in a collision. The child could be badly belt fit periodically and make sure the injured or killed. Follow the child restraint against the seatback, should use the seat seat belt buckle is latched. A child’s manufacturer’s directions exactly when belt in a rear seat. Use this simple 5-step squirming or slouching can move the belt installing an infant or child restraint. test to decide whether the child can use out of position. If the shoulder belt the vehicle’s seat belt alone: After a child restraint is installed in the contacts the face or neck, move the child vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat closer to the center of the vehicle, or use forward or rearward because it can loosen 1. Can the child sit all the way back the child restraint attachments. Remove the against the back of the vehicle seat? a booster seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly. child restraint before adjusting the vehicle 2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably seat position. When the vehicle seat has been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint. over the front of the vehicle seat – while the child is still sitting all the way back? Warning! When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt or 3. Does the shoulder belt cross the LATCH anchorages, or remove it from the child’s shoulder between the neck and Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the vehicle. In arm? under an arm or behind their back. In a crash, a sudden stop or accident, it could strike the the shoulder belt will not protect a child occupants or seatbacks and cause serious 4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as properly, which may result in serious injury or personal injury. possible, touching the child’s thighs and death. A child must always wear both the lap not the stomach? and shoulder portions of the seat belt correctly.
119 Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints
Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below Combined Weight
SAFETY LATCH – Lower Restraint Type of the Child + Child LATCH – Lower Seat Belt + Top Seat Belt Only Anchors + Top Restraint Anchors Only Tether Anchor Tether Anchor Rear-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Rear-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child Up to 65 lbs XX Restraint (29.5 kg) Forward-Facing Child More than 65 lbs X Restraint (29.5 kg)
Lower Anchors And Tethers For system has three vehicle anchor points LATCH Positions For Installing Child CHildren (LATCH) Restraint System for installing LATCH-equipped child Restraints In This Vehicle seats. There are two lower anchorages located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the seating position. These anchorages are used to install LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating positions may have a 022668173 top tether anchorage but no lower LATCH Label anchorages. In these seating positions, Yourvehicle is equipped with the child the seat belt must be used with the top 06086S0101NA restraint anchorage system called tether anchorage to install the child LATCH Positions LATCH, which stands for Lower Anchors restraint. Please see the following table Lower Anchorage Symbol and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH for more information. (2 Anchorages Per Seating Position) TopTether Anchorage Symbol 120 Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH What is the weight limit (child’s weight + Use the LATCH anchorage system until the combined weight of the weight of the child restraint) for using the child and the child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt and 65 lbs (29.5 kg) LATCH anchorage system to attach the child tether anchor instead of the LATCH system once the combined restraint? weight is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Do not use the seat belt when you use the LATCH anchorage system Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt to attach a rear-facing or forward-facing child restraint. be used together to attach a rear-facing or No Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH anchorages if allowed forward-facing child restraint? by the booster seat manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s manual for more information. Can a child seat be installed in the center Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the position using the inner LATCH lower No center seating position. anchorage? Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or more child restraints. If the center position does not have dedicated LATCH lower Can two child restraints be attached using a No anchorages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in the center common lower LATCH anchorage? position next to a child seat using the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position. The child seat may touch the back of the front passenger seat if the Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the Yes child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. See your child back of the front passenger seat? restraint owner’s manual for more information. The head restraints can be removed in every seating position if they interfere with the installation of the child restraint. Refer to “Head Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes Restraints” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information.
121 Locating The LATCH Anchorages Locating The Upper Tether Forward-facing child restraints and some Anchorages rear-facing child restraints will also be The lower anchorages equipped with a tether strap. The tether are round bars that are There are tether strap strap will have a hook at the end to attach found at the rear of the anchorages behind each to the top tether anchorage and a way to SAFETY seat cushion where it rear seating position tighten the strap after it is attached to meets the seatback. located in the panel the anchorage. Each anchorage is between the rear under a cover with the seatback and the rear Center Seat LATCH anchorage symbol on it. window. They are found Lift the cover to access the lower under a plastic cover Warning! anchorage. with the tether anchorage symbol on it.
Do not install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH system. This position is not approved for installing child seats using the LATCH attachments. Youmust use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center seating position. Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more than one child restraint. Please refer to “Installing The LATCH-Compatible
06086S0009EM 06086S0104NA Child Restraint System” for typical LATCH Anchorage Locations Upper Tether Anchorage Location installation instructions. 1 — LATCH Anchorage Bar LATCH-compatible child restraint 2 — LATCH Anchorage Locations systems will be equipped with a rigid bar Always follow the directions of the or a flexible strap on each side. Each will child restraint manufacturer when have a hook or connector to attach to the installing your child restraint. Not all lower anchorage and a way to tighten the child restraint systems will be installed connection to the anchorage. as described here.
122 To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child 4. If the child restraint has a tether interferes with the child restraint Restraint strap, connect it to the top tether installation, instead of buckling it behind anchorage. See the section “Installing the child restraint, route the seat belt If the selected seating position has a Child Restraints Using the TopTether through the child restraint belt path and Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor Anchorage” for directions to attach a then buckle it. Do not lock the seat belt. (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat belt, tether anchor. Remind all children in the vehicle that the following the instructions below. See the seat belts are not toys and that they section “Installing Child Restraints Using 5. Tighten all of the straps as you push should not play with them. the Vehicle Seat Belt” to check what type the child restraint rearward and of seat belt each seating position has. downward into the seat. Remove slack in the straps according to the child restraint Warning! 1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower manufacturer’s instructions. straps and on the tether strap of the child seat so that you can more easily attach 6. Test that the child restraint is Improper installation of a child restraint the hooks or connectors to the vehicle installed tightly by pulling back and forth to the LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the restraint. The child could be badly anchorages. on the child seat at the belt path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in injured or killed. Follow the child restraint 2. Place the child seat between the any direction. manufacturer’s directions exactly when lower anchorages for that seating installing an infant or child restraint. position. For some second row seats, you How To Stow An Unused Child restraint anchorages are designed may need to recline the seat and / or raise Switchable-ALR (ALR) Seat Belt: to withstand only those loads imposed by the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a correctly-fitted child restraints. Under no better fit. If the rear seat can be moved When using the LATCH attaching system circumstances are they to be used for adult forward and rearward in the vehicle, you to install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle. may wish to move it to its rear-most seat belts that are not being used by position to make room for the child seat. other occupants or being used to secure Youmay also move the front seat child restraints. An unused belt could forward to allow more room for the child injure a child if they play with it and seat. accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before installing a child restraint using 3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt of the child restraint to the lower behind the child restraint and out of the anchorages in the selected seating child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt position.
123 Installing Child Restraints Using The seat belts in the passenger seating Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For The Vehicle Seat Belt positions are equipped with a Switchable Installing Child Restraints In This Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) that Vehicle Child restraint systems are designed to is designed to keep the lap portion of the be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or seat belt tight around the child restraint SAFETY the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the Warning! webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will make Improper installation or failure to a clicking noise while the webbing is properly secure a child restraint can lead to pulled back into the retractor. failure of the restraint. The child could be badly injured or killed. Refer to the “Automatic Locking Mode” 06086S0102NA description in “Switchable Automatic Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s Locking Retractors (ALR)” under Locations directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint. “Occupant Restraint Systems” for ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking additional information on ALR. Retractor Please see the table below and the following sections for more information. TopTether Anchorage Symbol
Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts What is the weight limit (child’s weight + weight of the Weight limit of Always use the tether anchor when using the seat belt to install a child restraint) for using the Tether Anchor with the the Child forward facing child restraint, up to the recommended weight limit of seat belt to attach a forward facing child restraint? Restraint the child restraint. Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the back of Contact between the front passenger seat and the child restraint is Yes the front passenger seat? allowed, if the child restraint manufacturer also allows contact. The head restraints can be removed in every seating position if they Can the rear head restraints be removed? Yes interfere with the installation of the child restraint. Refer to “Head Restraints” in “Getting To Know YourVehicle” for further information. Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the seat Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating position with an ALR No belt against the belt path of the child restraint? retractor. 124 Installing A Child Restraint With A 3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle Any seat belt system will loosen with Switchable Automatic Locking until you hear a “click.” time, so check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary. Retractor (ALR): 4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight against the child seat. Child restraint systems are designed to Installing Child Restraints Using be secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or 5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the The Top Tether Anchorage: the lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt. shoulder part of the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the Warning! retractor. Then, allow the webbing to Warning! retract back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you will hear a clicking Do not attach a tether strap for a sound. This means the seat belt is now in rear-facing car seat to any location in front Improper installation or failure to the Automatic Locking mode. of the car seat, including the seat frame or a properly secure a child restraint can lead to tether anchorage. Only attach the tether failure of the restraint. The child could be 6. Try to pull the webbing out of the strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether badly injured or killed. retractor. If it is locked, you should not be anchorage that is approved for that seating Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s able to pull out any webbing. If the position, located behind the top of the directions exactly when installing an infant retractor is not locked, repeat step 5. vehicle seat. See the section “Lower Anchors or child restraint. and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH) Restraint 7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing System” for the location of approved tether to tighten the lap portion around the child anchorages in your vehicle. 1. Place the child seat in the center of restraint while you push the child the seating position. For some second restraint rearward and downward into row seats, you may need to recline the the vehicle seat. seat and/or raise the head restraint (if adjustable) to get a better fit. If the rear 8. If the child restraint has a top tether seat can be moved forward and rearward strap and the seating position has a top in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to tether anchorage, connect the tether its rear-most position to make room for strap to the anchorage and tighten the the child seat. Youmay also move the tether strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints Using the TopTether 1. Look behind the seating position front seat forward to allow more room where you plan to install the child for the child seat. Anchorage” for directions to attach a tether anchor. restraint to find the tether anchorage. 2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing Youmay need to move the seat forward from the retractor to pass it through the 9. Test that the child restraint is to provide better access to the tether belt path of the child restraint. Do not installed tightly by pulling back and forth anchorage. If there is no top tether twist the belt webbing in the belt path. on the child seat at the belt path. It should anchorage for that seating position, not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in move the child restraint to another any direction. position in the vehicle if one is available. 125 2. Rotate or lift the cover to access the 5. Remove slack in the tether strap SAFETY TIPS anchor directly behind the seat where according to the child restraint you are placing the child restraint. manufacturer’s instructions. Transporting Passengers NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO AREA. SAFETY Warning!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap Warning! could lead to increased head motion and possible injury to the child. Use only the anchorage position directly behind the child Do not leave children or animals inside seat to secure a child restraint top tether parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat strap. build-up may cause serious injury or death. If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear It is extremely dangerous to ride in a 0502143370US seat, make sure the tether strap does not cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle. In Upper Tether Anchorage Location slip into the opening between the seatbacks a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed. 1 — Tether Strap Hook as you remove slack in the strap. 2 — Cover Do not allow people to ride in any area of 3 — Tether Anchor Transporting Pets your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts. Air Bags deploying in the front seat could Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a 3. Route the tether strap to provide the harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be seat and using a seat belt properly. most direct path for the strap between thrown about and possibly injured, or the anchor and the child seat. If your injure a passenger during panic braking or vehicle is equipped with adjustable rear in a collision. Exhaust Gas head restraints, raise the head restraint, Pets should be restrained in the rear seat and where possible, route the tether (if equipped) in pet harnesses or pet strap under the head restraint and carriers that are secured by seat belts. Warning! between the two posts. If not possible, lower the head restraint and pass the Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain tether strap around the outboard side of carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and the head restraint. odorless. Breathing it can make you 4. Attach the tether strap hook of the unconscious and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow these safety child restraint to the top tether tips: anchorage as shown in the diagram. Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined areas any longer than needed 126 to move your vehicle in or out of the area. If you are required to drive with the immediately. Do not disassemble or Floor Mat Safety Information trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make sure modify the system. Always use floor mats designed to fit that all windows are closed and the climate Front seat belt assemblies must be your vehicle. Only use a floor mat that control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. replaced after a collision. Rear seat belt does not interfere with the operation of DO NOT use the recirculation mode. assemblies must be replaced after a the accelerator, brake or clutch pedals. collision if they have been damaged If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle Only use a floor mat that is securely with the engine running, adjust your heating (i.e., bent retractor, torn webbing, etc.). attached using the floor mat fasteners so or cooling controls to force outside air into If there is any question regarding seat it cannot slip out of position and interfere the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed. belt or retractor condition, replace with the accelerator, brake or clutch the seat belt. pedals or impair safe operation of your The best protection against carbon Air Bag Warning Light vehicle in other ways. monoxide entry into the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check system. Warning! Whenever a change is noticed in the when the ignition switch is first turned to sound of the exhaust system, when ON/RUN. If the light is either not on exhaust fumes can be detected inside the during starting, stays on, or turns on while An improperly attached, damaged, folded, or vehicle, or when the underside or rear of driving, have the system inspected at an stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat the vehicle is damaged, have a competent authorized dealer as soon as possible. fasteners may cause your floor mat to interfere with the accelerator, brake, or mechanic inspect the complete exhaust After the bulb check, this light will illuminate with a single chime when a clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle system and adjacent body areas for control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or broken, damaged, deteriorated, or fault with the Air Bag System has been detected. It will stay on until the fault is DEATH: mispositioned parts. Open seams or ALWAYS securely attach your floor loose connections could permit exhaust removed. If the light comes on mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO NOT fumes to seep into the passenger intermittently or remains on while install your floor mat upside down or turn compartment. In addition, inspect the driving, have an authorized dealer service your floor mat over. Lightly pull to confirm exhaust system each time the vehicle is the vehicle immediately. mat is secured using the floor mat fasteners raised for lubrication or oil change. Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in on a regular basis. Replace as required. “Safety” for further information. ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING FLOOR MATFROM THE VEHICLE before Safety Checks YouShould Make Inside Defroster installing any other floor mat. NEVER install The Vehicle Check operation by selecting the defrost or stack an additional floor mat on top of an existing floor mat. Seat Belts mode and place the blower control on high speed. Youshould be able to feel the ONLYinstall floor mats designed to fit Inspect the seat belt system periodically, air directed against the windshield. See your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat that checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts. an authorized dealer for service if your cannot be properly attached and secured to Damaged parts must be replaced defroster is inoperable. your vehicle. If a floor mat needs to be 127 replaced, only use a FCA approved floor mat Periodic Safety Checks YouShould for the specific make, model, and year of Make Outside The Vehicle your vehicle. Tires ONLYuse the driver’s side floor mat on
SAFETY the driver’s side floor area. To check for Examine tires for excessive tread wear interference, with the vehicle properly and uneven wear patterns. Check for parked with the engine off, fully depress the stones, nails, glass, or other objects accelerator, the brake, and the clutch pedal lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect (if present) to check for interference. If your the tread for cuts and cracks. Inspect floor mat interferes with the operation of sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges. any pedal, or is not secure to the floor, remove the floor mat from the vehicle and Check the wheel nuts for tightness. place the floor mat in your trunk. Check the tires (including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure. ONLYuse the passenger’s side floor mat on the passenger’s side floor area. Lights ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or Have someone observe the operation of slide into the driver’s side floor area when the brake lights and exterior lights while you vehicle is moving. Objects can become trapped under accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals and work the controls. Check turn signal and could cause a loss of vehicle control. high beam indicator lights on the instrument panel. NEVER place any objects under the floor mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These objects Door Latches could change the position of the floor mat and may cause interference with the Check for proper closing, latching, and accelerator, brake, or clutch pedals. locking. If the vehicle carpet has been removed Fluid Leaks and re-installed, always properly attach carpet to the floor and check the floor mat Check area under the vehicle after fasteners are secure to the vehicle carpet. overnight parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or Fully depress each pedal to check for other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes interference with the accelerator, brake, or are detected or if fuel, or brake fluid clutch pedals then re-install the floor mats. leaks are suspected. The cause should be It is recommended to only use mild soap located and corrected immediately. and water to clean your floor mats. After cleaning, always check your floor mat has been properly installed and is secured to your vehicle using the floor mat fasteners by lightly pulling mat. 128 STARTING AND OPERATING
Let’s get to the core of the vehicle, and STARTING THE ENGINE ...... 130 see how you can explore its fullest ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — potential. We’ll look at how to drive IF EQUIPPED ...... 133 safely in any situation, making it a ENGINE BREAK-IN welcome companion with our comfort RECOMMENDATIONS ...... 133 and wallets in mind. ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE ...... 134 AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION.....136 ALFA DNA SELECTOR ...... 142 ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 144 STOP/START SYSTEM ...... 145 SPEED LIMITER ...... 147 SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE CONTROL) ...... 148 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED ...... 150 PARK SENSOR SYSTEM ...... 156 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED ...... 161 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES ...... 164 REFUELING THE VEHICLE ...... 165 VEHICLE LOADING ...... 167 TRAILER TOWING ...... 168 SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING.....168
129 STARTING THE ENGINE Starting Procedure Before starting the engine, be sure to Proceed as follows: Caution! adjust the seat, the interior rear view mirrors, and the door mirrors, and fasten 1. Apply the electric park brake and set the seat belt correctly. the gear selector to PARK (P) or To prevent damage to the starter, do not Never press the accelerator pedal before NEUTRAL (N). continuously crank the engine for more than 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds starting the engine. 2. Fully depress the brake pedal without before trying again. If necessary, messages indicating the touching the accelerator. starting procedure can be shown in the display. 3. Briefly push the ignition button. Remote Starting System 4. If the engine doesn't start within a few This system uses the key fob to start the seconds, you need to repeat the procedure. engine conveniently from outside the Warning! vehicle while still maintaining security. If the problem persists, contact an The system has a range of at least 300 authorized dealer. When leaving the vehicle, always remove feet (91 meters). the key fob from the vehicle and lock your The remote starting system also STARTING AND OPERATING vehicle. activates the climate control (if Warning! Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or equipped), the heated seats (if equipped), with access to an unlocked vehicle. and the heated steering wheel (if Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid equipped), depending on temperatures Allowing children to be in a vehicle outside and inside of the vehicle. unattended is dangerous for a number of into the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start the vehicle. This could result reasons. A child or others could be seriously Note: or fatally injured. Children should be warned in flash fire causing serious personal injury. not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal Do not attempt to push or tow your Obstructions between the vehicle or the transmission gear selector. vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped and key fob may reduce this range. with an automatic transmission cannot be Do not leave the key fob in or near the How to use Remote Start vehicle, or in a location accessible to started this way. Unburned fuel could enter children. A child could operate power the catalytic converter and once the engine All of the following conditions must be windows, other controls, or move the has started, ignite and damage the met before the engine will remote start: converter and vehicle. vehicle. Gear selector in PARK (P). Do not leave children or animals inside If the vehicle has a discharged battery, parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat booster cables may be used to obtain a Doors closed. build-up may cause serious injury or death. start from a booster battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type of start can be Hood closed. dangerous if done improperly. Refer to Trunk closed. “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further information. Hazard switch off. 130 Brake switch inactive (brake pedal not Cold Weather Operation 2. If the engine does not start, wait five pressed). seconds and let the starter cool down and To prevent possible engine damage while then repeat the starting procedure Battery at an acceptable charge level. starting at low temperatures, this vehicle will inhibit engine cranking when the PANIC button not pushed. 3. If the engine does not start after eight ambient temperature is less than –22° F attempts, let the starter cool down for at System not disabled from previous (–30° C) and the oil temperature sensor least 10 seconds, and then repeat the remote start event. reading indicates an engine block heater starting procedure has not been used. An externally- Vehicle alarm system indicator If the problem persists, contact your powered electric engine block heater is flashing. authorized dealer. available as optional equipment or from Ignition in the OFF mode. your authorized dealer. Note: After prolonged vehicle inactivity, very difficult starting, that can be noticed The message “plug in engine heater” will Fuel level meets minimum through rapid fatigue of the starter, be displayed in the instrument cluster requirement. might also be due to a discharged when the ambient temperature is below battery. In this case, see the "Jump Remote Start Comfort Systems — 5° F (–15° C) at the time the engine is Starting" section in the "In Case Of If Equipped shut off as a reminder to avoid possible Emergency" chapter. When Remote Start is activated, the crank delays at the next cold start. heated steering wheel and driver heated If Engine Fails To Start seat features will automatically turn on in Caution! Starting the Engine with Key Fob cold weather. Battery Run Down or Drained These features will stay on through the If the ignition does not respond when the Use of the recommended oil and adhering to duration of remote start also until the button is pushed, the key fob battery ignition is cycled to the ON/RUN mode. the prescribed oil change intervals is important to prevent engine damage and might be run down or drained. Therefore, Remote Start Windshield Wiper De–Icer ensure satisfactory starting in cold the system does not detect the presence Activation — If Equipped conditions. of the key fob in the vehicle, and will When remote start is active and the display a dedicated message. outside ambient temperature is less than Extended Park Starting In this case, follow the instructions 39°F (4°C), the Windshield Wiper De-Icer outlined in "Starting With A Discharged will be enabled. Exiting remote start will If the vehicle has not been started or Key Fob Battery" in the "Getting To Know resume previous operation, except if the driven for at least 35 days, it is advisable YourVehicle" chapter, and start the Windshield Wiper De-Icer is active. to follow the indications below. engine normally. The Windshield Wiper De-Icer timer and To start the engine, proceed as follows: operation will continue. 1. Briefly push the ignition button
131 After Starting — Warming Up The inform about the absence of the key on Engine board, only if the doors are closed. Warning! Proceed as follows: Stopping the engine (cycling from the ON to the STOP position) the accessories are Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid Travel slowly, letting the engine run at still powered for about three minutes, or into the throttle body air inlet opening in an a reduced RPM, without accelerating until a door is opened. attempt to start the vehicle. This could suddenly. When the ignition is in the STOP/OFF result in flash fire causing serious personal injury. It is recommended to wait until the mode, the window switches remain active digital engine coolant temperature for three minutes. Opening a front door Do not attempt to push or tow your indicator starts to rise for maximum will cancel this function. vehicle to get it started. Vehicles equipped performance. with an automatic transmission cannot be After severe driving, idle the engine to allow the temperature inside the engine started this way. Unburned fuel could enter Stopping The Engine the catalytic converter and once the engine compartment to cool before shutting off has started, ignite and damage the To stop the engine, proceed as follows: the engine. converter and vehicle. 1. Park the vehicle in a position that is Turbocharger Cool Down
STARTING AND OPERATING If the vehicle has a discharged battery, not dangerous for oncoming traffic. booster cables may be used to obtain a It is recommended before switching the start from a booster battery or the battery 2. Engage the PARK (P) mode. vehicle off, to keep the engine idling for a in another vehicle. This type of start can be few minutes so that the turbocharger can dangerous if done improperly. Refer to 3. With engine idling, push the be suitably lubricated. This procedure is “Jump Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” START/STOP button on the steering particularly recommended after severe for further information. wheel to STOP the engine. driving. Note: Do not leave the ignition in ON After a full load operation, keep the mode when the engine is off. engine idling for three to five minutes Caution! To shut off the engine with vehicle speed before switching it off. greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must This time allows the lubricating oil and To prevent damage to the starter, do not push and hold the ignition or push the the engine coolant to eliminate the continuously crank the engine for more than START/STOP button three times excessive heat from combustion 25 seconds at a time. Wait 60 seconds consecutively within a few seconds. The chamber, bearings, inner components and before trying again. engine will shut down, and the ignition will turbocharger. be placed in the ON mode With the keyless ignition system, it is possible to go away from the vehicle taking the key fob with you, without the engine switching off. The vehicle will 132 ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — Note: ENGINE BREAK-IN IF EQUIPPED The engine block heater cord is a RECOMMENDATIONS The engine block heater warms the factory installed option. If your vehicle is 2.0L GME T4 Engine Break-In engine and permits quicker starts in cold not equipped, heater cords are available For vehicles equipped with the 2.0L weather. from your authorized dealer. GME T4, use the following engine Connect the cord to a 110-115 Volt AC The engine block heater will require break-in recommendations: electrical outlet with a grounded, 110 Volts AC and 6.5 Amps to activate Despite modern technology and World three-wire extension cord. the heater element. Class Manufacturing methods, the For ambient temperatures below 0°F The engine block heater must be moving parts of the engine must still (-18°C), the engine block heater is plugged in at least 1 hour to have a wear in with each other. This wearing in recommended. For ambient warming effect on the engine and at occurs mainly during the first 500 miles temperatures below -20°F (-29°C), the least 4 hours to have a warming effect (805 km) and continues through the first engine block heater is required. when ambient temperatures are below oil change interval. The engine block heater cord is routed -20 F (-29 C) Note: A new engine may consume some under the hood, behind to the driver’s oil during its first few thousand miles side headlamp. Follow the steps below to (kilometers) of operation. This should be properly use the engine block heater: Warning! considered a normal part of the break-in 1. Locate the engine block heater cord period and not interpreted as an (access door on the passenger side wiper Remember to disconnect the engine block indication of a problem. Please monitor cowl). heater cord before driving. Damage to the your oil level during the break-in period 110-115 Volt electrical cord could cause and add oil as required. 2. Pull the cord to the front of the electrocution. It is recommended for the operator to vehicle and plug it into a grounded, observe the following driving behaviors three-wire extension cord. during the new vehicle break-in period: 3. After the vehicle is running, properly 0to100miles(0to160km): stow away behind access door on the Do not allow the engine to operate at passenger side wiper cowl. idle for an extended period of time. Press the accelerator pedal slowly and not more than halfway to avoid rapid acceleration. Avoid aggressive braking. Drive with the engine speed less than 3500 RPM. 133 Maintain vehicle speed below 55 mph ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE "Driver Assistance" and "Automatic (88 km) and observe local speed limits. The vehicle is equipped with electric park Parking Brake". 100 to 300 miles (160 to 483 km): brake to guarantee better use and In addition to engaging the electric park optimal performance compared to a brake, along with steering and positioning Press the accelerator pedal slowly and manually operated park brake. chocks in front of the wheels (when on a not more than halfway to avoid rapid The electric parking brake features a steep slope), you must always place the acceleration in lower gears (1st to 3rd vehicle in the PARK (P) mode before gears). switch located on the center console, a caliper with motor for each rear wheel, leaving. Avoid aggressive braking. and an electronic control module. Should the vehicle battery be faulty, the battery must be replaced in order to Drive with the engine speed less than unlock the electric park brake. 5000 RPM. Engaging The Park Brake Manually Maintain vehicle speed below 70 mph (112 km/h) and observe local speed Briefly pull the switch located on the limits. center console to manually engage the electric park brake when the vehicle is 300 to 500 miles (483 to 805 km): STARTING AND OPERATING stationary. Exercise the full engine rpm range, Noise may be heard from the rear of the shifting manually (paddles or gear shift) vehicle when engaging the electric at higher rpm’s when possible. parking brake. 07046S0001 A slight movement of the brake pedal Do not perform sustained operation Electric Park Brake Switch with the accelerator pedal at wide open may be detected when engaging the throttle. The electric parking brake can be electric parking brake with the brake engaged in two ways: pedal pressed. Maintain vehicle speed below 85 mph With the electric parking brake engaged, (136 km/h) and observe local speed Manually, by pulling the switch on the the BRAKE warning light on the limits. center console. instrument panel and the switch will For the first 1500 miles (2414 km): Automatically, in "Safe Hold" or "Auto illuminate. Park Brake" conditions. Do not participate in track events, sport driving schools, or similar activities Note: Normally, the electric parking during the first 1500 miles (2414 km). brake is engaged automatically when the engine is stopped. This function can be Note: Monitor engine oil with every deactivated/activated on the refueling and add if necessary. Oil and Information and Entertainment system fuel consumption may be higher through by selecting the following items in the first oil change interval. sequence on the main menu: "Settings", 134 Disengaging The Electric Park Brake children. A child could operate power Manually Caution! windows, other controls, or move the In order to manually release the park vehicle. brake, the ignition should be in the ON Be sure the park brake is fully disengaged With the Electronic Parking Brake failure mode. Press the brake pedal, and then before driving; failure to do so can lead to warning light on, some functions of the push the switch on the center console brake failure and a collision. electric parking brake are deactivated. In briefly. this case the driver is responsible for brake Always fully apply the park brake when activation and vehicle parking in complete Noise may be heard from the rear of the leaving your vehicle, or it may roll and cause safety conditions. vehicle, and a slight movement of the damage or injury. brake pedal may be detected during disengagement. If, under exceptional circumstances, the After disengaging the electric parking Caution! use of the brake is required with the brake, the BRAKE warning light on the vehicle in motion, keep the switch on the instrument panel and the light on the center console pulled as long as the brake switch will turn off. Never use gear position PARK (P) instead of action is necessary. the electric parking brake. Always engage If the BRAKE warning light on the The BRAKE warning light may turn on the electric parking brake when parking the instrument panel remains on with the with the hydraulic system temporarily vehicle to prevent injury or damage caused electric parking brake disengaged, this by the unexpected movement of the vehicle. unavailable, in this case braking is indicates a fault: in this case, contact an controlled by the motors. authorized dealer. The brake lights will also automatically Electric Park Brake Operating Modes turn on in the same way as for normal The electric park brake may operate as braking with the use of the brake pedal. Warning! follows: Release the switch on the center console to stop the braking action with the "Dynamic Operating Mode": this mode vehicle in motion. Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or is activated by pulling the switch with access to an unlocked vehicle. repeatedly while driving. If, through this procedure, the vehicle is braked until a speed below 1.9 mph Allowing children to be in a vehicle "Static Engagement and Release (3 km/h) is reached and the switch is kept unattended is dangerous for a number of Mode": with the vehicle stationary, the pulled, the park brake will definitively reasons. A child or others could be seriously electric park brake can be activated by engage. or fatally injured. Children should be warned pulling the switch on the center console not to touch the park brake, brake pedal or once. On the other hand, push the switch Note: Driving the vehicle with the the gear selector. electric parking brake engaged, or using and the brake pedal at the same time to it several times to slow down the vehicle, Do not leave the key fob in or near the disengage the brake. may cause severe damage to the braking vehicle or in a location accessible to system. 135 "Drive Away Release": the electric park Safe Hold AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION brake will automatically disengage with Safe Hold is a safety function that The vehicle can be equipped with an the driver side seat belt fastened and the automatically engages the electric park electronically controlled 8-speed detection of an action performed by the brake in the event of a dangerous automatic transmission where gear driver to move the vehicle (forward gear condition for the vehicle. shifting automatically takes place, or reverse gear). This feature can be The electric park brake engages depending on the vehicle usage turned on or off in the Information and instantaneous parameters (vehicle speed, Entertainment System. automatically to prevent vehicle movement if: grade, and accelerator pedal position). "Safe Hold": if the vehicle speed is The new transmission is an absolute lower than 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the gear The vehicle speed is below 2 mph innovation, as it can match the selector is not in PARK (P) position and (3 km/h). Stop/Start system with the traditional the driver's intention of leaving the A transmission operating mode automatic transmissions with built-in vehicle is detected, the electric park different from PARK (P) is activated. torque converter. For further brake will automatically engage to hold information, refer to the “Stop/Start” the vehicle in safety conditions. The driver's seat belt is not fastened. section within this chapter. The driver side door is open. Manual gear shifting can still occur STARTING AND OPERATING "Auto Park Brake": if the vehicle speed thanks to the "sequential mode" position is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h), the electric No attempts to apply pressure on the for the gear selector. park brake will automatically engage brake pedal have been detected. when the gear selector is in PARK (P) position. The light on the switch located The vehicle is parked on roads with a on the center console switches on slope of more than 4%. Warning! together with the BRAKE warning light on The “Safe Hold” function can be the instrument panel when the park brake temporarily disabled by pressing the It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or is engaged and applied to the wheels. switch located on the center console and NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than Each automatic park brake engagement the brake pedal at the same time, with idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing can be cancelled by pressing the switch the vehicle stationary and the driver side the brake pedal, the vehicle could on the center console and at the same door open. accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. time moving the gear selector for the Once disabled, the function will activate Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit transmission to position PARK (P). again when the vehicle speed reaches someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your 12 mph (20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. to STOP and then to ON. Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift the transmission into PARK, and turn the 136 ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in Display AutoStick: + manually shift to higher gear; – manually shift to lower gear the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is The following information is shown on the locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against dedicated area of the display: The positions diagram is illustrated on unwanted movement. the top of the gear selector. When leaving the vehicle, always make In Automatic Mode: the active mode sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, (P,R, N, D) and with "D" the current gear remove the key fob from the vehicle, and number. lock the vehicle. In Manual Drive Mode (Sequential): Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or the mode (M), the current gear and the with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing double or single gear shift request, both children to be in a vehicle unattended is up and down (single or double arrow). dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Children should be warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear selector. 07076S0002EM Do not leave the key fob in or near the Gear Selector Center Console vehicle (or in a location accessible to children), and do not leave the ignition in the AVVor ON 1 — Gear Selector mode. A child could operate power windows, 2 — PARK (P) Button other controls, or move the vehicle. The letter corresponding to the mode selected on the gear selector lights up Caution! 07076S0001EM Gear Display and appears on the instrument cluster display. Gear Selector Damage to the transmission may occur if To select a mode, move the gear selector the following precautions are not observed: The gear functioning is controlled by the forward or backwards, together with Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE gear selector, which can assume the pressing the brake pedal and button to only after the vehicle has come to a following positions: engage REVERSE (R). complete stop. P = PARK Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is R = REVERSE above idle speed. N = NEUTRAL Before shifting into any gear, make sure D = DRIVE, (automatic forward speed) your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.
137 (D) or REVERSE (R), the vehicle must be moving at a low speed or stopped, and Warning! the brake pedal must also be pressed. Note: Never use the PARK position as a DO NOT accelerate while shifting substitute for the park brake. Always apply from position PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N) the park brake fully when parked to guard to another position. against vehicle movement and possible injury or damage. After selecting a gear, wait a few seconds before accelerating. This Yourvehicle could move and injure you and others if it is not in PARK. Check by 07076S0005EM precaution is particularly important with trying to move the gear selector out of Gear Selector engine cold. PARK with the brake pedal released. Make 3 — Gear Selector Button sure the transmission is in PARK before Transmission Operating Modes leaving the vehicle. PARK (P) It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or The gear selector is a joystick style
STARTING AND OPERATING The transmission is locked in this mode. NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than shifting mechanism which returns to the The engine can be started in this mode. idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing center position automatically. It can be Note: Never try to engage PARK (P) the brake pedal, the vehicle could pushed forward twice and rearward accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. twice, based on the starting condition. mode when the vehicle is moving. Before Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit leaving the vehicle, make sure this mode someone or something. Only shift into gear The PARK (P) mode can be is engaged (letter P shown on the display enabled/disabled by pushing the PARK when the engine is idling normally and your and gear selector) and that the park foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. (P) button. brake is engaged. Unintended movement of a vehicle could To transition the vehicle into REVERSE When parking on a flat surface, first (R) mode from DRIVE (D) mode, or into injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all engage the PARK (P) mode and then vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle DRIVE (D) mode from REVERSE (R) engage the electric park brake. while the engine is running. Before exiting a mode, it is necessary to move the gear vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift selector by pushing the gear selector When parking uphill, before activating the PARK (P) mode, engage the electric the transmission into PARK, and turn the button. ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in park brake. Otherwise, it could be the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is When using AutoStick, activate it by difficult to engage the (P) mode. moving the gear selector from DRIVE (D) locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against to the left and then forward toward the - To check that the PARK (P) mode is unwanted movement. symbol or backward toward the + symbol actually engaged, make sure (P) is When leaving the vehicle, always make and the gear is changed. illuminated on the display and on the gear sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, selector. To shift out of PARK (P), or to pass from remove the key fob from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle. position NEUTRAL (N) to position DRIVE 138 Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or NEUTRAL (N) vehicle's optimal driving characteristics with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing Use this range when the vehicle is are provided for all conditions. children to be in a vehicle unattended is standing for prolonged periods with the AutoStick dangerous for a number of reasons. A child engine running. The engine may be In the case of frequent shifting (e.g. for or others could be seriously or fatally started in this range. Apply the electric sport driving, when the vehicle is driven injured. Children should be warned not to park brake and shift the transmission touch the park brake, brake pedal or the with a heavy load or on slopes), it is into PARK (P) if you must leave the transmission gear selector. recommended to use the Autostick vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or near the (sequential shifting) mode to select and vehicle (or in a location accessible to keep a lower fixed ratio. children), and do not leave the ignition in the Warning! In these conditions, the use of a lower ON mode. A child could operate power gear improves vehicle performance, windows, other controls, or move the preventing overheating. vehicle. Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off It is possible to shift from DRIVE (D) the ignition to coast down a hill. These are mode to sequential mode regardless of unsafe practices that limit your response to vehicle speed. Caution! changing traffic or road conditions. You might lose control of the vehicle and have a Activation collision. Starting from DRIVE (D), move the Before moving the transmission gear selector to the left (– and + indication of selector out of PARK, you must push the ignition button to cycle from STOP/OFF DRIVE (D) the trim) to activate the sequential drive mode to the ON mode, and also press the Use this mode in normal driving mode. The gear engaged will be shown on brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear conditions. the display. selector could result. Shifting from DRIVE (D) to PARK (P) or Shifting is made by moving the gear DO NOT race the engine when shifting REVERSE (R) modes must take place selector forwards, towards symbol – or from PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear only after releasing the accelerator backwards, towards symbol +. range, as this can damage the drivetrain. pedal, with vehicle at a standstill and Steering Wheel Shift Paddles — brake pedal pressed. If Equipped REVERSE (R) This mode ensures automatic The gear can also be manually shifted by Select this mode only with the vehicle at engagement of the most suitable gears using the paddles behind the steering a standstill. for driving needs and maximum fuel wheel. Pull the right paddle (+) toward the economy in terms of consumption. steering wheel and release it to engage a In this position, the transmission shifts higher gear, and perform the same the gears automatically, selecting the operation with the left paddle (-) to most suitable for forward driving among engage a lower gear. those available as you go. In this way the 139 Note: 1. Stop the vehicle. To select the correct gear for 2. Shift the transmission into PARK (P), maximum deceleration (engine brake), if possible. If not, shift the transmission just keep the gear paddle pulled (–): the to NEUTRAL (N). transmission goes to an operating mode in which the vehicle can slow down 3. Push and hold the ignition until the easily. engine turns OFF. The vehicle will keep the gear 4. Wait for about 10 seconds, then selected by the driver until the safety restart the engine. conditions allow it. 07076S0006EM 5. Shift into the desired gear range. If Steering Wheel Shift Paddles This means, for example, that the the problem is no longer detected, the system will try to prevent the engine transmission will return to normal Note: If only one manual shift is from switching off, automatically operation. necessary, the letter (D) will remain on downshifting if the engine speed is too the display with the engaged gear next to Note: Even if the transmission can be low. reset, we recommend that you visit your STARTING AND OPERATING it. authorized dealer at your earliest Deactivation Automatic Transmission Limp Home Mode possible convenience. Yourauthorized To deactivate the sequential driving dealer has diagnostic equipment to mode, bring the gear selector back in Transmission function is monitored determine if the problem could reoccur. If position DRIVE (D) ("automatic" driving electronically for abnormal conditions. If the transmission cannot be reset, service mode). a condition is detected that could result is required at your authorized dealer. in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is activated. Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System Warning! In this condition, the transmission stays in fourth gear, regardless of the selected This vehicle is equipped with a Brake gear. Positions PARK (P), REVERSE (R) Transmission Shift Interlock system Do not downshift for additional engine and NEUTRAL (N) still work. (BTSI) that holds the gear selector in braking on a slippery surface. The drive PARK (P) unless the brakes are applied. wheels could lose their grip and the vehicle The symbol might light up in the could skid, causing a collision or personal instrument cluster. This system prevents you from moving injury. the gear selector from position PARK (P) Temporary failure unless the brakes are applied. In the event of a momentary problem, the To shift the transmission out of PARK (P), transmission can be reset to regain all the ignition must be cycled to the AVV forward gears by performing the mode (engine running or not) and the following steps: brake pedal must be pressed. 140 Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Before activating any transmission Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or Disabling operating mode, fully depress the brake with access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing Only if strictly necessary (e.g. pushing the pedal. children to be in a vehicle unattended is vehicle, conveyor vehicle washing Note: The unexpected movement of the dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally systems) inhibit the automatic activation vehicle can injure the occupants or of PARK (P) mode when stopping the injured. Children should be warned not to people nearby. Do not leave the vehicle touch the parking brake, brake pedal or the engine, or proceed as described below: with engine running: before getting out of transmission gear selector. 1. Vehicle at a standstill. the passenger compartment always engage the electric park brake, select the Do not leave the key fob in or near the PARK (P) mode, stop the engine. vehicle (or in a location accessible to 2. NEUTRAL (N) mode activated. children), and do not leave the ignition in the 3. Push the ignition button for at least AVVor ON mode. A child could operate three seconds. power windows, other controls, or move the Warning! vehicle. The automatic park brake engagement function when the engine is stopped can also be deactivated on the Information It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or Caution! and Entertainment system by selecting NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than the following functions on the main menu: idle speed. If your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could Only engage the gear with engine at idling "Settings", "Driver Assistance" and accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. "Automatic Parking Brake". Youcould lose control of the vehicle and hit while fully depressing the brake pedal. If the transmission temperature exceeds the Important Notes someone or something. Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally and your normal operating limits, the transmission Failure to comply with what is reported foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal. control unit may change the gear engagement order and reduce the drive below may damage the transmission: Unintended movement of a vehicle could torque. If the transmission overheats, it Shift into PARK (P) mode only with the injure those in or near the vehicle. As with all could operate incorrectly until it cools down. vehicle at a standstill. vehicles, you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. Before exiting a When using the vehicle with extremely Select REVERSE (R) mode, or pass vehicle, always apply the park brake, shift low external temperatures, the from REVERSE to another mode only the transmission into PARK, and turn the transmission operation may change ignition STOP/OFF.When the ignition is in depending on the engine and transmission with the vehicle at a standstill and engine temperature, as well as vehicle speed. idling. the STOP/OFF mode, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the vehicle against Activation of the torque converter clutch Do not change between PARK (P), unwanted movement. and of the eighth gear is inhibited until the REVERSE (R), NEUTRAL (N) or DRIVE (D) transmission oil is correctly warmed up. When leaving the vehicle, always make Complete operation of the transmission will modes with engine running at a speed sure the ignition is in the STOP/OFF mode, be enabled as soon as the fluid temperature above idling. remove the key fob from the vehicle, and reaches the predefined value. lock the vehicle. 141 ALFA DNA SELECTOR On the instrument panel display, the different modes are characterized by Alfa DNA System different colors: This vehicle is equipped with an Alfa DNA Natural - Blue system selector (located on the center console). There are four modes of Dynamic - Red operation to be selected according to Advanced Efficiency - Green driving style and road conditions:
07116S0002EM Natural Mode The "Performance" screen graphically reproduces some parameters closely linked to the efficiency of the driving
STARTING AND OPERATING style, with a view to limiting consumption.
07076S0003EM 07076S0004BASE Alfa DNA System Selector Mode Display d = Dynamic (sports driving mode). Each driving mode is graphically different in frame color and contents of each d+ = Dynamic + (sports driving mode individual "performance" screen. with traction control deactivated) Driving Modes n = Natural (mode for driving in normal conditions). "Natural" Mode “Natural” Mode is characterized engine a = Advanced Efficiency (ECO driving and transmission: standard response. 07116S0001EM mode for maximum fuel savings). Natural Mode Performance Display Activation = Adjusts the calibration of the "Dynamic" Mode It is activated by rotating the selector to active suspension (if equipped). the letter "n", the displays light up in blue. Activation When the engine is stopped, the selector It is activated by rotating the selector to returns to “ n” (Natural) mode. the letter "d", the displays light up in red. The symbol of the active mode lights up in red on the selector. 142 07116S0003EM 07116S0006EM 07116S0005EM Dynamic Mode Dynamic Mode Performance Display Advanced Efficiency Mode ESC and ASR systems: intervention The "Performance" screen displays ESC and ASR systems: intervention thresholds that ensure more enjoyable, parameters related to vehicle stability, thresholds aimed at ensuring maximum sportier driving while guaranteeing the the graphs illustrate the trend of the safety in low-grip driving conditions. It is stability of the vehicle. longitudinal/lateral accelerations advisable to select "Advanced Efficiency" Engine and transmission: adoption of (G-meter information), considering mode in the presence of low-grip road sports mapping. gravity acceleration as a reference unit. surfaces. Lateral acceleration peaks are displayed “Advanced Efficiency” Mode is on the right. characterized by reduced engine performance and ECO shifting strategy Warning! "Advanced Efficiency" Mode for the automatic transmission. Activation The "Performance" screen graphically In "Dynamic", the sensitivity of the It is activated by rotating the selector to displays some parameters closely accelerator pedal increases considerably. Consequently, driving is less fluid and the letter "a", the displays light up in related to the vehicle consumption. comfortable. green.
143 ALFA ACTIVE SUSPENSION By pressing the button, the system (AAS) — IF EQUIPPED prepares the shock absorber calibration The vehicle's electronic suspension in order to favor driving comfort. management system is the result of a sophisticated elaboration of the various sensors, aimed at optimizing the vehicle's performance. The system continuously monitors the damping of the suspension through the actuator installed on each shock 07116S0008EM absorber. The calibration of the shock Advanced Efficiency Mode Performance absorbers can be adjusted to the Display conditions of the road surface and to the dynamic conditions of the vehicle, Driving Mode Deactivation 04306S0001BASE improving its comfort and road handling. “Alfa DNA” System Selector To deactivate any driving mode, simply The driver can choose, while driving, (only STARTING AND OPERATING move the selector to any other mode. In case of a system failure, the symbol in "Dynamic” mode), between two types and a dedicated message will be Note: of suspension calibration: a more sporty shown on the instrument panel display. or a more comfortable one. When the engine is next started, the "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" and "Natural" mode selected previously is retained. The system will reactivate in "Advanced Efficiency", "Dynamic" or "Natural" mode, depending on which mode was selected before the engine was stopped. When the engine is next started, the "Race" mode selected previously is not retained. The system will reactivate in "Dynamic" mode. It is not possible to go directly from "Dynamic" mode to "Advanced Efficiency" mode and vice versa. You must always activate the “Natural” mode first and then select the other mode. 144 STOP/START SYSTEM Restarting the Engine System Activation Stop/Start System To restart the engine, release the brake The activation of the system is indicated pedal. by the symbol lighting up on the The Stop/Start system automatically With the brake pressed and the display. In this condition, the light on the shuts off the engine during a vehicle stop transmission in automatic mode DRIVE button is off. if the required conditions are met. (D), the engine will restart by shifting to System Deactivation Releasing the brake pedal or accelerator REVERSE (R), to PARK (P) or to A message will appear on the display pedal will automatically restart the "AutoStick". engine. when the system is deactivated. In this With brake pressed if the gear selector is condition, the light on the button is on. The function was developed to increase in "AutoStick" mode, the engine will Note: Each time the engine is started, vehicle efficiency by reducing fuel restart by shifting to PARK (P) or by the system is activated regardless of consumption, gas emissions, and sound moving the selector to + or -. pollution. where was when it was previously System Manual Activation/ switched off. Operating Mode Deactivation Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Stopping the Engine To manually activate/deactivate the Autostop With vehicle at a standstill and brake system, push the button located in the For higher comfort and increased safety, pedal pressed, the engine switches off if control panel on the left of the steering and to reduce emissions, there are the gear selector is in a position other wheel. than REVERSE (R). certain conditions where the engine will not autostop despite the system being The system does not operate when the active, such as: gear selector is in REVERSE (R), in order to making parking maneuvers easier. Engine still cold. In the event of stops uphill, engine Especially cold outside temperature. switching off is disabled to make the "Hill Start Assist" function available (works Battery not sufficiently charged. only with running engine). Driver's door not shut. NOTE: The engine can only be Driver's seat belt not fastened. automatically stopped after having run at about 6 mph (10 km/h). After an 07126S0051EM Reverse gear engaged (e.g. for parking automatic restart, the vehicle only needs Stop/Start Button maneuvers). to exceed a speed of 0.3 mph (0.5 km/h) With the automatic climate control to stop the engine. active, an adequate cabin heating or Engine stopping is signaled by the cooling comfort has not been reached or symbol lighting up on the instrument with MAX-DEF function active. cluster display. 145 During the first period of use, to Irregular Operation initialize the system. In the event of malfunction, the Steering angle beyond threshold. Stop/Start system is deactivated. For failure indications, see the "Warning Engine Restarting Conditions Lights and Messages" paragraph, Due to comfort, emission control and "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" safety reasons, the engine can restart chapter. automatically without any action by the Vehicle Inactivity driver, under special conditions, such as: In the event of vehicle inactivity (or if the Battery not sufficiently charged. battery is replaced), special attention 07126S0002EM Reduced braking system vacuum (e.g. must be paid to the disconnection of the Battery Power Supply if the brake pedal is pressed repeatedly). battery power supply. 1 — Socket Vehicle moving (e.g. when driving on Proceed as follows: 2 — Sensor roads with a grade). Remove connector from socket to 3 — Connector
STARTING AND OPERATING disconnect sensor (battery status Engine stopping by the Stop/Start monitoring) installed on the negative pole system for more than approx. three of the battery. This sensor should never Note: After setting the ignition to STOP minutes. be disconnected from the pole except if and having closed the driver side door, With the automatic climate control the battery is replaced. wait at least one minute before active, an adjustment in cabin heating or disconnecting the electrical supply from cooling is made or with MAX-DEF the battery. When reconnecting the function active. electrical supply to the battery, make sure that the ignition is in the STOP mode Safety Functions and the driver side door is closed. When the engine is stopped through the Stop/Start system, if the driver releases their seat belt, opens the driver's or passenger's door, or opens the hood from inside the vehicle, the engine can be restarted only by using the ignition. This condition is indicated to the driver both through a buzzer and a message on the instrument cluster display.
146 SPEED LIMITER Programmed Speed Icon Flashing Description The programmed speed will flash in the following scenarios: This feature allows the speed of the vehicle to be limited to speeds, which can When the accelerator pedal has been be set by the driver. fully pressed and the vehicle has The maximum speed can be set with the exceeded the programmed speed. vehicle stationary or in motion. The Activating the system after setting a minimum speed that can be set is 18 mph limit below the effective speed of the (30mk/h). vehicle. When this feature is active, the vehicle 07136S0001EM In the event of overtake acceleration. speed depends on the pressing of the Speed Limiter Display accelerator pedal until the programmed Speed Limit Programming Deactivation speed limit is reached (see "Speed Limit Programming" paragraph). The speed limit can be programmed The feature can be activated/ through the Information and deactivated through the Information and Activation Entertainment System. Entertainment System. The feature can be activated/ To access the function on the main menu, Deactivating The Device deactivated through the Information and select the following items in sequence: To access this feature on the main menu, Entertainment System. "Settings", "Safety" and "Speed Limiter select the following items in sequence: Activating The Device Set Speed". "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and To access this feature on the main menu, By turning the Rotary Pad, the speed “OFF”. increases by 5 mph (5 km/h), from a select the following items in sequence: Automatic Deactivation Of The Device "Settings", "Safety", “Speed Limiter” and minimum of 18 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of 112 mph (180 km/h). The device deactivates automatically in “ON”. the event of fault in the system. In this The activation of this feature is signaled Exceeding The Programmed Speed case, contact an authorized dealer. by the displaying of the green symbol By fully pressing the accelerator pedal, along with the last speed set. The Speed Temporary Signal Loss the programmed speed can be exceeded Limiter feature can remain active When the devices loses the signal, the even with the device active (e.g. in the concurrently with the Speed Control white symbol without the speed event of overtaking). system. If a speed limit below the one indication illuminates on the display. The device is disabled until the speed indicated in the Speed Control is System Failure selected, the Speed Control speed will be drops below the set limit, after which it lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. This reactivates automatically. If there is a system failure, the amber function remains available in RACE mode. symbol illuminates on the display. 147 SPEED CONTROL (CRUISE have an accident. Do not use Speed Control CONTROL) in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding, Warning! icy, snow-covered or slippery. Speed Control Description
This is an electronically controlled driving Activating Leaving the Speed Control system on when assistance feature that allows the not in use is dangerous. Youcould desired vehicle speed to be maintained, To activate the Speed Control System, accidentally set the system or cause it to go without having to press the accelerator push the on/off button location on the faster than you want. Youcould lose control pedal. This feature can be used at a speed left side of the steering wheel. and have an accident. Always leave the system OFF when you are not using it. above 25 mph (40 km/h) on long stretches of dry, straight roads with few variations (highways). Setting The Desired Speed The speed control buttons are located on To set a desired speed, proceed as the left side of the steering wheel. follows: Note: 1. Turn the Speed Control on. STARTING AND OPERATING To ensure correct operation, the 2. When the vehicle has reached the speed control is designed to deactivate desired speed, push the SET switch up or if more than one function is operated down and release to activate. When the simultaneously. In this case, the system 07146S0001EM accelerator is released, the vehicle will can be reactivated by pushing the on/off Speed Control On/Off Switch maintain the selected speed button and setting the desired automatically. speed. The activation of the system is signaled by the white warning light illuminating It is not recommended to use this on the instrument cluster. feature in city traffic. The Speed Control function can remain While driving downhill, the system could active at the same time as the Speed brake the vehicle to keep the set speed Limiter System. If the set speed is higher the same. than the speed set with the Speed Limiter, the set speed will be lowered to that of the Speed Limiter. Warning! Note: The system cannot be engaged in FIRST or REVERSE gear. It is advisable to Speed Control can be dangerous where the engage it in THIRD gear or higher if using 07146S0002EM system cannot maintain a constant speed. the Autostick feature. SET Switch Location Yourvehicle could go too fast for the 148 conditions, and you could lose control and If needed (when overtaking for instance), Accelerating When Overtaking you can accelerate beyond the set speed Press the accelerator as you would by pressing the accelerator. When you normally. When the pedal is released, the release the pedal, the vehicle will return vehicle will return to the set speed. to the previously set speed. Use Of The Feature On Hilly Routes When traveling downhill with the system active, the vehicle speed may slightly The system can automatically downshift exceed the set one. to keep the set speed when driving on hilly routes. Note: Before pushing the SET switch, the vehicle must be traveling at a constant On steep grades, the loss or gain in speed may be considerable and is advisable to speed on a flat surface. 07146S0003EM deactivate the Speed Control. Resume Button Location Increasing/Decreasing Speed Note: The system keeps the speed set Increasing Speed even uphill and downhill. A slight variation In Autostick (sequential) mode, before resuming the previously set speed, you Once the Speed Control has been in the speed on slight rises is completely normal. should accelerate until you are close to activated, the speed can be increased by that speed. Then, push and release the pushing the SET switch upward. Recalling The Speed RES button. By keeping the switch pushed, the set Once the system has been deactivated, speed will increase until the switch is Deactivating but not canceled, the previously set released. The new speed will then be set. speed can be recalled by pushing the RES Lightly pressing the brake pedal At every movement of the SET switch, button and removing your foot from the deactivates the speed control without the set speed can be adjusted. accelerator. The system will be set to the deleting the set speed. Decreasing Speed last stored speed. The speed control may also be deactivated by applying the electric park When the system is active, to reduce the Note: Before resuming the previously brake or when the braking system is speed, push the SET switch downward. set speed, you must accelerate to a speed close to that speed. operated (e.g. operation of the ESC By keeping the switch pushed, the set system). speed will decrease until the switch is The set speed is deleted in the following released. The new speed will then be set. cases: At every movement of the SET switch, the set speed can be adjusted. Pushing the on/off button a second time. Note: Moving the SET switch allows to The ignition is cycled to STOP. adjust the speed according to the selected unit of measurement set on the If there is a malfunction with the Information and Entertainment System Speed Control. (see dedicated supplement). 149 ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL following circumstances, and it is (ACC) — IF EQUIPPED recommended to turn the system off when: System Description Driving in fog, heavy rain, or snow. The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a driver assist system that combines the Driving in heavy traffic or speed control functions with controlling construction zones. the distance from the vehicle ahead. Driving on icy, snowy, slippery roads, The system allows to set and hold the roads with steep climbs and descents, or vehicle at the desired speed without roads with numerous turns and bends. needing to press the accelerator. It also 06016S0004B Entering a turn lane. allows to set and hold a distance from the Windshield Camera Location vehicle ahead (these settings are set by When circumstances do not allow This system enhances driving comfort the driver). safe driving at a constant speed. while on the highway or out of town with The Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) uses a light traffic. radar sensor located behind the front STARTING AND OPERATING If the sensor does not detect a vehicle bumper and a camera located in the Warning! center/upper part of the windshield, to ahead, the system will maintain a fixed detect the presence of a vehicle close set speed. ahead. If the sensor detects a vehicle ahead, the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) is a system automatically intervenes by convenience system. It is not a substitute braking (or accelerating) slightly in order for active driving involvement. It is always not to exceed the original set speed, so the driver’s responsibility to be attentive of that the vehicle keeps the preset road, traffic, and weather conditions, distance, seeking to adapt to the speed vehicle speed, distance to the vehicle ahead; and, most importantly, brake operation to of the vehicle ahead. ensure safe operation of the vehicle under Note: Adaptive Cruise Control all road conditions. Yourcomplete attention performance is not guaranteed under the is always required while driving to maintain safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. 06016S0003B The ACC system: Front Bumper Radar Location Does not react to pedestrians, oncoming vehicles, and stationary objects (e.g., a stopped vehicle in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). 150 Cannot take street, traffic, and weather Enabling/Activating conditions into account, and may be limited To enable the system, push and release Warning! upon adverse sight distance conditions. the button located on the left side on Does not always fully recognize complex the steering wheel. driving conditions, which can result in wrong Leaving the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) or missing distance warnings. system on when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally set the system or cause it Will bring the vehicle to a complete stop to go faster than you want. Youcould lose while following a target vehicle and hold the control and have a collision. Always leave vehicle for approximately 3 minutes in the the system off when you are not using it. stop position. If the target vehicle does not start moving within 3 minutes the parking brake will be activated, and the ACC system Pausing/Deactivating will be canceled. With the feature enabled (speed not set), Youshould switch off the ACC system: push the button to disable. When driving in fog, heavy rain, heavy With the feature active (speed set), push snow, sleet, heavy traffic, and complex 07146S0010EM On/Off Button the button to pause. The display will driving situations (i.e., in highway show the icon in white with the speed in construction zones). When the system is enabled and ready to brackets. To deactivate the feature, push When entering a turn lane or highway off operate, the display shows the white icon the button a second time. ramp; when driving on roads that are above dashes in place of the speed. winding, icy, snow-covered, slippery, or have Setting The Desired Speed steep uphill or downhill slopes. The speed can be set from a minimum of When circumstances do not allow safe 20 mph (30 km/h) to a maximum of driving at a constant speed. 110 mph (180 km/h). When the vehicle reaches the desired Activation/Deactivation speed, push the SET switch upward or downward and release it to activate the The system has four operating states: system. When the accelerator is released, Enabled (speed not set) the vehicle will maintain the set speed automatically. Activated (speed set) 07146S0016EM Paused Enabled Icons Deactivated Setting a speed activates the system. The display shows the icon in green with the set speed. 151 When the ESC (or ABS or other increments of 5 mph until the switch is stability control systems) are operating released. Then, the new speed will be set. or have just operated. Decreasing Speed When the ESC system is off. Once the system has been activated, you When the Forward Collision Warning can decrease the speed by pushing the system (if equipped) is braking SET switch downward. Each time the automatically. switch is pushed, the speed decreases by 1 mph. In the event of system failure. By pushing and holding the switch When the engine is OFF. downward, the set speed will decrease in 07146S0017EM increments of 5 mph until the switch is SET Switch In case of obstruction of the radar released. Then, the new speed will be set. sensor (in this case the bumper area While the accelerator pedal is pressed, where it is located must be cleaned). Note: the system will not be able to control the distance between the vehicle and the one If the system is set, the conditions Moving the SET switch allows you to
STARTING AND OPERATING ahead. In this case, the speed will be described above also cause a adjust the speed according to the determined only by the position of the cancellation or deactivation of the selected unit of measurement ("US" or accelerator pedal. system. These situations may vary "Metric") set on the Information and The system will return to normal according to the conditions. Entertainment System (see dedicated operation as soon as the accelerator Note: The system will not be deactivated supplement). pedal is released. when speeds higher than those set are When the unit of measurement is set The system cannot be set: reached by pressing the accelerator to Metric, pushing and holding the SET pedal above 110 mph (180 km/h). In When pressing the brake pedal. switch will adjust the speed in 10 km/h these situations, the system may not increments. When the brakes are overheated. work correctly and it is recommended to deactivate it. By keeping the accelerator pedal When the electric park brake has been depressed, the vehicle can continue to operated. To VaryThe Speed Setting accelerate beyond the set speed. In this When either PARK (P), REVERSE (R) or Increasing Speed case, use the SET switch to set the NEUTRAL (N) is engaged. Once the system has been activated, you speed to the vehicle’s current speed. can increase the speed by pushing the When you push the SET button to When the engine rpm is above a SET switch upward. Each time the switch maximum threshold. reduce the speed, the braking system is pushed, the speed increases by 1 mph. intervenes automatically if the engine When the vehicle speed is not within By pushing and holding the switch brake does not slow the vehicle down the operational speed range. upward, the set speed will increase in 152 sufficiently to reach the set speed. The Resuming The Speed Setting The Distance Between Vehicles device holds the set speed uphill and Once the system has been canceled but The distance between your vehicle and downhill; however a slight variation is not deactivated, to resume a previously the vehicle ahead may be set to one bar entirely normal, particularly on slight set speed, simply push the RES button (short), two bars (medium), three bars inclines. and remove your foot from the (long), or four bars (maximum). The transmission could shift to a accelerator to recall it. lower gear when driving downhill, or The system will be set to the last stored when accelerating. This is normal and speed. necessary to maintain the set speed The system will disable while driving if the brakes overheat. Accelerating When Overtaking When driving with ACC activated and following a vehicle, the system will provide an additional acceleration up to 07146S0019EM the ACC set speed to assist in passing the Distance Icons vehicle. This additional acceleration is The distances from the vehicle ahead are triggered when the driver utilizes the left 07146S0018EM proportional to speed. turn signal and will only be active when RES (Resume) Button passing on the left hand side. The interval of time with relation to the Before returning to the previously set vehicle ahead remains constant and The system detects the direction of speed, bring the speed close to that varies from one second (for the short traffic automatically when the vehicle value, then push the RES button and distance one-bar setting) to two seconds passes from left-hand traffic to release it. (for the maximum distance four-bar right-hand traffic. In this case, the setting). overtaking assist function is only active The set distance is shown on the display when the reference vehicle is overtaken Warning! on the right. The additional acceleration by a dedicated icon. is deactivated when the driver uses the The setting is four (maximum) the first right direction indicator and returns to The Resume function should only be used if time the system is used. After the the original lane. traffic and road conditions permit. Resuming distance has been modified by the driver, a set speed that is too high or too low for the new distance will be stored also after prevailing traffic and road conditions could the system is deactivated and cause the vehicle to accelerate or decelerate reactivated. too sharply for safe operation. Failure to follow these warnings can result in a collision and death or serious personal injury. 153 To Decrease The Distance The distance setting is changed. press the accelerator pedal or push the RES button to restart. Push and release the distance button to The Adaptive Cruise Control system is decrease the distance setting. The deactivated/paused. distance setting decreases by one bar Warning! (shorter) every time the button is pushed. Warning! When the ACC system is resumed, the driver must ensure that there are no pedestrians, The maximum breaking applied by the vehicles or objects in the path of the vehicle. system is limited. The driver may apply the Failure to follow these warnings can result in brakes in all cases if needed. a collision and death or serious personal injury. If the system predicts that the braking level is insufficient to hold the set distance, either “BRAKE!” or a dedicated message is Deactivation displayed to warn the driver of approaching the vehicle ahead. An acoustic signal is also The system is deactivated and the set emitted. In this case, it is advised to brake STARTING AND OPERATING 07146S0015EM speed is canceled if: Distance Button immediately as necessary to hold a safe distance from the vehicle ahead. The (on/off) button is pushed (when The set speed is held if there are no the system is on or paused). vehicles ahead. Once the shortest The driver is responsible for ensuring that there are no pedestrians, other vehicles or The ignition is cycled to STOP. distance has been selected, the next push objectives along the direction of the vehicle. The system is canceled (the set speed of the button will set the maximum Failure to comply with these precautions distance. may cause serious accidents and injuries. and distance are stored): If a slower vehicle is detected in the same The driver is fully responsible for holding When the system is paused (Refer to lane, the vehicle icon on the display a safe distance from the vehicle ahead the “Activation / Deactivation” section). illuminates from grey to white. The respecting the highway code in force in the When the conditions shown in the system automatically adjusts the respective country. vehicle’s speed to keep the set distance, “Setting The Desired Speed” section independently of the set speed. occur. “Stop And Go” Function The vehicle holds the set distance until: Limited Operation Warning The “Stop and Go” operating strategy The vehicle ahead accelerates to a allows you to maintain a safe distance If the dedicated message is shown on the speed higher than the set speed. from the vehicle ahead until the vehicle display, a condition limiting the Adaptive The vehicle ahead leaves the lane or has completely stopped. It will also Cruise Control operation may have the detection field of the Adaptive Cruise restart the vehicle automatically if the occurred. Control system sensor. vehicle ahead drives away within two This could be due to an obstruction of the seconds, otherwise it is necessary to vehicle’s sensor or camera. It could also 154 be due to a fault in the system. If an When leaving the curve, the system obstruction is detected, clean the area of resets the previously set speed. the windshield opposite the interior rear view mirror, where the camera is located, as well as the area of the front bumper where the sensor is located. Then check that the message has disappeared. When the conditions limiting the system functions end, normal operation will resume.
Should the fault persist, contact an 07146S0012EM authorized dealer. Lane Change Precautions While Driving 07146S0011EM In this case, sufficient distance from the Steering And Curves The system may not work correctly in vehicle which is changing lanes may not some driving conditions (see below). The Note: be guaranteed. It is advisable to pay the utmost attention at all times and be driver must control the vehicle at all In cases of narrow curves, the times. always ready to apply the brakes if performance of the system could be needed. Vehicle Not Aligned limited. In this case, it is advisable to Small Vehicles The system may not detect a vehicle deactivate the system. Some narrow vehicles (e.g. bicycles and traveling in the same lane, in the same The system only limits the speed motorcycles) traveling near the outer direction, but is not aligned. It also may DURING a bend and not BEFORE it. not detect a vehicle which is cutting in edges of the lane or which enter the lane from a side lane. Sufficient distance from Using The System On Slopes from curb side are not detected until they the vehicles ahead may not be When driving on roads with a variable are fully in the lane. guaranteed in these cases. incline, the system may not detect the The non-aligned vehicle can weave in and presence of a vehicle in the lane. System out of the driving lane causing the vehicle performance could be limited according to brake or accelerate unexpectedly. to speed, load, traffic conditions and steep slopes. Steering And Curves Driving on curves with the system set Lane Change could limit speed and acceleration to The system may not detect the presence guarantee vehicle stability, even if no of a vehicle until it is fully in your lane. vehicles are detected ahead. 155 PARK SENSOR SYSTEM Vehicles With Rear Sensors Only The parking sensors, located in the rear bumper, detect obstacles while the vehicle is in REVERSE. When an obstacle is detected, an acoustic alert will sound and visual indications will be displayed on the instrument cluster.
07146S0013EM 06016V0008EM Small Vehicles Objects And Vehicles Moving In Opposite Or Crosswise Direction Sufficient distance from the vehicles ahead may not be guaranteed in these General Information cases. This vehicle has systems that operate on STARTING AND OPERATING Stationary Objects And Vehicles radio frequency that comply with Part The system cannot detect the presence 15 of the Federal Communications of stationary vehicles or objects. For Commission (FCC) rules and with Industry Canada Standards RSS- example, the system will not operate if 07176S0001B the vehicle ahead leaves the lane and a GEN/210/220/310. Rear Sensor Location vehicle ahead of that one is stationary in Operation is subject to the following two that lane. Pay the utmost attention at all conditions: Engagement/Disengagement times and be always ready to apply the To turn the system off, push the Park brakes if needed. 1. The device may not cause harmful Sensors System button located to the interference. left of the headlight switch. The indicator Objects And Vehicles Moving In light within the button will illuminate Opposite Or Crosswise Direction 2. The device must accept any interference received, including when the system is turned off. Pushing The system cannot detect the presence interference that may cause undesired the button a second time will turn the of objects or vehicles traveling in operation of the device. system back on, and the indicator light opposite or crosswise directions and will turn off. consequently will not activate. Changes or modifications to any of these systems by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use this equipment.
156 The acoustic signal increases in the detected area, in relation to the frequency as the distance between the distance of the object and the position of vehicle and the obstacle decreases. the vehicle. The acoustic signal becomes If the obstacle is detected in the rear continuous when the distance between central area, a single red arc will be the vehicle and the obstacle is less than displayed as the obstacle approaches, 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the first constant, then flashing, in addition distance increases. to an acoustic signal. If the obstacle is detected in the rear left The acoustic signal is constant if the and/or right area, a single red flashing arc distance between the vehicle and the will be shown in the corresponding area 07176S0052EM obstacle is unchanged. Park Sensors System On/Off Switch on the display and the system will emit an Note: If several obstacles are detected acoustic signal, either at frequent The indicator light within the Park by the sensors, only the nearest one is intervals or constantly. Sensors System switch will also be on in considered. case of system failure. If the switch is In general, the vehicle is closer to the pushed with a system failure, the An acoustic signal will not sound if the obstacle when a single red flashing arc is indicator light will flash for vehicle is in PARK. shown on the display and the acoustic signal becomes continuous. approximately five seconds. The light will Indication On Display If several obstacles are detected then stay on constantly. The driver can select the type of warning simultaneously in the rear area, the Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, they would like to be displayed through display will show all of them, regardless the Park Sensors System keeps the last the Information and Entertainment of the area in which they were detected. state when the engine was stopped System. To access the function on the (activated or deactivated) in its memory. main menu, select in the following order: It is not possible to exit from the display screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. System Activation/Deactivation 1. “Settings.” The system, when engaged, is Fault Indication automatically activated by engaging the 2. “Driver Assistance.” Parking sensor faults, if any, will be REVERSE gear. It is deactivated by 3. “ParkSense.” indicated when REVERSE is engaged by a engaging another gear. message on the instrument cluster 4. “Mode.” display. Refer to "Warning Lights And Acoustic Signal Messages" in "Getting To Know Your When REVERSE is engaged and there is 5. “Sound-Display.” Instrument Panel" for further an obstacle behind the vehicle, an Visual Indications information. acoustic signal with variable frequency The system indicates the presence of an will sound. obstacle by displaying a single red arc in
157 Messages On The Display The signals sent by the sensors can be altered by the presence of ultrasonic In case of system failure, a dedicated Caution! message appears on the instrument systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems cluster for about five seconds. of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the vehicle. Cleaning The Sensors: If the display The Parking Sensor system is only a parking aid and it is unable to recognize shows a message requiring the sensors System performance can be influenced by the position of the every obstacle, including small obstacles. to be cleaned, make sure that the outer Parking curbs might be temporarily surface and the underside of the rear sensors. For example, due to a change in detected or not detected at all. Obstacles bumper is free of debris (e.g. snow, mud, the ride setting (caused by wear to the located above or below the sensors will not ice, etc.). Once these areas are clear, shock absorbers or suspension), by be detected when they are in close cycle the ignition to the STOP position. changing tires, overloading the vehicle or proximity Then, return it to ON position. If the operations that require the vehicle to be lowered. The vehicle must be driven slowly when message is still displayed, contact an using the Parking Sensor system in order to authorized dealer. Be sure not to place bumper stickers be able to stop in time when an obstacle is Audio System Not Available: If the or other adhesives over the sensors as detected. It is recommended that the driver looks over his/her shoulder when using the STARTING AND OPERATING this will affect system performance. display shows a message that the audio Parking Sensor system. system is not available, it means that the acoustic signal will be emitted by the instrument panel, and not through the Warning! Vehicles With Front And Rear Sensors vehicles speakers. The parking sensors, located in the front and rear bumpers, detect the presence of Note: Some conditions may influence Drivers must be careful when backing up the performance of the Park Sensors even when using the Parking Sensor system. any obstacles and warn the driver System: Always check carefully behind your vehicle, through an acoustic signal and visual indications will be displayed on the Reduced sensor sensitivity could be and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or instrument cluster. due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or blind spots before backing up. Youare thick paint on the surface of the sensor. responsible for the safety of your The sensors may detect a false surroundings and must continue to pay obstacle (echo interference) due to attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. mechanical interference, for example when washing the vehicle or in extreme weather.
158 The indicator light within the Park 11 inches (30 cm), and stops if the Sensors System switch will also be on in distance increases. case of system failure. If the switch is The acoustic signal is constant if the pushed with a system failure, the distance between the vehicle and the indicator light will flash for obstacle is unchanged. approximately five seconds. The light will then stay on constantly. Note: If the sensors detect several front Note: When the ignition is cycled to ON, and rear obstacles, the closest obstacle the Park Sensors system keeps the last is considered. An intermittent signal will state when the engine was stopped sound if the obstacles are at the same (activated or deactivated) in its memory. distance (front and rear). 07176S0003B Front Sensor Location When the system emits an acoustic System Activation/Deactivation signal, the volume of the Information and When the REVERSE gear is engaged and Entertainment System, if activated, is the system is on, the front and rear automatically lowered. sensors are activated. If the vehicle moves from REVERSE to a forward gear, Indication On Display the rear sensors are deactivated, while The driver can select the type of warning the front sensors remain active until the they would like to be displayed through speed of 9 mph (15 km/h) is exceeded. the Information and Entertainment Note: In certain operating conditions, the System. To access the function on the system could start detecting an obstacle main menu, select in the following order: only after the vehicle has moved slightly 1. “Settings.” (a few inches). 2. “Driver Assistance.” 07176S0001B Acoustic Signal Rear Sensor Location In the presence of an obstacle at the 3. “ParkSense.” Engagement/Disengagement front or the rear of the vehicle, an 4. “Mode.” acoustic signal with variable frequency To turn the system off, push the Park will sound: 5. “Sound-Display.” Sensors System switch located to the left of the headlight switch. The indicator The acoustic signal increases in Visual Indications light within the switch will illuminate frequency as the distance between the The system indicates the presence of an when the system is turned off. Pushing vehicle and the obstacle decreases. obstacle by displaying a single red arc in the switch a second time will turn the The acoustic signal becomes the detected areas, in relation to the system back on, and the indicator light continuous when the distance between distance of the object and the position of will turn off. the vehicle and the obstacle is less than the vehicle. 159 If the obstacle is detected in the front or Cleaning The Front Or Rear Sensors: System performance can be rear central area, a single red arc will be If the display shows a message requiring influenced by the position of the displayed as the obstacle approaches, the sensors to be cleaned, make sure that sensors. For example, due to a change in first constant, then flashing, in addition the outer surface and the underside of the ride setting (caused by wear to the to an acoustic signal. the front and rear bumpers are free of shock absorbers or suspension), by If the obstacle is detected in the front or debris (e.g. snow, mud, ice, etc.). Once changing tires, overloading the vehicle or rear left and/or right area, a single red these areas are clear, cycle the ignition to operations that require the vehicle to be flashing arc will be shown in the STOP.Then, return it to ON mode. If the lowered. message is still displayed, contact an corresponding area on the display and Be sure not to place bumper stickers authorized dealer. the system will emit an acoustic signal, or other adhesives over the sensors as either at frequent intervals or constantly. Audio System Not Available: If the this will affect system performance. If several obstacles are detected display shows a message that the audio simultaneously in the front and rear area, system is not available, it means that the the display will show all of them, acoustic signal will be emitted by the Warning! regardless of the area in which they were instrument panel, and not through the detected. vehicles speakers. STARTING AND OPERATING In general, the vehicle is closer to the Note: Some conditions may influence Drivers must be careful when backing up obstacle when a single or several flashing even when using the Parking Sensor system. the performance of the Park Sensors Always check carefully behind your vehicle, arcs are shown on the display and the System: acoustic signal becomes continuous. and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or It is not possible to exit from the display Reduced sensor sensitivity could be due to the presence of ice, snow, mud, or blind spots before backing up. Youare screen while the vehicle is in REVERSE. responsible for the safety of your thick paint on the surface of the sensor. surroundings and must continue to pay Fault Indication The sensors may detect a false attention while backing up. Failure to do so Parking sensor faults, if any, will be obstacle (echo interference) due to can result in serious injury or death. indicated by a message on the display on mechanical interference, for example the instrument cluster. Refer to "Warning when washing the vehicle or in extreme Lights And Messages" in "Getting To weather. Know YourInstrument Panel" for further information. The signals sent by the sensors can be altered by the presence of ultrasonic Messages On The Display systems (e.g. pneumatic brake systems In case of system failure, a dedicated of trucks or pneumatic drills) near the message appears on the instrument vehicle. cluster for about five seconds.
160 LANE DEPARTURE WARNING Caution! (LDW) SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED Caution! Description The Parking Sensor system is only a The Lane Departure Warning system uses Do not tamper with nor operate on the parking aid and it is unable to recognize a forward looking camera located on the camera. Do not close the openings in the every obstacle, including small obstacles. windshield to detect lane markings and aesthetic cover located under the interior Parking curbs might be temporarily measure vehicle position within the lane rear view mirror. In the event of a failure of detected or not detected at all. Obstacles boundaries. the camera, contact your authorized dealer. located above or below the sensors will not be detected when they are in close When one or both lane limits are The camera may have limited or absent proximity detected and the vehicle passes over one operation due to weather conditions such without an activated turn signal, the as: heavy rain, hail, thick fog, heavy snow, The vehicle must be driven slowly when system emits a visual as well as an formation of ice layers on the windshield. using the Parking Sensor system in order to audible signal. be able to stop in time when an obstacle is Camera operation may also be detected. It is recommended that the driver If the vehicle continues to go beyond the compromised by the presence of dust, looks over his/her shoulder when using the line of the lane without any intervention condensation, dirt or ice on the windshield, Parking Sensor system. from the driver, the surpassed line will by traffic conditions (e.g. vehicles that are light up on the display (left or right) to driving not aligned with yours, vehicle driving in a transverse or opposite way on urge the driver to bring the vehicle back the same lane, bend with a small radius of into the limits of the lane. curvature), by road surface conditions and by driving conditions (e.g. off-road driving). Make sure the windshield is always clean. Use specific detergents and clean cloths to avoid scratching the windshield. The camera operation may also be limited or absent in some driving, traffic and road surface conditions. If the windshield must be replaced due to scratches, chipping or breakage, contact exclusively your authorized dealer. Do not replace the windshield on your own. It is advisable to replace the windshield if it is damaged in the area of the camera.
161 System Activation/Deactivation The road is straight or with wide radius bends. The system is activated/deactivated by pushing the button located on the end of A suitable distance is kept from the the multifunction lever. vehicle in front. The turn signal is not active. Symbols And Messages On The Display The Lane Departure Warning system advises the driver when the vehicle leaves the driving lane by showing 07226S0007EM symbols and messages on the instrument Lane Limits Not Detected cluster display. Exiting A Lane With Detection Of A Single Limit
07226S0001EM When the system is active and only, for
STARTING AND OPERATING Lane Departure Warning System example, the left lane limit has been Activation/Deactivation Button detected, the detected lane illuminates in white on the display; the system is ready to Note: When the engine is started, the provide visual warnings on the display in system maintains the operating mode the event of unintentional exiting of the that was selected when it was turned lane (turn signal not activated) to the left. OFF. Activation Conditions Once turned on, the system becomes 07226S0002EM Vehicle Changing Lanes active only if the following conditions are met: When the system is active and the lane limits have not been detected, the display The vehicle speed is above 37 mph shows a grey vehicle icon with two grey (60 km/h) (the system is deactivated at lines. speeds equal to or greater than 110 mph (180 km/h). The lane limit lines are visible at least 07226S0003EM on one side. Left Lane Limit Detected There are suitable visibility conditions. When the system detects that the vehicle has approached the lane line and is about 162 to pass it, the left line on the display When lane limits are detected, the To access the function, from the main illuminates in yellow. system is ready to provide indications in menu select the following in order: case the driver unintentionally leaves the lane (turn signal not activated). 1. “Settings.” As the Lane Departure Warning system 2. “Safety.” detects the lane limits while the vehicle is in motion, it will adjust the display 3. “Lane Departure Warning.” accordingly (from white to yellow and 4. “Sensitivity.” vice versa, and increase their thickness). Limited Operation Warning If a message appears on the display, a condition limiting the Lane Departure Warning system operation may have 07226S0004EM Left Lane Limit Approached occurred. This could be an obstruction of the camera view, or a fault in the system. The system operates in the same way, If an obstruction is detected, clean the but mirrored, in the event of exiting the area of the windshield by the interior rear right lane when only the right lane limit view mirror. has been detected. Although the vehicle can still be driven in
Exiting A Lane With Detection Of Both 07226S0006EM normal conditions, the system may not Limits Right Lane Limit Approached function properly. When the system is active, both lane lines When the conditions limiting the system If a line is crossed, the driver is alerted by on the display illuminate in white to indicate are corrected, it will go back to normal an audible signal as well as the visual the successful detection of both limits. operation. Should a fault persist, contact indication in the instrument cluster. The your authorized dealer. signal is emitted through the speakers on the side of the lane limit which is being System Failure Warning crossed (eg. if the vehicle is exceeding If the system turns off and the warning the left line of the lane, the audible signal light appears on the display, it means will come from the speakers on the left of that there is a system fault. the vehicle). In this case, it is still possible to drive the Changing The System Settings vehicle, but you are advised to contact The system's sensitivity can be set your authorized dealer as soon as through the Information and possible. Entertainment System. Sensitivity “High” 07226S0005EM or “Low” can be selected. Both Lane Limits Detected 163 REAR BACK-UP CAMERA / DYNAMIC GRIDLINES Warning! Description The Rear Back-Up Camera is located just Drivers must be careful when backing up under the vehicle’s trunk lid, above the even when using the Rear Back-Up Camera. rear license plate. Always check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, obstructions, or blind spots before backing up. Youare responsible for the safety of your
07186S000218 surroundings and must continue to pay Rear Back-Up Camera Display attention while backing up. Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death. Rear Back-Up Camera Features To activate the Rear Back-Up Camera features, select “Settings” from the Main Caution!
STARTING AND OPERATING Menu of the Information and Entertainment System. 07186S0001EM Under “Driver Assistance” the following To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back-Up Rear Back-Up Camera Location features can be selected: Camera should only be used as a parking aid. The Rear Back-Up Camera is unable to When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the View view every obstacle or object in your drive Information and Entertainment System path. display will show the area behind the Camera Delay vehicle, as seen by the Rear Back-Up To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must Camera Guidelines Camera, along with a warning message. be driven slowly when using the Rear Selecting “View” will activate the camera Back-Up Camera to be able to stop in time view on the display. when an obstacle is seen. It is recommended that the driver look frequently over his/her Selecting “Camera Delay” will allow the shoulder when using the Rear Back-Up camera view to remain on the display Camera. shortly after the vehicle is no longer in REVERSE, followed by the previously active screen. Selecting “Camera Guidelines” will activate the display of the dynamic guidelines that indicate the route of the vehicle while in REVERSE. 164 Symbols And Messages On The Display Messages On The Display REFUELING THE VEHICLE Indications On The Display If the trunk lid is lifted, the camera will Refueling The Vehicle not detect any obstacle behind the Through the Information and vehicle. The display will show a dedicated Before refueling, make sure that the fuel Entertainment System settings, by warning message. type is correct. activating the "Camera Guidelines" feature, guidelines can be seen on the Make sure the trunk lid is closed by Also, stop the engine before refueling. rear camera display. If activated, the pushing next to the lock until it clicks. Note: An inefficient catalytic converter guidelines are positioned on the image to Important Notes leads to harmful exhaust emissions, thus highlight the width of the vehicle and the contributing to air pollution. expected reverse path based on the Ice, snow or mud on the surface of the steering wheel position. camera may reduce its sensitivity. It is important to keep the camera surface Caution! A superimposed central line indicates the clean, and free from debris. center of the vehicle to assist in rear parking maneuvers. The various colored When parking, be aware of obstacles Never introduce leaded fuel to the tank, areas indicate the distance from the rear that may be above or under the camera even in small amounts in an emergency, as of the vehicle. range. this would damage the catalytic converter beyond repair. The table below shows the approximate distances for each area: Refueling Capacity
Distance from the rear To ensure that you fill the tank Area of the vehicle completely, top off twice after the first click of the fuel nozzle. 0–11.8 inches Red Further top-off could cause faults in the (0–30 cm) fuel feeding system. 11.8 inches to 3.3 feet Yellow Refueling Procedure (30cm–1m) The fuel filler door is unlocked when the 3.3 feet or more Green central door locking system is unlocked. (1mormore) It is automatically locked when the central locking system is applied. Opening The Fuel Filler Door To refuel proceed as follows: 1. Open fuel filler door by pressing on the point shown by the arrow. 165 2. Open the cap, and pull the cord inside to unlock the fuel filler door. 3. Open the fuel filler door by pressing on it (see the previous instructions).
Warning!
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the vehicle when the fuel door is open 07206S0001EM 07206S0002EM or the tank is being filled. Fuel Door Fuel Door Label Never add fuel when the engine is running. 2. Remove the fuel filler cap. Emergency Fuel Door Opening This is in violation of most state and federal In the event of an emergency the fuel fire regulations and may cause the MIL to 3. Insert the fuel nozzle fully into the turn on. filler pipe. filler door can be opened by operating STARTING AND OPERATING from inside the trunk. A fire may result if gasoline is pumped 4. When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts Proceed as follows: into a portable container that is inside of a off, before removing the nozzle, wait for vehicle. Youcould be burned. Always place at least 10 seconds in order for the fuel 1. Open the trunk and locate the gas containers on the ground while filling. to flow inside the tank. emergency fuel filler release cap on the inside lining. 5. Remove the fuel filler nozzle, tighten Note: If the filler compartment is the gas cap about ¼ turn until you hear washed with a pressure washer, keep it at one click. This is an indication that cap is a distance of at least 8 inches (20 cm). properly tightened. The label indicates the fuel type (UNLEADED FUEL = gasoline).
0405147778US Fuel Door Release Cap
166 VEHICLE LOADING Payload Rim Size Certification Label The payload of a vehicle is defined as the This is the rim size that is appropriate for As required by National Highway Traffic allowable load weight a truck can carry, the tire size listed. including the weight of the driver, all Safety Administration regulations, your Inflation Pressure vehicle has a certification label affixed to passengers, options and cargo. the driver's side door or pillar. Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) This is the cold tire inflation pressure for This label contains the month and year of your vehicle for all loading conditions up manufacture, Gross Vehicle Weight The GAWR is the maximum permissible to full GAWR. load on the front and rear axles. The load Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating Curb Weight (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle must be distributed in the cargo area so Identification Number (VIN). A that the GAWR of each axle is not The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is exceeded. the total weight of the vehicle with all included on this label and indicates the Each axle GAWR is determined by the fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full Month, Day and Hour of manufacture. The components in the system with the capacity conditions, and with no bar code that appears on the bottom of lowest load carrying capacity (axle, occupants or cargo loaded into the the label is your VIN. springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or vehicle. The front and rear curb weight suspension components sometimes values are determined by weighing your Gross Vehicle Weight Rating specified by purchasers for increased vehicle on a commercial scale before any (GVWR) durability does not necessarily increase occupants or cargo are added. the vehicle's GVWR. The GVWR is the total permissible Loading weight of your vehicle including driver, Tire Size passengers, vehicle, options and cargo. The actual total weight and the weight of The label also specifies maximum The tire size on the Vehicle Certification the front and rear of your vehicle at the capacities of front and rear axle systems Label represents the actual tire size on ground can best be determined by (GAWR). Total load must be limited so your vehicle. Replacement tires must be weighing it when it is loaded and ready GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not equal to the load capacity of this tire size. for operation. exceeded.
167 The entire vehicle should first be weighed TRAILER TOWING SUGGESTIONS FOR DRIVING on a commercial scale to insure that the Trailer towing is not recommended for Saving Fuel GVWR has not been exceeded. The this vehicle. weight on the front and rear of the Below are some suggestions which may vehicle should then be determined help you save fuel and lower the amount separately to be sure that the load is of harmful emissions released into the properly distributed over the front and atmosphere. rear axle. Weighing the vehicle may show Vehicle Maintenance that the GAWR of either the front or rear Checks and operations should be carried axles has been exceeded but the total out in accordance with the Maintenance load is within the specified GVWR. If so, Plan. Refer to "Scheduled Servicing" in weight must be shifted from front to rear "Servicing And Maintenance" for further or rear to front as appropriate until the information. specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier items down low and be Tires sure that the weight is distributed Check the tire pressures at least once
STARTING AND OPERATING equally. Stow all loose items securely every four weeks: if the pressure is too before driving. low, consumption levels increase as Improper weight distributions can have resistance to rolling is higher. an adverse effect on the way your vehicle Unnecessary Loads steers and handles and the way the brakes operate. Do not travel with an overloaded trunk. The weight of the vehicle and its arrangement greatly affect fuel Caution! consumption and stability. Electric Devices Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the Use electrical systems only for the GVWR or the maximum front and rear amount of time needed. The rear window GAWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can defroster, additional headlights, break, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to lose control. windshield wipers and heater blower fan Also overloading can shorten the life of your require a considerable amount of energy; vehicle. increasing the current uptake increases fuel consumption (by up to +25% when city driving).
168 Climate Control System Max. Speed Transporting Passengers Using the climate control system will Fuel consumption considerably increases increase consumption: use standard as speed increases. Maintain a constant Warning! ventilation when the temperature speed, avoiding unnecessary braking and outside permits. acceleration, which cost in terms of both fuel consumption and emissions. It is extremely dangerous to leave Devices for Aerodynamic Control children in a parked vehicle when the The use of non-certified devices for Acceleration temperature outside is very high. The heat aerodynamic control may adversely Accelerating violently severely affects inside the passenger compartment may affect air drag and consumption levels. consumption and emissions: acceleration have serious, or even fatal, consequences. should be gradual and should not exceed Driving Style Never travel in the trunk of the vehicle. In the maximum torque. the event of an accident, anyone inside the Starting Conditions Of Use trunk would be at greater risk of serious or Do not warm up the engine at low or high even fatal injury. revs when the vehicle is stationary; this Cold Starting Ensure that all the occupants of the causes the engine to warm up more Short trips and frequent cold starts will vehicle wear their seat belts correctly and slowly, thereby increasing fuel not allow the engine to reach optimum that any children are positioned correctly on consumption and emissions. It is operating temperature. This results in a the dedicated child restraint systems. therefore advisable to drive off significant increase in consumption immediately, slowly, avoiding high levels (from +15 to +30% in city driving) Transporting Animals speeds: by doing this the engine will and emissions. The intervention of the airbags may be warm up more quickly. Traffic And Road Conditions dangerous for an animal on the front Unnecessary Actions High fuel consumption is caused by heavy seat. It is therefore advised to arrange Avoid revving up when starting at traffic traffic, for instance when travelling in animals on the rear seat inside dedicated lights or before stopping the engine. This traffic with frequent use of low gears or cages restrained by the vehicle’s seat action is unnecessary and causes in cities with many traffic lights. Winding belts. increased fuel consumption and mountain roads and rough road surfaces Keep in mind that, in the event of a pollution. also adversely affect consumption. sudden braking or an accident, an inadequately restrained animal may be Gear Selection Stops In Traffic projected within the passenger Use a high gear when traffic and road During prolonged stops (e.g. railway compartment, risking injury to the animal conditions allow it. Using a low gear for crossings) turn off the engine. itself and the other occupants of the faster acceleration will increase fuel vehicle. consumption. Improper use of a high gear increases consumption, emissions and engine wear. 169 Exhaust Gas Should it be necessary to stay in the areas checked to identify any stationary vehicle with engine running, components which are broken, damaged, Exhaust emissions are very dangerous, adjust the ventilation/heating system worn or have moved from their correct and may be lethal. They contain carbon and operate the fan in such a way that fitting position. If any of these things monoxide, a colorless, odorless gas which outside air will enter the passenger occur, contact your authorized dealer. can cause fainting and poisoning if compartment. Activate the maximum fan inhaled. Open welding or loose connections may speed. permit exhaust gas to enter the To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, take passenger compartment. the following measures: Maintenance of the exhaust system provides the best protection against Check the exhaust system each time the Do not keep the engine running in leaks of carbon monoxide into the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil closed spaces. passenger compartment. change operations. Replace the If, for some reason (e.g. transporting Should an unusual noise from the exhaust components if necessary, contact your bulky loads), it is necessary to drive with system or the presence of exhaust gas in authorized dealer. the trunk open, close all the windows and the passenger compartment be run the climate control fan at maximum identified, or if the underbody or rear speed. DO NOT activate air recirculation section of the vehicle is damaged, have STARTING AND OPERATING mode. the entire exhaust system and bodywork
170 IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
Have a flat tire or a burnt-out bulb? HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS .....172 At times, a problem such as these may BULB REPLACEMENT ...... 172 interfere with your driving experience. FUSES ...... 177 JUMP STARTING ...... 183 The section on emergencies can help you REFUELING IN EMERGENCY .....185 to deal with critical situations ENGINE OVERHEATING ...... 185 independently. TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . .186 In an emergency, we recommend that you TOW EYES ...... 188 call the phone number found in the ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE Warranty Book. SYSTEM (EARS) ...... 189 Youmay also consider contacting an EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) . . .189 authorized dealer.
171 HAZARD WARNING LIGHTS When you must leave the vehicle to seek BULB REPLACEMENT assistance, the hazard warning flashers The Hazard Warning switch is located in will continue to operate even though the General Instructions the switch bank below the radio screen. ignition is cycled to OFF. Before replacing a bulb, check the Push the switch once to contacts for oxidation. turn the hazard warning flashers on. When the Replace blown bulbs with others of the switch is activated, all same type and power. directional turn signals After replacing a headlight bulb, will flash on and off to always check its alignment. warn oncoming traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a When a light is not working, check that second time to turn the hazard warning the corresponding fuse is intact before flashers off. changing the bulb. For the location of This is an emergency warning system and fuses, refer to “Fuses” in this chapter. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY it should not be used when the vehicle is 08016S0001EM1 Note: In some particular climate in motion. Use it when your vehicle is Hazard Warning Switch conditions, such as low temperature, disabled and is creating a safety hazard humidity, or after washing the car, a thin for other motorists. condensation layer may form on the Caution! internal surfaces of the front and rear headlights. This condensation will Prolonged use of the hazard warning disappear after switching on the flashers may discharge the vehicle’s battery. headlights.
172 Types Of Bulbs
The vehicle may be equipped with the following bulbs
Glass Bulbs (Type A): They are press-fitted. Pull to extract.
Bayonet-Type Bulbs (Type B): To remove them from their holder, press the bulb and turn it counterclockwise, then extract it.
Tubular Bulbs (Type C): Release them from their contacts to remove.
Halogen Bulbs (Type D): To remove the bulb, turn the connector to the side and pull it out.
Halogen Bulbs (Type E): To remove the bulb, turn it counterclockwise.
Xenon Gas Discharge Bulb (Type F): to remove the bulb, contact an authorized dealer.
173 Replacement Bulbs
Light bulbs Type Power Front direction indicators PY24W 24 W Rear Fog lights H11 55 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D5S 25 W Main beam headlights (Xenon gas discharge) D3S 35 W Sun visor light 1.5CP 2.1 W Glove compartment light W5W 4 W Trunk lid light W5W 5 W IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Puddle lights (under door panel) W5W 5 W
174 Replacing Exterior Bulbs 3. Turn the bulb/connector assembly counterclockwise, and then slide it off Note: Only replace the bulb when the Caution! engine is off. Also ensure that the engine the headlight body. is cold, to prevent the risk of burns. Do not touch the new bulb with your fingers. Direction Indicators Oil contamination will severely shorten bulb To change the bulb of these lights, life. If the bulb comes in contact with any oily proceed as follows: surface, clean the bulb with rubbing alcohol. 1. Operating inside the engine compartment, remove the protective Replacing Interior Bulbs cover. Courtesy Mirror Light To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:
08026S0007EM 1. Lift the mirror cover and remove the Bulb/Connector lens, using a suitable tool. 4. Remove the bulb by sliding it off the bulb holder. 5. Install the new bulb, making sure it is correctly inserted in the bulb holder.
08026S0023EM 6. Insert the bulb/connector assembly in Protective Cover Location the housing on the headlight body and turn it clockwise, making sure that it is 2. Remove protective cover. locked correctly. 7. Install the protective cover. 08026S0008EM Front Light Cluster with Main Beam Sun Visor Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights 1 — Mirror Cover To replace the bulbs of the main beam 2 — Lens headlights, contact your authorized dealer. 2. Change the bulb, releasing it from the side contacts, then insert the new bulb, making sure that it is correctly fastened 08026S0006EM between the contacts. Protective Cover 175 3. Install the lens, inserting it firstly on 4. Install bulb, making sure that it is one side and then pressing on the other correctly inserted fully. side until it clicks into place. 5. Close the protective cover on the lens. Glove Compartment Light 6. Install courtesy light, inserting it first To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: on one side and then pressing on the 1. Open the glove compartment. other side until it clicks into place. 2. Remove the courtesy light assembly, Luggage Compartment Courtesy Lights using a suitable tool. To replace the bulbs, proceed as follows:
1. Open the trunk, and remove the trunk 08026S0011EM lamp assembly using a suitable tool. Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 5. Install trunk lamp in the correct position, inserting it firstly on one side, and then pressing on the other side until 08026S0009EM it clicks into place. Courtesy Lamp Indent Puddle Lights On Door Panel 3. Open protective cover up and remove To replace the bulb, proceed as follows: the bulb pulling out of the connector. 08026S0010EM Ceiling Light Indent 1. Open the door and remove the puddle 2. Open protective cover up and remove light assembly, using a suitable tool. the bulb pulling out of the connector.
08026S0011EM Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 176 FUSES General Information The fuses protect electrical systems against excessive current. When a device does not work, you must check the electrical circuit inside of the fuse for a break/melt. Also, please be aware that using power outlets for extended periods of time with
08026S0012EM the engine off may result in vehicle 08036S0002EM Puddle Light Indent battery discharge. J-CASE Fuse 2. Open protective cover up and remove 1 1 — Electrical Circuit the bulb pulling out of the connector. 2 — Case Fuse With Good Electrical Cir- cuit 2 3 — Case Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- cuit
3
0726067916 Blade Fuses
08026S0011EM 1 — Electrical Circuit Cover And Bulb Removal Direction 2 — Blade Fuse With Good Electrical Circuit 3. Install bulb, making sure that it is correctly inserted fully. 3 — Blade Fuse With Bad Electrical Cir- cuit 4. Close the protective cover on the lens. 5. Install puddle light in the correct position, inserting it firstly on one side and then pressing on the other side until it clicks into place. 177 Fuse Extracting Pliers To replace a fuse, use the pliers hooked Warning! to the fuse box.
When replacing a blown fuse, always use an appropriate replacement fuse with the same amp rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other material. Do not place a fuse inside a circuit breaker cavity
08036S0005EM or vice versa. Failure to use proper fuses Fuse Extracting Pliers may result in serious personal injury, fire and/or property damage. 1 — MINI fuse Before replacing a fuse, make sure that 08036S0053EM 2 — J-CASE fuse IN CASE OF EMERGENCY Fuse Box the ignition is off and that all the other services are switched off and/or Grab the pliers from the upper tabs, After use, return the pliers to their proper disengaged. press them, and extract the pliers pulling position by following the below If the replaced fuse blows again, contact upwards. procedures: an authorized dealer. The pliers have two different ends, both If a general protection fuse for safety of which are specifically designed to Grasp the pliers from the upper tabs and insert them into their housing. systems (air bag system, braking system), remove the different types of fuses power unit systems (engine system, present in the vehicle: Push downward on the pliers into their transmission system) or steering system housing until they click into place. blows, contact an authorized dealer.
178 Fuse Location 2. Unscrewing the two hooks, remove Luggage Compartment Fuse Box the panel pulling downward. The fuses, which can be replaced by the To access the fuses, proceed as follows: user, are grouped in two boxes below the passenger side foot board and inside the 1. Lift the luggage compartment cover. trunk. 2. Remove the control unit cover. Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard To access the fuses, proceed as follows: 1. Lift the upper end of the footboard on the passenger side, pulling to release the two buttons. 08036S0011EM Release Hooks On Footboard
2 — Panel 08036S0014EM Control Unit The fuses are freely accessible on the control unit. The fuses are freely accessible on the After replacing the fuse, make sure that control unit. panel and footboard are correctly locked. The number identifying the electrical component corresponding to each fuse is shown on the cover. 08036S0010EM After replacing a fuse, make sure that Release Buttons On Footboard you have closed cover correctly.
1 — Footboard
179 Control Unit Under Passenger Side Footboard IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
08036S0013EM Passenger Side Control Unit
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Front power window (driver side) F33 25 Front power window (passenger side) F34 25 Supply for Information and Entertainment system, Climate Control F36 15 system, Alarm, Power door mirror folding, EOBD system, USB port Safe Lock device (driver side door unlock – if equipped), Doors F38 20 unlock, Central lock Windshield washer pump F43 20 180 FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Rear left power window F47 25 Rear right power window F48 25 Heater rear window coil F94 15
181 Luggage Compartment Fuse Box IN CASE OF EMERGENCY
08036S0015EM Luggage Compartment Control Unit
FUNCTION FUSE AMPERAGE Tow hook module (TTM) F1 40 Hi-Fi system F8 30 KL15/a USB Recharge (C070) F17 7.5 I-Drive / USB / AUX port F21 10 KL15/a 12V Power outlet (R053) F22 20
182 JUMP STARTING Remote Battery Connection Posts If your vehicle has a discharged battery, it The remote posts of the battery for jump can be jump started using a set of jumper starting can be found inside the engine cables and a battery in another vehicle, or compartment. The battery itself is by using a portable battery booster pack. located in the luggage compartment. Jump starting can be dangerous if done The negative terminal (-) is positioned improperly, so please follow the next to the passenger side hood lock. procedures in this section carefully. Note: When using a portable battery booster pack, follow the manufacturer's operating instructions and precautions. 08076S0007EM Protective Flap Warning!
Do not attempt jump starting if the battery is frozen. It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury. 08076S0006EM Remote Negative Post Location Caution!
Warning! Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any other booster source with a system voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to 08076S000118 Do not connect the jumper cable to the the battery, starter motor, alternator or Remote Positive Post Location negative (-) post of the discharged battery. electrical system may occur. The resulting electrical spark could cause To carry out the operation, you need to the battery to explode and could result in have the correct cables to connect to the serious injury. Only use the specific ground battery of another vehicle or a portable point, do not use any other exposed metal battery booster pack to the remote posts parts. of the discharged battery. Usually, these cables have terminals at the ends and are The positive post (+) can be accessed by identified by different sheath colors removing the cover, and opening the (red = positive, black = negative). protective flap. 183 Jump Starting Warning! Warning! Warning!
Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as Do not connect the jumper cable to the Failure to follow this jump starting this could establish a ground connection and negative (-) post of the discharged battery. procedure could result in personal injury or personal injury could result. The resulting electrical spark could cause property damage due to battery explosion. the battery to explode and could result in serious injury. Only use the specific ground Cable Connection point, do not use any other exposed metal Caution! Proceed as follows to perform a jump parts. starting procedure: 1. Connect the positive (+) end of the 5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has Failure to follow these procedures could the booster battery, let the engine idle a result in damage to the charging system of jumper cable to the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the discharged battery. few minutes, and then start the engine in IN CASE OF EMERGENCY the booster vehicle or the discharged vehicle. the vehicle with the discharged battery. If 2. Connect the opposite end of the using a portable battery booster pack, positive (+) jumper cable to the positive before starting the vehicle, wait a few Preparation For Jump Starting: (+) post of the booster battery. seconds after completing the connection. 1. Firmly apply the park brake, and cycle 3. Connect the negative end (-) of the Cable Disconnection the ignition to OFF. jumper cable to the negative (-) post of Once the engine is started, remove the the booster battery. 2. Turn off all electrical features in the connection cables in reverse sequence, vehicle. 4. Connect the opposite end of the as described below: negative (-) jumper cable to the remote 1. Disconnect the negative (-) jumper 3. If using another vehicle to jump start negative (-) post of the discharged cable from the remote negative (-) post the battery, park the vehicle within the vehicle. jumper cables reach, apply the park brake of the discharged vehicle. and make sure the ignition is OFF. 2. Disconnect the negative end (-) of the jumper cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.
184 3. Disconnect the opposite end of the REFUELING IN EMERGENCY ENGINE OVERHEATING positive (+) jumper cable from the Refueling in an emergency is described in positive (+) post of the booster battery. Engine overheating may occur in "Refueling The Vehicle" in "Starting And situations of extreme environmental 4. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the Operating". temperatures, frequent engine jumper cable from the positive (+) post of stops/starts, or driving in heavy traffic. If the vehicle with the discharged battery. the engine becomes overheated, the If frequent jump starting is required to Engine TemperatureWarning Light in the start your vehicle, you should have the instrument cluster will illuminate along battery and charging system inspected at with a dedicated message. Refer to your authorized dealer. "Warning Lights And Messages" in the "Getting To Know YourInstrument Panel" for more information. Caution! In any of the following situations, you can reduce the potential for overheating by Accessories plugged into the vehicle power taking the appropriate action. outlets draw power from the vehicle’s On the highways — slow down. battery, even when not in use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long In city traffic — while stopped, place enough without engine operation, the the transmission in NEUTRAL, but do not vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently increase engine idle speed. to degrade battery life and/or prevent the engine from starting. Note: There are steps that you can take to slow down an impending overheat condition: Bump Starting If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn Never jump start the engine by pushing, it off. The A/C system adds heat to the towing or coasting downhill. engine cooling system and turning the Note: Youcannot start a vehicle with an A/C off can help remove this heat. automatic transmission by pushing it. Youcan also turn the temperature control to maximum heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control to high. This allows the heater core to act as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat from the engine cooling system. 185 If Neither Coolant Nor Steam Is TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE Escaping Warning! This section describes procedures for Open the hood and idle the engine until it towing a disabled vehicle using a cools. commercial towing service. Youor others can be badly burned by hot engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from Note: your radiator. If you see or hear steam If the cooling fan does not operate Caution! coming from under the hood, do not open the while the engine is running, the engine hood until the radiator has had time to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure temperature will increase. Stop the engine and contact an authorized dealer. The vehicle should be transported with all cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is four wheels OFF the ground on the flatbed hot. If the engine continues to overheat or of a roadside assistance vehicle. Avoid frequently overheats, have the cooling towing with only the front (or rear) wheels system inspected. The engine could be lifted. When towing with only the front (or Caution! seriously damaged unless repairs are rear) wheels lifted, in addition to damaging the body, it could damage the transmission. IN CASE OF EMERGENCY made. Contact an authorized dealer. Do not use sling-type equipment when Driving with a hot cooling system could towing. Vehicle damage may occur. damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle When securing the vehicle to a flatbed the vehicle with the air conditioner turned truck, do not attach to front or rear off until the pointer drops back into the suspension components. Damage to your normal range. If the pointer remains on the vehicle may result from improper towing. “H”, turn the engine off immediately, and call for service. Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is released, and remain released, while being towed. If Steam Is Coming From The Engine Compartment Damage from improper towing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited Do not go near the front of the vehicle. Warranty. Stop the engine. Wait until the steam dissipates. Then, open the hood and start the engine. The operators of the assistance vehicle must be informed with regard to the vehicle's minimum height from ground in order to avoid contact between the ends of the bumpers with the equipment of the breakdown truck.
186 The following image illustrates the front Rear Wheel Drive (RWD) Models All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models and rear attachment corners of the It is recommended to tow the vehicle It is recommended to tow the vehicle vehicle, to be taken into consideration with all four wheels OFF the ground on with all four wheels OFF the ground on when loading the vehicle on the the flatbed of a roadside assistance the flatbed of a roadside assistance assistance vehicle. vehicle. vehicle.
Caution! Caution!
Do not use sling type equipment when DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to towing. Vehicle damage may occur. the drivetrain will result. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed DO NOT dolly tow this vehicle. Use of a truck, do not attach to front or rear towing dolly can cause significant damage suspension components. Damage to your to your vehicle. vehicle may result from improper towing. Towing this vehicle in violation of the above 08126S0001EM requirements can cause severe transmission Front And Rear Loading Angles Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is damage. Damage from improper towing is released, and remains released, while being not covered under the New Vehicle Limited towed. Warranty. RWD AWD Models Models If an assistance vehicle with a flatbed is not available, the vehicle must be towed A — Front 12.880° 15.160° with the rear wheels lifted from the Loading Angle ground using a trailer or special B — Rear equipment allowing lifting of the rear 17.105° 18.400° Loading Angle wheels.
187 TOW EYES If the vehicle has been in an accident or has broken down, a tow eye is provided in the tools container located inside the luggage compartment for vehicle towing. There are two locations on the front bumper available for Tow Eye installation, and one in the rear on the passenger side. Towing is meant only for short distances on a paved road surface. Proceed as follows to use the tow eye: 08136S0003EM 08136S0002EM Rear Tow Eye Cap Location Work Angle Of Tow Cable 1. Unhook the cap on the front (left or right side) or rear bumper, pushing on the 2. Remove the tow eye from its housing in the trunk and carefully clean the
IN CASE OF EMERGENCY upper part. threaded housing on the vehicle before Warning! using it.
3. Tighten the vehicle's tow eye in place Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow (about 11 turns). eyes. Note: The largest work angle of a tow Do not use a chain with a tow eye. Chains cable to fix on the tow hook must not may break, causing serious injury or death. exceed 15°. Do not use a tow strap with a tow eye. Tow straps may break or become disengaged, causing serious injury or death. Failure to follow proper tow eye usage 08136S0001B may cause components to break resulting in Front Tow Eye Cap Locations serious injury or death.
188 ENHANCED ACCIDENT EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR) Caution! RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS) This vehicle is equipped with an Event This vehicle is equipped with an Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose Enhanced Accident Response System. of an EDR is to record data that will The tow eye must be used exclusively for Please refer to “Occupant Restraint assist in understanding how a vehicle’s roadside assistance operations. Only use systems performed under certain crash the tow eye with an appropriate device in Systems” in “Safety” for further accordance with the highway code (a rigid information on the Enhanced Accident or near crash-like situations, such as an bar or rope) to flat tow the vehicle for a Response System (EARS) function. air bag deployment or hitting a road short distance to the nearest service obstacle. location. Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Tow eyes MUST NOT be used to tow Systems” in “Safety” for further vehicles off the road or where there are information on the Event Data Recorder obstacles. (EDR). In compliance with the above conditions, towing with a tow eye must take place with two vehicles (one towing, the other towed) aligned as much as possible along the same center line. Damage to your vehicle may occur if these guidelines are not followed. When towing, only use a facility that can tow vehicles with low ground clearances as extensive damage can result by using a standard tow truck platform.
189 This page is intentionally left blank
190 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
Correct servicing permits the SCHEDULED SERVICING ...... 192 performance of the vehicle to be ENGINE COMPARTMENT ...... 196 maintained over time, as well as limited BATTERY RECHARGING ...... 199 running costs and safeguarding the DEALER SERVICE ...... 200 efficiency of the safety systems. RAISING THE VEHICLE ...... 206 This chapter explains how. TIRES ...... 206 DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES .222 STORING THE VEHICLE ...... 223 BODYWORK...... 224 INTERIORS ...... 226
191 SCHEDULED SERVICING Periodic Checks Intheeventofalongperiodof inactivity. Correct servicing is crucial for Every month or every 600 miles guaranteeing a long life for the vehicle ( 1,000 km) or before long trips check The following checks must be carried out under the best conditions. and, if necessary, top off: more often than indicated in the For this reason, Alfa Romeo has planned Scheduled Servicing Plan: Engine coolant level. a series of checks and services for your Check cleanliness of hood and trunk vehicle at fixed intervals based on Brake fluid level (if insufficient, see an locks, cleanliness and lubrication of distance and time, as described in the authorized dealer as soon as possible). linkage. Scheduled Servicing Plan. Windshield washer fluid level. Before each service, it is always Visually inspect conditions of: engine, necessary to carefully follow the Tire inflation pressure and condition. transmission, pipes and hoses instructions in the Scheduled Servicing (exhaust/fuel system/brakes) and rubber Operation of lighting system elements (sleeves/bushes, etc.). Plan (e.g. periodically check level of (headlights, direction indicators, hazard fluids, tire pressure, etc.). warning lights, etc.). Check battery charge and battery fluid Scheduled Servicing is offered by an level (electrolyte). authorized dealer according to a set time Operation of windshield Visually inspect conditions of the schedule. If, during each operation, in washing/wiping system and accessory drive belts. addition to the ones scheduled, the need positioning/wear of wiper blades.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE arises for further replacements or Every 2,000 miles ( 3,000 km), check and Check and, if necessary, change engine repairs, these may be carried out with the top off if required: oil and replace oil filter. owner’s explicit consent only. Engine oil level. Check and, if necessary, replace cabin Note: Scheduled Servicing intervals are air filter. required by the Manufacturer. Failure to Heavy Usage Of The Vehicle have them carried out may invalidate the Check and, if necessary, replace air If the vehicle is used under one of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. cleaner. following conditions: Youare advised to inform your Severe Duty All Models authorized dealer of any small operating Dusty roads. Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles irregularities without waiting for the next Short, repeated journeys less than (6,500 km) if the vehicle is operated in a service. 4 miles (7-8 km) at sub-zero outside dusty and off-road environment or is temperatures. operated predominately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s. This type of Engine often idling or driving long vehicle use is considered Severe Duty. distances at low speeds or long periods of inactivity.
192 Maintenance Plan (2.0 T4 MAir Engine) 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150
Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240
Check battery charge status with the proper instrument ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check tire condition/wear and adjust pressure, if necessary. ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check the tire repair kit recharge condition and expire date Check operation of lighting system (headlights, direction indicators, hazard warning lights, trunk lid, passenger ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● compartment, glove compartment, instrument panel warning lights, etc.) Check and, if necessary, top up fluid levels (1) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Check engine control system operation (via diagnostic tool) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● and, if equipped, engine oil degradation (2) Visually inspect conditions of: exterior bodywork, underbody protection, pipes and hoses (exhaust, fuel system, brakes), ●●●●●●● rubber elements (sleeves, bushes, etc.) Check position/wear of front windshield wiper blade ●●●●●●●● Check operation of the windshield wiper/washer system and ●●●●●●●● adjust nozzles, if necessary
(1) Top up using the fluids indicated in the “Fluids And Lubricants” section of the “Technical Specifications” chapter only after checking that the system is intact. (2) If oil degradation ratio (data collectable from diagnostic device) is more than 80% (oil quality less than 20%) engine oil and filter replacement is recommended.
193 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150
Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240
Check cleanliness of hood and luggage compartment locks, ●●●●●●● cleanliness and lubrication of linkage Visually inspect conditions and wear of front/rear disc brake ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● pads and operation of pad wear indicators Visually inspect the condition and tensioning of the ●●● ●●● ●●● ●●● accessory drive belt(s) Change engine coolant ●
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Change engine oil and replace oil filter (3) Replace transfer case oil (AWD models only) ● Replace accessory drive belt/s (4) Replace air cleaner cartridge (5) ●●●●● Replace the additional fuel filter (if equipped) ●●●●●●●●●●●●●●● Change the brake fluid (6)
(3) The actual interval for changing engine oil and replacing the engine oil filter depends on the vehicle usage conditions and is signaled by the warning light or message in the instrument panel. In all cases, never exceed 1 year/10,000 miles. (4) Areas that are not dusty: recommended maximum mileage 36,000 miles (60,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 4 years. Dusty areas and/or demanding use of the vehicle (cold climates, town use, long periods of idling): advised maximum mileage 18,000 miles (30,000 km). Regardless of the mileage, the belt must be replaced every 2 years. (5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). (6) The brake fluid replacement has to be done every two years, irrespective of the mileage. 194 10 30 50 60 70 80 90 Thousands of miles 20 40 100 110 120 130 140 150
Years 123456789101112131415 16 48 80 96 32 64 112 128 144 160 Thousands of kilometers 176 192 208 224 240
Replace the passenger compartment cleaner (5) o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o ● o Spark plug replacement * ●●
(5) If the vehicle is used in dusty areas, this cleaner must be replaced every 10,000 miles (16,000 km). *The spark plug change interval is mileage-based only. Yearlyintervals do not apply. (o) Recommended operations (●) Mandatory operations
Warning!
Youcan be badly injured working on or around a motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If you have any doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic. Failure to properly inspect and maintain your vehicle could result in a component malfunction and effect vehicle handling and performance. This could cause an accident.
195 ENGINE COMPARTMENT Checking Levels 2.0 T4 MAir engine SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
09026S0002EM 1 – Engine Oil Filler Cap 4 –Windshield/Headlights Washer Fluid Reservoir Cap 2 – Brake Fluid Reservoir Access Cover 5 – Intercooler Coolant Reservoir Cap 3 – Engine Coolant Reservoir Cap
196 Engine Oil The engine oil level can be seen on the Caution! Warning! instrument cluster display every time the engine is started, or on the Information and Entertainment system display by The oil level is not refreshed immediately on If the engine oil is being topped up, wait for activating on the main menu (MENU the display after topping off. Consequently, the engine to cool down before loosening the button) the following functions in wait for the oil level to be refreshed on the filler cap, particularly for vehicles with sequence: “Apps”; “My Car” and “Oil display and follow the procedure below. aluminium cap (if equipped). WARNING: risk Level”. of burns! Check on the display using the 6 notches Note: Always reinstall the oil cap and tighten to proper torque whenever it is that the oil level is between the MIN and Caution! MAX level: 1 notch MIN level, 6 notches removed to add oil to engine. Never run MAX level. the engine with cap removed this could If the oil level is close to or below the MIN cause oil to leak from engine. The oil level must never exceed the MAX mark, add oil gradually through the filler, Top-Up And Oil Level Indication Update mark. (refer to “Top-Up And Oil Level Indication On Display If the MAX mark is exceeded MAX (last Update On Display” in this section) If a engine oil top-off is needed, in order notch on the right turns red) after the fill-up, considering that each notch shown on the to ensure the correct indication of the oil go to your authorized dealer as soon as display corresponds to approximately level on the display, leave the vehicle on possible to have the oil in excess removed. 8.8floz(250ml). flat ground with the engine running for Do not add oil with specifications approximately 5 minutes (temperature different from those of the oil already in the Caution! higher than 176°F (80°C)) and shut the engine. engine off then proceed with the process Used engine oil and oil filters contain below: Make sure not to add too much oil when substances which are harmful to the topping off the engine. Engine oil in excess Start the engine again and idle it for environment. To change the oil and filters, may damage the engine. Have the vehicle about five minutes. we advise you to contact your authorized checked. Never exceed the MAX level when dealer. topping off engine oil. Note: If you have added the specified amount of oil and the indicator is not reading “Full”, please contact your Engine Coolant Fluid authorized dealer. If the level is too low, unscrew the cap of reservoir and add the fluid described in the "Technical Specifications" chapter.
197 Washer Fluid For Windshield If you wish to install electrical Replacing The Battery The windshield washer fluid reservoir has accessories after purchasing the car that If necessary, replace the battery with a telescopic filler. require permanent electrical supply (e.g. another original battery with the same If the level is too low, remove reservoir alarm, etc.), or accessories which specifications. Follow the battery cap and lift the filler. Then, add the fluid influence the electrical supply manufacturer’s instructions for described in the "Technical requirements, contact your authorized maintenance. Specifications" chapter. dealer, whose qualified staff will evaluate the overall electrical consumption. Warning! Brake Fluid Check that the fluid is at the maximum Caution! level. If the fluid level in the tank is low, Battery acid is a corrosive solution and contact your authorized dealer to have can burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery acid to contact your eyes, skin, or the system checked. If the charge level remains under 50% for a clothing. Do not lean over a battery when long time, the battery may be damaged by attaching clamps. If acid splashes in eyes or Automatic Transmission Activation sulphation, reducing its capacity and on skin, flush the area immediately with System Oil efficiency at start the vehicle. The battery is large amounts of water. Refer to “Jump also more prone to the risk of freezing (at The transmission control oil level should Starting” in “In Case Of Emergency” for temperatures as high as 14°F (-10°C). only be checked at your authorized further information. dealer. Battery gas is flammable and explosive. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Note: After the battery is disconnected, Useful Advice For Extending The Life Keep flame or sparks away from the the steering must be initialized. The Of YourBattery battery. Do not use a booster battery or any warning light on the instrument panel other booster source with an output greater To avoid draining your battery and make switches on to indicate this. To carry out than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable clamps to it last longer, observe the following this procedure, simply turn the steering touch each other. instructions: wheel all the way from one end to the Battery posts, terminals, and related other, and then turn it back to the central When you park the car, ensure that the accessories contain lead and lead position. doors and trunk are closed properly to compounds. Wash hands after handling. prevent any lights from remaining on Battery Note: It will not be possible to open the inside the passenger's compartment. The battery does not require the trunk with a key or by pressing the button Do not keep accessories (e.g. radio, electrolyte to be topped up with distilled in the passenger compartment when the hazard warning lights, etc.) switched on water. A periodic check carried out at an battery is disconnected. So, always for a long time when the engine is not authorized dealer, however, is necessary position the manual trunk opening strap running. to check efficiency. on the trunk lock before disconnecting Follow the battery manufacturer's the battery. The procedure is described in Before performing any operation on instructions for maintenance. the "Storing The Vehicle" paragraph in the electrical system, disconnect the this chapter. negative battery cable. 198 BATTERY RECHARGING The vehicle is equipped with an IBS (Intelligent Battery Sensor), which is able Important Notes to measure the charge and discharge voltage and calculate the charge level and the general condition of the battery. Warning! The sensor is placed next to the negative terminal (-) of the battery. Never charge or recharge a frozen For a correct charge/discharge battery: it may explode because of the procedure, the charge voltage must go nitrogen trapped inside the ice crystals. through the IBS sensor.
At all times while charging or recharging 09036S0001EM 1. Turn the charger on and follow the the battery, make sure that any sparks or Battery Access Panel instructions on the user's manual to open flames are kept sufficiently far away completely recharge the battery. from the battery. Remove the protective cover and connect the positive cable terminal of the 2. When the battery is charged, turn the charger (usually red) to the positive Note: charger off before disconnecting it from terminal (+) of the battery. the battery. Before using the charging device, Connect the negative terminal of the 3. Disconnect the black cable terminal of always make sure that it is appropriate charger (usually black) to nut next to the the battery charger and then the red for the installed battery, with constant negative terminal (-) of the battery. voltage (below 14.8 V) and low cable terminal. amperage (maximum 15 A). 4. Refit the protective cover of the Recharge the battery in a well positive terminal of the battery and the ventilated environment. access cover to the battery compartment. Before using any devices to charge or to maintain the charge of the battery, Note: If a "quick-type" battery charger is carefully follow the instructions used with the battery fitted on the provided with the device in order to vehicle, before connecting it disconnect properly and safely connect it to the car both cables of the battery itself. Do not battery. use a "quick-type" battery charger to provide the starting voltage. Youcan recharge the battery without 09036S0002EM Battery disconnecting the wires of the vehicle's electrical system. 1 — Protective Cover To reach the battery, remove the 2 — Negative Post (Nut) access panel inside the trunk. 199 DEALER SERVICE Choice Of Engine Oil Type Air Filter The following pages contain instructions To ensure optimal performance and Replacing The Air Cleaner maximum protection in all operating on the required maintenance from the See the "Maintenance Plan" for the conditions, it is advisable to use solely technical personnel who designed the correct servicing intervals. It is advised to certified engine oils (see description in vehicle. replace it with a genuine spare part, "Fluid And Lubricants" in the "Technical In addition to these specific maintenance specifically designed for this vehicle. instructions specified for routine Specifications" chapter). Air Conditioning System Maintenance scheduled servicing, there are other Additives For Engine Oil components which may require periodic It is strongly recommended not to use To ensure the best possible performance, maintenance or replacement over the additives (other than leak detection dyes) the air conditioning system must be vehicle’s life cycle. with the engine oil. checked and undergo maintenance at an Engine Oil The engine oil is a product designed authorized dealer at the beginning of the summer. Engine Oil Level Check specially for the vehicle and its performance may be deteriorated To ensure correct engine lubrication, the through the use of further additives. Caution! oil must always be kept at the prescribed level (see "Engine Compartment" in this Disposal Of Used Engine Oil And Filters chapter). For the disposal of the engine oil and Do not use chemicals to clean the air
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Check the oil level at regular intervals, for filters, contact the appropriate body to conditioning system, since the internal example every 1864 miles (3000 km). determine local regulations. components may be damaged. This kind of damage is not covered by warranty. It must be checked once full operating Note: Used engine oil disposed of temperature is reached. incorrectly may seriously harm the The vehicle must also be parked on as environment. Replace The Cabin Air Filter level a surface as possible. Engine Oil Filter See the "Maintenance Plan" for the The engine oil level can be checked using correct servicing intervals. For cleaner Replacing The Engine Oil Filter the Information and Entertainment replacement, contact an authorized system. To access the function, activate The engine oil filter must be replaced dealer. the main menu (MENU button) and select each time the engine oil is changed. It is the following options in sequence: advised to replace it with a genuine spare “Applications”; “My Car”; “Oil level”. part, specifically designed for this vehicle. Changing The Engine Oil See the "Maintenance Plan" for the correct servicing intervals.
200 Lubricate the external lock barrels twice a year. Apply a small amount of Warning! Warning! high-quality lubricant directly into the lock barrel. Use only refrigerants and compressor If necessary, contact your authorized Driving with worn windshield wiper blades is lubricants approved by the manufacturer for dealer as soon as possible. a serious hazard, because visibility is your air conditioning system. Some reduced in bad weather conditions. unapproved refrigerants are flammable and Windshield Wiper can explode, injuring you. Other unapproved Periodically clean the windshield and rear refrigerants or lubricants can cause the Note: The life of the windshield wiper system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer window and rubber profile of the blades varies according to the usage to Warranty Information Book, located in windshield wiper blades, using a sponge frequency. In any case, it is advised to your owner’s information kit, for further or a soft cloth and a non-abrasive replace the blades approximately once a warranty information. detergent. This eliminates the salt or year. When the blades are worn, noise, impurities accumulated when driving. marks on the glass or streaks of water Lubricating Moving Parts Of The Prolonged operation of the windshield may be noticed. In the presence of these Bodywork window wipers with dry glass may cause conditions, clean the windshield wiper the deterioration of the blades, in blades or, if necessary, replace them. Ensure that the locks and bodywork addition to abrasion of the surface of the Raising The Windshield Wiper Blades junction points, including components glass. To eliminate the impurities on the ("Service Position" Function) such as the seat guides, door hinges (and dry glass, always operate the windshield rollers), trunk and hood are periodically washers. The "service position" function allows the driver to replace the windshield wiper lubricated with lithium-based grease to In the event of very low outdoor blades more easily. It is also ensure correct, silent operation and to temperatures, below 0°F (-17.8°C) , recommended to activate this function protect them from rust and wear. ensure that the movement of the rubber when it is snowing and to make it easier Thoroughly clean the components, part in contact with the glass is not to remove any dirt deposits in the area eliminating every trace of dirt and dust. obstructed. Use a suitable deicing where the blades are normally After lubricating, eliminate excess oil and product to release it if required. positioned, when washing. grease. Also pay particular attention to Avoid using the windshield wipers to the hood closing devices, to ensure remove frost or ice. Activation Of The Function correct operation. During operations on To activate this function, disable the the hood, to be carried out with the Also avoid contact of the rubber profile windshield wiper before setting the engine cold, also remember to check, of the blades with petroleum derivatives ignition device to STOP. clean and lubricate the locking, release such as engine oil, gas, etc. and safety devices. This function can only be activated within two minutes of cycling the ignition to STOP. 201 To activate this function, move the lever Replacing The Windshield Wiper Blades upward for at least three seconds. Proceed as follows: 1. Raise the wiper arm, press tab of the attachment spring and remove the blade from the arm.
09046S0003EM Windshield Washers 0903142761US 1 — Washer Nozzles Windshield Wiper Stalk
Function Deactivation Then, check that the nozzle holes are not The function is deactivated if: 09046S0002EM clogged; use a needle to unblock them if Wiper Release Tab necessary. More than two minutes passes before SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE cycling the ignition to the STOP position 2. Fit the new blade, inserting the tab in Exhaust System after having raised the lever and putting the dedicated housing in the arm and the wipers into service position. checking that it is locked. Adequate maintenance of the engine exhaust system represents the best The ignition is cycled to the ON 3. Lower the wiper arm onto the protection against leaks of carbon position and the windshield wiper control windshield. monoxide into the passenger is used. Note: Do not operate the windshield compartment. If, after using the function, the ignition is wiper with the blades lifted from the If an unusual noise from the exhaust or set back to ON with the blades in a windshield. the presence of smoke in the passenger compartment is identified, or if the position other than rest position (at the Windshield Washer base of the windshield), they will only underbody or rear section of the vehicle return to rest position following a The window washer nozzles are fixed. If have been damaged, have the entire command given using the stalk (stalk there is no jet of fluid, first check that exhaust system and adjoining bodywork upwards, into unstable position) or when there is fluid in the reservoir (see areas checked at your authorized dealer a speed of 3 mph (5 km/h) is exceeded. paragraph “Engine Compartment” in this to identify any components which are chapter). broken, damaged, worn or have moved from their correct fitting position.
202 Open welding or loose connections may A hot exhaust system can start a fire if Check the engine coolant and intercooler permit exhaust gas to enter the you park over materials that can burn. Such coolant level every oil change or before passenger compartment. materials might be grass or leaves coming long trips. Have the exhaust system checked every into contact with your exhaust system. Do If there are impurities in the engine time the vehicle is raised. Replace the not park or operate your vehicle in areas coolant, the system must be drained, components where necessary (for these where your exhaust system can contact flushed and refilled: contact an anything that can burn. operations, contact an authorized authorized dealer. dealer). Check the front part of the condenser to In normal operating conditions, the Cooling System check for any build-up of insects, leaves catalytic converter does not require or other debris. Should it be dirty, clean it maintenance. To ensure that it operates by spraying delicately with water. Warning! correctly, however, and prevent it from Check the hoses of the engine/ getting damaged, it is extremely intercooler cooling system to ensure that important that the engine operates Youor others can be badly burned by hot the rubber has not deteriorated and that perfectly. engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from there are no cracks, tears, cuts or To minimize the risk of damaging the your radiator. If you see or hear steam obstructions in the expansion tank side catalytic converter, proceed as follows: coming from under the hood, do not open the and radiator side connectors. Should hood until the radiator has had time to cool. there be any doubt regarding leaks from Do not stop the engine or deactivate Never open a cooling system pressure cap the system (e.g. if frequent top ups are the ignition with gear engaged and when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot. required), have the seal checked at an vehicle in motion. Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry authorized dealer. away from the radiator cooling fan when the Do not attempt to start the engine by With the engine off and at normal bump starting. hood is raised. The fan starts automatically and may start at any time, whether the operating temperature, check that the Do not persist in using the vehicle if engine is running or not. cooling system radiator cap is closed properly. idling is very irregular or the operating When working near the radiator cooling conditions are very notably irregular. fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The fan is temperature controlled and can start at any Warning! Warning! time the ignition is in the ON mode. Do not open hot engine cooling system. Coolant Check Never add engine coolant (antifreeze) when Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or contain carbon monoxide (CO), which is Yourvehicle has two cooling systems and remove the cap to cool an overheated colorless and odorless. Breathing it can they both need to be checked to ensure engine. Heat causes pressure to build up in make you unconscious and can eventually they are at proper fill levels. Refer to the the cooling system. To prevent scalding or poison you. “Engine Compartment” section for the injury, do not remove the pressure cap while locations. the system is hot or under pressure. 203 Do not use a pressure cap other than the Periodically check the cap and clean it presence of rain, snow or a lot of one specified for your vehicle. Personal from any foreign bodies that may have moisture on the surface of the radiator. deposited on the external surface. injury or engine damage may result. With engine and system cold, do not top up with coolant beyond the Note: Before removing the coolant maximum level indicated on the Warning! reservoir cap, wait for the system to cool reservoir in the engine compartment. down. Braking System Topping Up / Draining / Flushing The Never add coolant with the engine hot or Engine/Intercooler Coolant overheated. In order to guarantee the efficiency of the braking system, periodically check its If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty, Do not attempt to cool an overheated engine by loosening or removing the cap. components; for this operation, contact have cleaning and flushing carried out at an authorized dealer. an authorized dealer. The heat causes a considerable increase in pressure in the cooling system. See the "Maintenance Plan" for the See the "Maintenance Plan" for the correct servicing intervals. correct servicing intervals. To prevent damage to the engine, only use the engine cooling circuit caps provided. Note: Driving with your foot resting on Note: the brake pedal may compromise its For topping up, use a fluid with the Disposal Of Used Coolant efficiency, increasing the risk of accidents. When driving, never keep your SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE same characteristics as those indicated Disposal of engine/intercooler coolant is in the "Fluids And Lubricants" table (see subject to legal requirements: contact foot on the brake pedal and don’t put "Technical Specifications" chapter). the appropriate body to determine local unnecessary strain on it to prevent the regulations. brakes from overheating: excess pad Do not use pure water, alcohol-based wear may cause damage to the braking coolants, corrosions inhibitors or Note: system. additional anti-rust products because they may be incompatible with the To prevent the fluid from being When an insufficient oil level is engine coolant and cause the clogging of ingested by children or animals, do not detected, contact an authorized dealer the radiator. The use of propylene keep it in open containers or pour it on to have the system checked. the ground. If ingested, contact a doctor glycol-based coolant is also not Always keep the cap of the brake recommended. immediately. Eliminate any traces of fluid from the ground immediately. fluid reservoir (in the engine Engine Cooling/Intercooler System Cap compartment) completely closed. When the vehicle stops after a short To prevent loss of engine coolant, make trip, steam may be seen coming out from sure that the expansion tank cap is front of the hood. This is a normal closed. If it is open, screw it completely phenomenon which is due to the until you reach/hear the click. 204 Automatic Transmission Replacing The Battery Warning! Use only a transmission oil with the same If necessary, replace the battery with characteristics as those indicated in the another battery with the same "Fluids and Lubricants" table (see specifications. It is advised to contact an Use only manufacturer's recommended "Technical Specifications" chapter). authorized dealer for replacement. brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants” in “Technical Specifications” for further Special Additives Follow the battery manufacturer's instructions for maintenance. information. Using the wrong type of brake Do not use any type of additive with the fluid can severely damage your brake automatic transmission oil. The Note: It will not be possible to open the system and/or impair its performance. The trunk with a key or by pressing the button proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle is automatic transmission oil is a product designed specially for this vehicle and its in the passenger compartment when the also identified on the original factory battery is disconnected. So, always installed hydraulic master cylinder performance may be compromised reservoir. through the use of further additives. position the manual trunk opening strap on the trunk lock before disconnecting To avoid contamination from foreign the battery. The procedure is described in matter or moisture, use only new brake fluid Caution! the "Storing The Vehicle" section in this or fluid that has been in a tightly closed chapter. container. Keep the master cylinder reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake Do not use chemical flushes in your fluid in a open container absorbs moisture transmission as the chemicals can damage from the air resulting in a lower boiling point. your transmission components. Such This may cause it to boil unexpectedly damage is not covered by the New Vehicle during hard or prolonged braking, resulting Limited Warranty. in sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision. Frequency Of Oil Changes Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine In normal vehicle operating conditions, it parts, causing the brake fluid to catch fire. is not necessary to change the Brake fluid can also damage painted and transmission oil. vinyl surfaces, care should be taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces. Caution! Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be damaged, causing If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an partial or complete brake failure. This could authorized dealer immediately. Severe result in a collision. transmission damage may occur. An authorized dealer has the proper tools to adjust the fluid level accurately. 205 RAISING THE VEHICLE TIRES Note: If the vehicle requires lifting, visit an Tire Safety Information P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is authorized dealer which is equipped with based on U.S. design standards. Tire safety information will cover aspects shop jacks or jack arms. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded of the following information: Tire into the sidewall preceding the The vehicle lifting points are marked on Markings, Tire Identification Numbers, the side skirts with the symbols. size designation. Example: Tire Terminology and Definitions, Tire P215/65R15 95H. Pressures, and Tire Loading. European — Metric tire sizing is Tire Markings based on European design standards. Tires designed to this standard have the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with the section width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H. LT(Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design standards. The size
09056S0001EM designation for LT-Metric tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Vehicle Lift Point Locations 0601085395US letters “LT” that are molded into the Tire Markings sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16. 1 — U.S. DOT 4 — Maximum Safety Standards Load Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary emergency use only. Code (TIN) Temporary high pressure compact 2 — Size 5 — Maximum spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” Designation Pressure molded into the sidewall preceding the 3 — Service 6 — Treadwear, size designation. Example: Description Traction and T145/80D18 103M. Temperature High flotation tire sizing is based on Grades U.S. design standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
206 Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE: Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or "....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or TorS= Temporary spare tire or 31 = Overall diameter in inches (in) 215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm) 65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%) Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or 10.5 = Section width in inches (in) R = Construction code "R" means radial construction, or "D" means diagonal or bias construction 15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in) Service Description: 95 = Load Index A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry H = Speed Symbol A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)
207 EXAMPLE: Load Identification: Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire: XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or LL = Light load tire or C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire
Tire Identification Number (TIN) The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire; however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE the date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire. Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard side of the tire.
EXAMPLE: DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301 DOT = Department of Transportation This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway use MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
208 EXAMPLE: L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits) ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits) 03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 03 means the 3rd week 01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits) 01 means the year 2001 Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
Tire Terminology And Definitions
Term Definition B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front door. Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for Cold Tire Inflation Pressure a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals). The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation Maximum Inflation Pressure pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall. Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure placard. A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity, Tire Placard the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.
209 Tire Loading And Tire Pressure Tire And Loading Information Placard Note: Under a maximum loaded vehicle Note: The proper cold tire inflation condition, gross axle weight ratings pressure is listed on the driver’s side (GAWRs) for the front and rear axles B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver's must not be exceeded. For further side door. information on GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to “Vehicle Check the inflation pressure of each tire, Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” including the spare tire (if equipped), at section of this manual. least monthly and inflate to the To determine the maximum loading recommended pressure for your vehicle. conditions of your vehicle, locate the GUID-054900418-high.tif statement “The combined weight of Tire And Loading Information Placard occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on the Tire This placard tells you important and Loading Information placard. The information about the: combined weight of occupants, 1. Number of people that can be carried cargo/luggage and trailer tongue weight in the vehicle. (if applicable) should never exceed the weight referenced here. 2. Total weight your vehicle can carry. Steps For Determining Correct Load SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE 0806115150US 3. Tire size designed for your vehicle. Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Limit— 4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the (1) Locate the statement “The front, rear, and spare tires. combined weight of occupants and Loading cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard. The vehicle maximum load on the tire (2) Determine the combined weight must not exceed the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You of the driver and passengers that will will not exceed the tire's load carrying be riding in your vehicle. capacity if you adhere to the loading (3) Subtract the combined weight of 0806115151US conditions, tire size, and cold tire Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar) inflation pressures specified on the Tire the driver and passengers from XXX and Loading Information placard in kg or XXX lbs. “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” section of this manual.
210 (4) The resulting figure equals the Metric Example For Load Limit available amount of cargo and For example, if “XXX” amount equals luggage load capacity. For example, 635 kg and there will be five 68 kg if “XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity there will be five 150 lb passengers is 295 kg (635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as in your vehicle, the amount of shown in step 4. available cargo and luggage load Note: capacity is 650 lbs. (1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred (5) Determine the combined weight to your vehicle. The following table of luggage and cargo being loaded on shows examples on how to calculate the vehicle. That weight may not total load, cargo/luggage, and towing safely exceed the available cargo and capacities of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and number and luggage load capacity calculated in size of occupants. This table is for Step 4. illustration purposes only and may not (6) If your vehicle will be towing a be accurate for the seating and load trailer, load from your trailer will be carry capacity of your vehicle. transferred to your vehicle. Consult For the following example, the this manual to determine how this combined weight of occupants and reduces the available cargo and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs (392 kg). luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
211 SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE
GUID-054900419-high.tif
Warning!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.
212 Tires — General Information Always drive with each tire inflated to the Tire Inflation Pressures recommended cold tire inflation pressure. Tire Pressure The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear Proper tire inflation pressure is essential Both under-inflation and over-inflation edge of the driver's side door. to the safe and satisfactory operation of affect the stability of the vehicle and can At least once a month: your vehicle. Four primary areas are produce a feeling of sluggish response or affected by improper tire pressure: over responsiveness in the steering. Check and adjust tire pressure with a Safety and Vehicle Stability good quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Note: Do not make a visual judgement when Economy Unequal tire pressures from side to determining proper inflation. Tires may Tread Wear side may cause erratic and look properly inflated even when they are unpredictable steering response. under-inflated. Ride Comfort Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or Safety Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the vehicle to drift left or visible damage. right. Warning! Fuel Economy Caution! Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance resulting in higher fuel After inspecting or adjusting the tire Improperly inflated tires are dangerous consumption. and can cause collisions. pressure, always reinstall the valve stem Tread Wear cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt from Underinflation increases tire flexing and entering the valve stem, which could can result in overheating and tire failure. Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnormal wear patterns and damage the valve stem. Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to reduced tread life, resulting in the need cushion shock. Objects on the road and for earlier tire replacement. Inflation pressures specified on the chuckholes can cause damage that result in placard are always “cold tire inflation tire failure. Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability Proper tire inflation contributes to a pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure is Overinflated or underinflated tires can comfortable ride. Over-inflation defined as the tire pressure after the affect vehicle handling and can fail vehicle has not been driven for at least suddenly, resulting in loss of vehicle control. produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride. three hours, or driven less than 1 mile Unequal tire pressures can cause steering (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of problems. Youcould lose control of your three hours. The cold tire inflation vehicle. pressure must not exceed the maximum Unequal tire pressures from one side of inflation pressure molded into the tire the vehicle to the other can cause the sidewall. vehicle to drift to the right or left. 213 Check tire pressures more often if Tire Pressures For High Speed Recommended Cold Tire Inflation subject to a wide range of outdoor Operation Pressures temperatures, as tire pressures vary with For vehicle speeds below 100 mph temperature changes. The manufacturer advocates driving at (160 km/h), recommended cold tire Tire pressures change by approximately safe speeds and within posted speed inflation pressures are listed on the Tire 1 psi (7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air limits. Where speed limits or conditions And Loading Information Placard located temperature change. Keep this in mind are such that the vehicle can be driven at on driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge when checking tire pressure inside a high speeds, maintaining correct tire of the driver's side door. inflation pressure is very important. garage, especially in the Winter. When driving at speeds 100 mph Increased tire pressure and reduced Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (160 km/h) and above, increased tire vehicle loading may be required for (20°C) and the outside temperature = pressures and reduced vehicle loading high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire inflation are required for high-speed vehicle your authorized tire dealer or original pressure should be increased by 3 psi operation. equipment vehicle dealer for (21 kPa), which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for recommended safe operating speeds, For driving speeds above 100 mph every 12°F (7°C) for this outside loading and cold tire inflation pressures. (160 km/h) recommended cold tire temperature condition. inflation pressures are listed below Tire pressure may increase from 2 to under "High Speed Tire Inflation 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO Warning! Pressure". Vehicle loading condition must
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE NOT reduce this normal pressure build up not exceed 688 lbs. (312 kg) (driver + or your tire pressure will be too low. three passengers + 88 lbs. (40kg) High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added luggage). strain on your tires could cause them to fail. Youcould have a serious collision. Do not Warning! drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h). High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your tires could cause them to fail. Youcould have a serious collision.
214 Recommended Cold Tire Inflation High Speed Tire Inflation Pressure Tires Wheel Pressure Front Rear Front Rear 39.2 psi/ 39.2 psi/ 205/60 R16 92V 16x7J 42.2 psi/291 kpa 42.2 psi/291 kpa 270.3 kpa 270.3 kpa 39.2 psi/ 225/55 R16 95W 16x7J 31.9 psi/220 kpa 34.8 psi/240 kpa 43.5 psi/300 kpa 270.3 kpa 225/50 R17 94W or 39.2 psi/ 17x7.5J 31.9 psi/220 kpa 34.8 psi/240 kpa 43.5 psi/300 kpa 225/50 R17 94V * 270.3 kpa 225/45 R18 91W or 39.2 psi/ 18x8J 31.9 psi/220 kpa 34.8 psi/240 kpa 43.5 psi/300 kpa 225/45 R18 91V * 270.3 kpa 225/45 R18 91W ** 18x8J ** 29 psi/200 kpa – 34.8 psi/240 kpa – 255/40 R18 95W ** 18x8J ** – 31.9 psi/220 kpa – 37.7 psi/260 kpa 39.2 psi/ 225/40 R19 89W 19x8J 34.8 psi/240 kpa 37.7 psi/260 kpa 43.5 psi/300 kpa 270.3 kpa 39.2 psi/ 225/40 R19 89W ** 19x8J ** 34.8 psi/240 kpa – – 270.3 kpa 33.4 psi/ 255/35 R19 92W ** 19x9J** – – 42.2 psi/291 kpa 230.3 kpa (*) All Season Tires, If Equipped (**) Matching Rims/Tires
215 Radial Ply Tires Run Flat Tires — If Equipped Run Flat tires allow you the capability to Warning! Warning! drive 50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is Combining radial ply tires with other types generated by excessive wheel speeds may referred to as the Run Flat mode. A Run cause tire damage or failure. A tire could of tires on your vehicle will cause your Flat mode occurs when the tire inflation vehicle to handle poorly. The instability could explode and injure someone. Do not spin cause a collision. Always use radial ply tires pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). your vehicle's wheels faster than 30 mph in sets of four. Never combine them with Once a Run Flat tire reaches the run flat (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds other types of tires. mode it has limited driving capabilities continuously when you are stuck, and do not and needs to be replaced immediately. A let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter Run Flat tire is not repairable. When a run what the speed. Tire Repair flat tire is changed after driving with If your tire becomes damaged, it may be underinflated tire condition, please Tread Wear Indicators repaired if it meets the following criteria: replace the TPM sensor as it is not Tread wear indicators are in the original The tire has not been driven on when designed to be reused when driven under equipment tires to help you in flat. run flat mode (14 psi (96 kPa)) condition. Note: TPM Sensor must be replaced determining when your tires should be The damage is only on the tread replaced. SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE after driving the vehicle on a flat tire section of your tire (sidewall damage is condition. not repairable). It is not recommended driving a vehicle The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer an inch (6 mm). while a tire is in the run flat mode. Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire See the tire pressure monitoring section repairs and additional information. for more information. Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires Tire Spinning that have experienced a loss of pressure
should be replaced immediately with When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice 0806104865NA another Run Flat tire of identical size and conditions, do not spin your vehicle's Tire Tread service description (Load Index and wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for Speed Symbol). Replace the tire pressure longer than 30 seconds continuously 1 — Worn Tire sensor as well as it is not designed to be without stopping. 2 — New Tire reused. These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread grooves. They will 216 appear as bands when the tread depth Note: Wheel Valve Stem must be wheel’s specifications match those of becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). replaced as well when installing new tires the original wheels. When the tread is worn to the tread wear due to wear and tear in existing tires. It is recommended you contact an indicators, the tire should be replaced. Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place authorized tire dealer or original Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this with as little exposure to light as equipment dealer with any questions you section for further information. possible. Protect tires from contact with may have on tire specifications or oil, grease, and gasoline. capability. Failure to use equivalent Life Of Tire replacement tires may adversely affect Replacement Tires The service life of a tire is dependent the safety, handling, and ride of your upon varying factors including, but not The tires on your new vehicle provide a vehicle. limited to: balance of many characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for wear Driving style. and correct cold tire inflation pressures. Warning! Tire pressure - Improper cold tire The manufacturer strongly recommends inflation pressures can cause uneven that you use tires equivalent to the Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating, wear patterns to develop across the tire originals in size, quality and performance or speed rating other than that specified for tread. These abnormal wear patterns will when replacement is needed. Refer to the your vehicle. Some combinations of reduce tread life, resulting in the need for paragraph on “Tread Wear Indicators” in unapproved tires and wheels may change earlier tire replacement. this section. Refer to the Tire and Loading suspension dimensions and performance Information placard or the Vehicle characteristics, resulting in changes to Distance driven. Certification Label for the size steering, handling, and braking of your Performance tires, tires with a speed designation of your tire. The Load Index vehicle. This can cause unpredictable rating of V or higher, and Summer tires and Speed Symbol for your tire will be handling and stress to steering and typically have a reduced tread life. found on the original equipment tire suspension components. Youcould lose control and have a collision resulting in Rotation of these tires per the vehicle sidewall. serious injury or death. Use only the tire and scheduled maintenance is highly See the Tire Sizing Chart example found wheel sizes with load ratings approved for recommended. in the “Tire Safety Information” section of your vehicle. this manual for more information relating Never use a tire with a smaller load index to the Load Index and Speed Symbol of a or capacity, other than what was originally Warning! tire. equipped on your vehicle. Using a tire with a It is recommended to replace the two smaller load index could result in tire front tires or two rear tires as a pair. overloading and failure. Youcould lose Tires and the spare tire should be replaced control and have a collision. after six years, regardless of the remaining Replacing just one tire can seriously tread. Failure to follow this warning can affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever Failure to equip your vehicle with tires result in sudden tire failure. Youcould lose replace a wheel, make sure that the having adequate speed capability can result control and have a collision resulting in in sudden tire failure and loss of vehicle serious injury or death. control. 217 Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped Caution! The compact spare is for temporary Warning! emergency use only. Youcan identify if your vehicle is equipped with a compact Replacing original tires with tires of a Compact and collapsible spares are for different size may result in false spare by looking at the spare tire temporary emergency use only. With these speedometer and odometer readings. description on the Tire and Loading spares, do not drive more than 50 mph Information Placard located on the (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have driver’s side door opening or on the limited tread life. When the tread is worn to Spare Tires — If Equipped sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire the tread wear indicators, the temporary use Note: For vehicles equipped with Tire descriptions begin with the letter “T” or spare tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to Service Kit instead of a spare tire, please “S” preceding the size designation. follow the warnings, which apply to your refer to “Tire Service Kit” in “In Case Of Example: T145/80D18 103M. spare. Failure to do so could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control. Emergency” for further information. T, S = Temporary Spare Tire Since this tire has limited tread life, the Caution! original equipment tire should be Full Size Spare — If Equipped repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled on The full size spare is for temporary your vehicle at the first opportunity. Because of the reduced ground clearance, emergency use only. This tire may look Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to like the originally equipped tire on the SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE do not take your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a compact or mount a conventional tire on the compact front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is limited use temporary spare installed. spare wheel, since the wheel is designed not. This spare tire may have limited Damage to the vehicle may result. specifically for the compact spare tire. tread life. When the tread is worn to the Do not install more than one compact tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire and wheel on the vehicle at any Spare Tire Matching Original full size spare tire needs to be replaced. given time. Since it is not the same as your original Equipped Tire And Wheel — equipment tire, replace (or repair) the If Equipped original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the first opportunity. Yourvehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and wheel equivalent in look Limited Use Spare — If Equipped and function to the original equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear The limited use spare tire is for axle of your vehicle. This spare tire may temporary emergency use only. This tire be used in the tire rotation for your is identified by a label located on the vehicle. If your vehicle has this option, limited use spare wheel. This label refer to an authorized tire dealer for the contains the driving limitations for this recommended tire rotation pattern. spare. This tire may look like the original 218 equipped tire on the front or rear axle of Yourwheels are susceptible to your vehicle, but it is not. Installation of deterioration caused by salt, sodium Caution! this limited use spare tire affects vehicle chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium handling. Since it is not the same as your chloride, etc., and other road chemicals original equipment tire, replace (or used to melt ice or control dust on dirt Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a repair) the original equipment tire and roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and mild bristle brush, metal polishes or oven cleaner. reinstall on the vehicle at the first soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use These products may damage the wheel's opportunity. harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can protective finish. Such damage is not damage the wheel’s protective coating covered by the New Vehicle Limited that helps keep them from corroding and Warranty. Only car wash soap is recommended. Warning! tarnishing.
Caution! Note: If you intend parking or storing Limited use spares are for emergency use your vehicle for an extended period after only. Installation of this limited use spare cleaning the wheels with wheel cleaner, tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the speed listed on Avoid products or automatic car washes drive your vehicle and apply the brakes to the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated to that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline remove the water droplets from the the cold tire inflation pressures listed on additives or harsh brushes. Many brake components. This activity will your Tire and Loading Information Placard aftermarket wheel cleaners and automatic remove the red rust on the brake rotors located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the car washes may damage the wheel's and prevent vehicle vibration when rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace protective finish. Such damage is not braking. covered by the New Vehicle Limited (or repair) the original equipment tire at the Dark Or Low Gloss Wheels first opportunity and reinstall it on your Warranty. Only car wash soap is vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss recommended. of vehicle control. Caution! When cleaning extremely dirty wheels Wheel And Wheel Trim Care including excessive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire and wheel If your vehicle is equipped with these All wheels and wheel trim, especially specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to cleaners, abrasives, or polishing compounds. aluminum and chrome plated wheels, prevent damage to the wheels. Select a should be cleaned regularly using mild They will permanently damage this finish non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for and such damage is not covered by the New (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain aluminum or chrome wheels. Vehicle Limited Warranty. HAND WASH their luster and to prevent corrosion. ONLYUSING MILD SOAP AND WATERWITH Wash wheels with the same soap solution A SOFT CLOTH. Used on a regular basis; this recommended for the body of the vehicle is all that is required to maintain this finish. and remember to always wash when the surfaces are not hot to the touch. 219 Tire Types While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid and traction Warning! All Season Tires — If Equipped capability on wet or dry surfaces may be All Season tires provide traction for all poorer than that of non-studded tires. seasons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice Some states prohibit studded tires; Winter). Traction levels may vary conditions. Youcould lose vehicle control, therefore, local laws should be checked between different all season tires. All resulting in severe injury or death. Driving before using these tire types. season tires can be identified by the M+S, too fast for conditions also creates the possibility of loss of vehicle control. Tire Chains (Traction Devices) M&S, M/S or MS designation on the tire Use of traction devices require sufficient sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets tire-to-body clearance. Follow these of four; failure to do so may adversely Snow Tires recommendations to guard against affect the safety and handling of your damage. vehicle. Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires during the Winter. Snow Note: Summer Or Three Season Tires — tires can be identified by a If Equipped “mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire Traction device must be of proper sidewall. size for the tire, as recommended by the Summer tires provide traction in both If you need snow tires, traction device manufacturer wet and dry conditions, and are not select tires equivalent Use on Rear Tires Only SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE intended to be driven in snow or on ice. If in size and type to the your vehicle is equipped with Summer original equipment Due to limited clearance, the tires, be aware these tires are not tires. Use snow tires following traction devices are designed for Winter or cold driving only in sets of four; recommended: conditions. Install Winter tires on your failure to do so may For a 255/35R19 tire, use of a snow vehicle when ambient temperatures are adversely affect the safety and handling traction device with a maximum less than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are of your vehicle. projection of 7 mm beyond the tire covered with ice or snow. For more Snow tires generally have lower speed profile is recommended. information, contact an authorized ratings than what was originally equipped dealer. For 225/50R17, 225/45R18 or with your vehicle and should not be 225/40R19 tires, use of a snow traction Summer tires do not contain the all operated at sustained speeds over device with a maximum projection of season designation or mountain/ 75 mph (120 km/h). For speeds above 9 mm beyond the tire profile is snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to original recommended. Use Summer tires only in sets of four; equipment or an authorized tire dealer failure to do so may adversely affect the for recommended safe operating speeds, safety and handling of your vehicle. loading and cold tire inflation pressures.
220 Tire Rotation Recommendations Tire rotation contributes to the preservation of the grip and traction Caution! Tires on the front and rear axles of performance on wet, muddy or snowy vehicles operate at different loads and roads, guaranteeing optimal driveability perform different steering, driving, and of the vehicle. To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, braking functions. For these reasons, observe the following precautions: they wear at unequal rates. These effects In the case of irregular wear of the tires Because of restricted traction device can be reduced by timely rotation of identify the cause and correct it as soon clearance between tires and other tires. Rotation will increase tread life, as possible, by contacting an authorized suspension components, it is important that dealer. only traction devices in good condition are maintain traction levels and contribute to used. Broken devices can cause serious a smooth, quiet ride. Tire Rotation for Directional Tires — damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if To resolve this problem, tires should be If Equipped noise occurs that could indicate device rotated at each service interval Directional tires are equipped on the breakage. Remove the damaged parts of (approximately every 10,000 miles following: the device before further use. [16,000km]). More frequent rotation is 2.0T GME Engine equipped with same Install device as tightly as possible and permissible if desired. The reasons for size tires and wheels on front and rear then retighten after driving about ½ mile any rapid or unusual wear should be axles (0.8 km). corrected prior to rotation being The rotational direction of the tire must Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h). performed. Tire Rotations Not Recommended — be taken into consideration when Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns If Equipped rotating the tires. The recommended and large bumps, especially with a loaded rotation pattern for directional tires is vehicle. Due to different size tires and wheels on shown below. front and rear axles tire rotation is not Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry possible for: pavement. 2.0T GME Engine Equipped with a Observe the traction device 225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear manufacturer’s instructions on the method tires. of installation, operating speed, and conditions for use. Always use the suggested operating speed of the device Caution! manufacturer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h). Do not use traction devices on a compact Damage to the vehicle may occur if spare tire. 225/40R19 front and 255/35R19 rear tires are rotated 09066S0002EM Tire Rotation
221 All Wheel Drive (AWD) Models DEPARTMENT OF practices, and differences in road It is recommended to avoid situations TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM characteristics and climate. with a large difference in wear between TIRE QUALITY GRADES the front and rear tires and to strictly use Traction Grades The following tire grading categories winter tires of the sizes given on the tire The Traction grades, from highest to were established by the National placard. lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These Highway Traffic Safety The AWD system and the original tires grades represent the tire's ability to are developed together to ensure the Administration. The specific grade stop on wet pavement, as measured vehicle’s best performance. When rating assigned by the tire's under controlled conditions on changing the tires, it is recommended to manufacturer in each category is us the same “AR” marked tires, to specified government test surfaces shown on the sidewall of the tires on maintain the same level of performance of asphalt and concrete. A tire your vehicle. and component life. marked C may have poor traction All passenger vehicle tires must performance. conform to Federal safety requirements in addition to these grades. Warning!
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE Treadwear The Treadwear grade is a The traction grade assigned to this comparative rating, based on the tire is based on straight-ahead wear rate of the tire when tested braking traction tests, and does not under controlled conditions on a include acceleration, cornering, specified government test course. hydroplaning, or peak traction For example, a tire graded 150 would characteristics. wear one and one-half times as well on the government course as a tire Temperature Grades graded 100. The relative The temperature grades are A (the performance of tires depends upon highest), B, and C, representing the the actual conditions of their use, tire's resistance to the generation of however, and may depart heat and its ability to dissipate heat, significantly from the norm due to when tested under controlled variations in driving habits, service conditions on a specified indoor 222 laboratory test wheel. Sustained high STORING THE VEHICLE compact plastic sheets, as they do not temperature can cause the material If the vehicle is left inactive for longer allow humidity to evaporate from the of the tire to degenerate and reduce than a month, the following precautions surface of the vehicle . tire life, and excessive temperature should be observed: Inflate tires to +7.25 psi (+0.5 bar) can lead to sudden tire failure. The Park the vehicle in an area that is above the standard prescribed pressure and check it periodically. grade C corresponds to a level of covered and dry, and well-ventilated if performance, which all passenger possible. Slightly open the windows. Do not drain the engine cooling vehicle tires must meet under the Check that the electric park brake is system. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety not activated. Any time the vehicle is left inactive for Standard No. 109. Grades B and A Carry out the procedure: “manual trunk two weeks or more, operate the air conditioning system with engine idling represent higher levels of opening device” procedure described in this paragraph. for at least five minutes, setting external performance on the laboratory test air and with fan set to maximum speed. wheel, than the minimum required by Disconnect the negative battery This operation will ensure appropriate law. terminal and check the battery charge. lubrication for the system, thus Repeat this check once every three minimizing the possibility of damage to months during storage. the compressor when the system is Warning! If the battery is not disconnected from operated again. the electrical system, check its state of Note: After cycling the ignition to STOP The temperature grade for this tire charge every thirty days. and having closed the driver side door, is established for a tire that is Clean and protect the painted parts wait at least one minute before using protective wax. disconnecting the electrical supply from properly inflated and not the battery. When reconnecting the overloaded. Excessive speed, Clean and protect the shiny metal electrical supply to the battery, make under-inflation, or excessive parts using special compounds available sure that the ignition is in the STOP loading, either separately or in commercially. position and the driver side door is combination, can cause heat Sprinkle talcum powder on the closed. buildup and possible tire failure. windshield wiper rubber blades, and lift Manual Trunk Opening Device them off the glass. Proceed as follows if the battery needs Cover the vehicle with a fabric or to be disconnected: perforated plastic sheet, paying 1. From the trunk interior covering, particular care not to damage the painted rotate the plug counterclockwise of the surface by dragging any dust that may lock and extract the cord connected to it. have accumulated on it. Do not use 223 BODYWORK Protection Against Atmospheric Agents The vehicle is equipped with the best available technological solutions to protect the bodywork against corrosion. These include: Painting products and systems which give the vehicle resistance to corrosion 09086S0001EM 0318135355US and abrasion. Trunk Compartment Manual Release Cord Shown With Trunk Closed Use of galvanized (or pre-treated) steel sheets, with high resistance to 3. The trunk can now be opened corrosion. manually by pulling the cord. Spraying of plastic parts, with a 4. After releasing the trunk, rewind the protective function in the more exposed strap around the plug, put it back into its points: underdoor, inner wing, edges, etc.
SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE housing and turn it clockwise. Use of “open” boxed sections to prevent condensation and pockets of Caution! moisture which could favor the formation of rust inside. The Manual Trunk Opening Device allows the Use of special films to protect against 0318134892US trunk to be opened without a key, even if the abrasion in exposed areas (e.g. rear wing, Trunk Manual Release Cord vehicle is locked. Do not use this Device doors, etc.). unless the vehicle is parked in a secure area. 2. Make sure the free end of the cord Corrosion Warranty remains outside the trunk when closing the trunk lid. Yourvehicle is covered by Corrosion Warranty against perforation due to rust of any original element of the structure or bodywork. For the general terms of this warranty, refer to the Warranty Booklet.
224 Preserving The Bodywork Rinse well with water and dry with a Front Headlights leather chamois. Paint Use a soft cloth soaked in water and detergent for washing cars. Touch up abrasions and scratches Dry the less visible parts (e.g. door immediately to prevent the formation of frames, hood, headlight frames, etc.) with Note: rust. special care, as water may stagnate more easily in these areas. Do not wash the car Never use aromatic substances (e.g. Maintenance of paintwork consists of after it has been left in the sun or with the gasoline) or ketones (e.g. acetone) for washing the car: the frequency depends hood hot: this may alter the shine of the cleaning the plastic lenses of the on the conditions and environment where paintwork. headlights. the car is used. For example, it is advisable to wash the vehicle more often Exterior plastic parts must be cleaned in When cleaning with a pressure in areas with high levels of atmospheric the same way as the rest of the vehicle. washer, keep the pressure washer at pollution or salted roads. If washing the car in a service that moves least eight inches (20 cm) away from the Some parts of the vehicle may be covered the car, for cars with automatic headlights. transmissions, PARK (P) must be cut out. with a matte paint which, in order to be Engine Compartment maintained intact, requires special care. Youhave to shut off the engine in the following conditions: car stopped, At the end of every winter, wash the To correctly wash the vehicle, follow transmission in NEUTRAL (N), push the engine compartment thoroughly, taking these instructions: starter button for at least three seconds. care not to aim the jet of water directly at If high pressure jets or cleaners are Note: Avoid parking under trees; the the electronic control units or at the used to wash the vehicle, keep a distance resin dropped by trees makes the windshield wiper motors. Have this of at least 15 inches (40 cm) from the paintwork go opaque and increases the operation performed at a specialized bodywork to avoid damage or alteration. possibility of corrosion. workshop. Build up of water could cause damage to Note: The washing should take place the vehicle in the long term. Windows with the engine cold and the ignition Use specific detergents and clean cloths To make it easier to remove any dirt device in the STOP position. After the to prevent scratching or altering the washing operation, make sure that the deposits in the area where the blades are transparency. normally located it is recommended to various protections (e.g. rubber caps and position the windshield wipers vertically guards) have not been removed or (service position), for more information, Caution! damaged. refer to “Dealer Service” in this chapter. Wash the bodywork using a low Wipe the rear window inside gently with a pressure jet of water if possible. cloth following the direction of the filaments to avoid damaging the heating device. Wipe a sponge with a slightly soapy solution over the bodywork, frequently rinsing the sponge. 225 INTERIORS Remove any dust using a microfiber Periodically check the cleanliness of the cloth, if necessary moistened with water. interior, beneath the mats, which could The use of paper tissues is not cause oxidation of the sheet metal. recommended as these may leave residues. Seats And Fabric Parts Genuine Leather Parts — If Equipped Remove dust with a soft brush or a vacuum cleaner. Rub the seats with a Use only water and mild soap to clean sponge moistened with a solution of these parts. Never use alcohol or water and neutral detergent. alcohol-based products. Before using a specific product for Leather Seats cleaning interiors, make sure that it does Remove the dry dirt with a chamois or not contain alcohol and/or alcohol based slightly damp cloth, without exerting too substances. much pressure. Remove any liquid or grease stains using an absorbent dry cloth, without rubbing. Then clean with a soft cloth or buckskin cloth dampened with water and mild SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE soap. If the stain persists, use specific products and observe the instructions carefully. Note: Never use alcohol. Make sure that the cleaning products used contain no alcohol or alcohol derivatives, even in small quantities. Plastic And Coated Parts Clean interior plastic parts with a damp cloth (if possible made from microfiber), and a solution of water and neutral, non-abrasive detergent. To clean oily or persistent stains, use specific products free from solvents and designed to maintain the original appearance and color of the components. 226 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
For the enthusiasts, the technician, or IDENTIFICATION DATA ...... 228 those who just want to know every detail ENGINE ...... 229 of their vehicle, useful information on POWER SUPPLY ...... 230 understanding how your vehicle works is TRANSMISSION ...... 231 contained in this chapter and illustrated BRAKES ...... 232 with data, tables, and graphics. SUSPENSION ...... 233 STEERING SYSTEM...... 234 DIMENSIONS...... 235 WEIGHTS ...... 236 FUEL REQUIREMENTS ...... 237 FLUID CAPACITIES ...... 239 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS ...... 240 PERFORMANCE ...... 242
227 IDENTIFICATION DATA This number is also printed on the chassis Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) at the front left shock absorber and can Plate Vehicle Identification Number be seen by opening the engine The plates are located on the left side A The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) compartment hood. is stamped on a plate on the front left pillar and contain the data about: corner of the dashboard cover, which can Chassis number (VIN). be seen from outside the vehicle, through the windshield. Vehicle type (USA and Canada only). Color code. Place of manufacturing of the vehicle (USA and Mexico only). Vehicle manufacturing date. Maximum permitted weights. 10016S0002EM Permitted tire inflation pressure (USA Vehicle Identification Number and Canada only). TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
10016S0001EM Vehicle Identification Number
228 ENGINE
2.0 T4 MAir Engine 280 HP Cycle Four Number and position of cylinders 4 in line Piston bore and stroke (mm) 84/90 Total displacement (cm³) 1,995 Compression ratio 10:1 Maximum power (SAE) (HP) 280 Maximum power (kW) 209 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 5200 Maximum torque (SAE) (ft-lb) 306 Maximum torque (Nm) 415 Corresponding engine speed (rpm) 3,300 – 4,400 87 Octane Minimum, 91 Recommended, ethanol percentage is Fuel 0–15%.
229 POWER SUPPLY
Power Supply 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Electronic timed sequential injection with knock control TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
230 TRANSMISSION
Model Transmission Traction Rear-wheel drive 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Eight forward gears plus reverse or All-wheel drive
231 BRAKES
Model Front brakes Rear brakes Parking brake 2.0 T4 MAir Engine Disc Disc Electric
Caution!
Water, ice and salt spread on the roads may deposit on the brake discs, reducing braking efficiency the first time the brakes are applied. To obtain the maximum efficiency of the braking system, a bedding-in period of about 300 miles (500 km) is needed: during this period it is better to avoid sharp, repeated and prolonged braking. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
232 SUSPENSION
Model Front Rear Independent wheel double-wishbone 2.0L T4 MAir Engine Independent wheel with multilink system suspension
233 STEERING SYSTEM
Model Curb-to-curb turning circle Type Rack and pinion with electric power 2.0L T4 MAir Engine 35.50 ft (10.80 m) steering TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
234 DIMENSIONS Dimensions Dimensions are expressed in inches and refer to the vehicle equipped with its standard-supplied tires. Height is measured with vehicle unladen.
10106S0001EM
A C D E H I B F G Front Rear Overall Overall Overall Width Overall Width Wheelbase Front Track Rear Track Overhang Overhang Length Height (Incl. Mirrors) (Excl. Mirrors) 56.54 Inches(+) 61.30 Inches(+) 63.98 Inches(+) 31.30 Inches 111.02 Inches 40.47 Inches 182.80 Inches 57.09 Inches(*) 61.38 Inches(*) 63.15 Inches(*) 79.69 Inches 73.23 Inches
(+) RWD models (*) AWD models Small variations with respect to the reported values are possible depending on the dimensions of the rims. 235 WEIGHTS
Weights (lbs) 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With AWD 2.0 T4 MAir Engine With RWD Unladen weight (with all fluids, fuel tank filled to 90% and 3602 3492 without optional equipment) Payload including the driver (*) 905 905 Maximum permitted loads (**) 155 155 Front axle 2205 2205 Rear axle 2646 2646 Total 4723 4612 (*) If special equipment is fitted (trailer towing equipment, etc.) the empty weight will increase and consequently the payload will decrease in relation to the maximum permitted loads.
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (**) Loads not to be exceeded. The user is responsible for arranging goods in the luggage compartment and/or on the load platform within the maximum permitted loads.
236 FUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated Gasoline Problems that result from using gasoline containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15) Many areas of the country require the This engine is designed or gasoline containing methanol are not use of cleaner burning gasoline referred to meet all emission the responsibility of the manufacturer to as “Reformulated Gasoline”. regulations, and and may void or not be covered under Reformulated gasoline contains provide satisfactory New Vehicle Limited Warranty. fuel economy and oxygenates and are specifically blended performance when to reduce vehicle emissions and improve CNG And LP Fuel System Modifications air quality. using high-quality Modifications that allow the engine to unleaded “Regular” The use of reformulated gasoline is run on Compressed Natural Gas (CNG) or gasoline having a posted octane number recommended. Properly blended Liquid Propane (LP) may result in damage of 87 as specified by the (R+M)/ reformulated gasoline will provide to the engine, emissions, and fuel system 2 method. For optimal performance the improved performance and durability of components. Problems that result from use of 91 or higher octane “Premium” engine and fuel system components. running CNG or LP are not the gasoline is recommended in these Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends responsibility of the manufacturer and engines. may void or not be covered under the While operating on gasoline with the Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded New Vehicle Limited Warranty. required octane number, hearing a light gasoline with oxygenates such as knocking sound from the engine is not a ethanol. MMT In Gasoline cause for concern. However, if the engine Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese is heard making a heavy knocking sound, Caution! Tricarbonyl (MMT) is a manganese- see your dealer immediately. Use of containing metallic additive that is gasoline with a lower than recommended blended into some gasoline to increase octane number can cause engine failure DO NOT use E-85, gasoline containing octane. Gasoline blended with MMT and may void or not be covered by the methanol, or gasoline containing more than provides no performance advantage New Vehicle Limited Warranty. 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of these blends beyond gasoline of the same octane Poor quality gasoline can cause problems may result in starting and drivability number without MMT. Gasoline blended problems, damage critical fuel system such as hard starting, stalling, and components, cause emissions to exceed the with MMT reduces spark plug life and hesitations. If you experience these applicable standard, and/or cause the reduces emissions system performance symptoms, try another brand of gasoline Malfunction Indicator Light to illuminate. in some vehicles. The manufacturer before considering service for the Please observe pump labels as they should recommends that gasoline without MMT vehicle. clearly communicate if a fuel contains be used in your vehicle. The MMT content greater than 15% ethanol (E-15). of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump; therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is 237 prohibited in Federal and California Fuel System Cautions reformulated gasoline. Materials Added To Fuel Caution! Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane rating, gasolines that Follow these guidelines to maintain your contain detergents, corrosion and vehicle’s performance: stability additives are recommended. The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited Using gasolines that have these additives by Federal law. Using leaded gasoline can will help improve fuel economy, reduce impair engine performance and damage the emissions, and maintain vehicle emissions control system. performance. An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or Designated TOP TIER ignition malfunctions can cause the Detergent Gasoline catalytic converter to overheat. If you contains a higher level notice a pungent burning odor or some light of detergents to smoke, your engine may be out of tune or further aide in malfunctioning and may require immediate service. Contact an authorized dealer for TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS minimizing engine and service assistance. fuel system deposits. When available, the usage of TOP TIER The use of fuel additives, which are now Detergent gasoline is recommended. being sold as octane enhancers, is not Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of recommended. Most of these products TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers. contain high concentrations of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle Indiscriminate use of fuel system performance problems resulting from the cleaning agents should be avoided. Many use of such fuels or additives is not the of these materials intended for gum and responsibility of the manufacturer and may varnish removal may contain active void or not be covered under the New solvents or similar ingredients. These can Vehicle Limited Warranty. harm fuel system gasket and diaphragm materials. Note: Intentional tampering with the emissions control system can result in civil penalties being assessed against you.
238 FLUID CAPACITIES 2.0 T4 MAir Engine
U.S. Metric Fuel tank 15.3 Gallons 58 Liters Fuel tank reserve 2.3 Gallons 9 Liters Engine cooling system 2.2 Gallons 8.6 Liters Intercooler cooling system 1.1 Gallons 4.3 Liters Engine sump and filter 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters Hydraulic brake circuit 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters Windshield washer fluid reservoir 1.1 Gallons 4.2 Liters 9.9 Quarts (RWD Model) / 9.8 Quarts 9.4 Liters (RWD Model) / 9.3 Liters Automatic transmission, 2.0 T4 MAir engine (AWD Model) (AWD Model) Differentials and reduction gears RDU 195 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters Differentials and reduction gears RDU –– 230-TV RDU 230-LSD differential - if equipped 0.9 Quarts 0.9 Liters RDU 210/215-LSD differential - if equipped 1.1 Quarts 1.1 Liters AWD System FAD transfer case 0.5 Quarts 0.5 Liters AWD System TRANSFER CASE 0.7 Quarts 0.7 Liters
239 FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS Yourvehicle is equipped with an engine oil that has been thoroughly developed and tested in order to meet the requirements of the Scheduled Servicing Plan. Constant use of the prescribed lubricants guarantees the fuel consumption and emission specifications. Lubricant quality is crucial for engine operation and durability. Engine Lubrication
Use Features Specification Replacement interval Mopar API SN PLUS Certified SAE 0W-30 Full Synthetic Engine Oil CAUTION! Lubricant for engines FCA Material Standards MS-13340 According to the Maintenance Plan 2.0 T4 MAir Using lubricants that do not meet the recommended SN PLUS or equivalent oil specifications can cause engine damage not covered by the vehicle warranty. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS If lubricants conforming to the specific request are not available, products that meet the indicated specifications can be used to top up; in this case optimal performance of the engine is not guaranteed.
240 Chassis Lubrication
Use Features Specification Applications ZF 8HP 50 - Synthetic ATF – Automatic transmission Differential RDU 195; RDU 230-LSD; RDU SAE 75W-85 Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA9 210-eLSD; RDU 210/215-LSD / Lubricants and greases 2.0 T4 MAir engine SAE 75W-80 APL GL-5 Synthetic FPW9.55550-DA10 AWD System FAD transfer case lubricant SAE 75W Synthetic lubricant FPW9.55550-DA11 AWD System TRANSFER CASE Brake fluid DOT 4 MS.90039 Hydraulic brakes CUNA NC 956-16 Use rate 50% Not mixable with Engine coolant MS.90032 ASTMD3306 different formulation products. (*) To be used diluted or undiluted in Windshield washer fluid CUNA NC 956-11 MS.90043 windshield washer/wiper systems R1234yf or R134yf HVAC –– (depending on market) (*) For particularly harsh climate conditions, a mixture of 60% product and 40% distilled water is recommended.
241 PERFORMANCE Top performance after the initial period of vehicle usage.
Acceleration from Models Maximum speed mph 0–60 mph/0-100 km/h sec. 2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP RWD engine 149 * 5.5 * 2.0 T4 MAir 280 HP AWD engine 149 * 5.1 * *Based on manufacturer testing. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
242 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE . . . .244 IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE ...... 244 WARRANTY INFORMATION .....246 REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . .246 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . .247
243 SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Any communication to the SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE manufacturer's customer center should The manufacturer and its authorized include the following information: Prepare For The Appointment dealer are vitally interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy Owner's name and address If you are having warranty work done, be with our products and services. sure to bring the right papers with you, as Owner's telephone number (home and well as your warranty folder. All work to Warranty service must be done by an office) authorized dealer. We strongly be performed may not be covered by the Authorized dealer name warranty. Discuss additional charges with recommend that you take the vehicle to the service manager. Keep a maintenance an authorized dealer. They know your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) vehicle the best, and are most concerned log of your vehicle's service history, as Vehicle delivery date and mileage this can often provide a clue to the that you get prompt and high quality current problem. service. The manufacturer's authorized Alfa Romeo Customer Center dealer have the facilities, factory-trained Prepare A List technicians, special tools, and the latest P.O.Box 21–8004 CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE Make a written list of your vehicle's information to ensure the vehicle is fixed Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004 problems or the specific work you want correctly and in a timely manner. Phone: 1-844-Alfa-USA done. If you've had an accident or work This is why you should always talk to an (1-844-253-2872) authorized dealer service manager first. done that is not on your maintenance log, Alfa Romeo Customer Care (Canada) let the service advisor know. Most matters can be resolved with this process. P.O.Box 1621 Be Reasonable With Requests If for some reason you are still not Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6 If you list a number of items and you must satisfied, talk to the general manager or Phone: 1-877-230-0563 (English) have your vehicle by the end of the day, owner of the authorized dealer. They Phone: 1-877-515-9112 (French) discuss the situation with the service want to know if you need assistance. advisor and list the items in order of priority. At many authorized dealers, you If an authorized dealer is unable to may obtain a rental vehicle at a minimal resolve the concern, you may contact the daily charge. If you need a rental, it is manufacturer's customer center. advisable to make these arrangements when you call for an appointment.
244 Customer Assistance For The Hearing Service Contract contract that is not a manufacturer's Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) service contract, and you require service Youmay have purchased a service after the manufacturer's New Vehicle To assist customers who have hearing contract for a vehicle to help protect you Limited Warranty expires, please refer to difficulties, the manufacturer has from the high cost of unexpected repairs the contract documents, and contact the installed special TDD after the manufacturer's New Vehicle person listed in those documents. (Telecommunication Devices for the Limited Warranty expires. The Deaf) equipment at its customer center. manufacturer stands behind only the We appreciate that you have made a Any hearing or speech impaired manufacturer's service contracts. If you major investment when you purchased customer, who has access to a TDD or a purchased a manufacturer's service the vehicle. An authorized dealer has also conventional teletypewriter (TTY) in the contract, you will receive Plan Provisions made a major investment in facilities, United States, can communicate with the and an Owner Identification Card in the tools, and training to assure that you are manufacturer by dialing mail within three weeks of the vehicle absolutely delighted with the ownership 1-800-380-2479. delivery date. If you have any questions experience. Youwill be pleased with their sincere efforts to resolve any warranty Canadian residents with hearing about the service contract, call the issues or related concerns. difficulties that require assistance can manufacturer's Service Contract use the special needs relay service National Customer Hotline at offered by Bell Canada. For TTY 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, Warning! teletypewriter users, dial 711 and for call (877) 230-0563 English / (877) Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to 515-9112 French). connect with a Bell Relay Service The manufacturer will not stand behind Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines operator. any service contract that is not the only), some of its constituents, and certain vehicle components contain, or emit, manufacturer's service contract. It is not chemicals known to the State of California responsible for any service contract to cause cancer and birth defects, or other other than the manufacturer's service reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contract. If you purchased a service contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
245 WARRANTY INFORMATION REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS To contact NHTSA, you may call the See the Warranty Information Booklet, In The 50 United States And Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at for the terms and provisions of FCA US Washington, D.C. 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: LLC and FCA Canada Inc. warranties 1-800-424-9153); or go to applicable to this vehicle and market. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause a crash or http://www.safercar.gov ; or write to: cause injury or death, you should Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New immediately inform the National Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building, Highway Traffic Safety Washington, D.C. 20590. Youcan Administration (NHTSA) in addition also obtain other information about to notifying FCA US LLC. motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov . If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an In Canada CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE investigation, and if it finds that a If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect exists in a group of safety defect, you should contact the vehicles, it may order a recall and Customer Service Department remedy campaign. However, NHTSA immediately. Canadian customers cannot become involved in individual who wish to report a safety defect to problems between you, your the Canadian government should authorized dealer or FCA US LLC. contact Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at 1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/ .
246 PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS Diagnostic Procedure Manuals Owner's Manuals To order the following manuals, you may Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled These Owner's Manuals have been use either the website or the phone with diagrams, charts and detailed prepared with the assistance of service numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, illustrations. These practical manuals and engineering specialists to acquaint American Express, and Discover orders make it easy for students and technicians you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. are accepted. to find and fix problems on Included are starting, operating, computer-controlled vehicle systems and emergency and maintenance procedures Service Manuals features. They show exactly how to find as well as specifications, capabilities and These comprehensive Service Manuals and correct problems the first time, using safety tips. provide the information that students step-by-step troubleshooting and Call toll free at: and professional technicians need in drivability procedures, proven diagnostic diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem tests and a complete list of all tools and 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.) solving, maintaining, servicing, and equipment. 1-800-387-1143 (Canada) repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the Or vehicle, system, and/or components is Visit us on the Worldwide Web at: written in straightforward language with www.techauthority.com illustrations, diagrams, and charts.
247 This page is intentionally left blank
248 INDEX Air Pressure Check Engine Light (Malfunction Accessories Purchased By The Tires...... 213 Indicator Light) ...... 87 Owner...... 3 Alarm Checking Levels ...... 196 Active Safety Systems ...... 90 Security Alarm ...... 19 Checking YourVehicle For Safety . . .126 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) Alfa Active Suspension (AAS) .....144 Checks, Safety ...... 126 (Cruise Control) ...... 150 Alfa DNA System...... 142 Child Restraint ...... 117 Off...... 151 Anti-Lock Braking (ABS) System ....90 Child Restraints On...... 151 Automatic Headlights ...... 34 Booster Seats ...... 119 Additional Heaters...... 48 Automatic Temperature Control Child Seat Installation ...... 125 Additives, Fuel ...... 238 (ATC)...... 43 How To Stow An unused ALR Seat AFS Function ...... 35 Automatic Transmission ...... 136 Belt ...... 123 AirBag...... 109 Auxiliary Driving Systems ...... 93 Infant And Child Restraints .....118 Air Bag Operation ...... 110 LATCH Positions ...... 120 Air Bag Warning Light ...... 108 B-Pillar Location ...... 210 Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children ...... 120 Driver Knee Air Bag ...... 111 Back-Up Camera ...... 164 Battery ...... 198 Older Children And Child Enhanced Accident Restraints ...... 118 Response...... 114,189 Battery Recharging ...... 199 Seating Positions ...... 120 Event Data Recorder (EDR) .....189 Belts, Seat ...... 127 Using The TopTether Anchorage . .125 Front Air Bag ...... 109 Blind Spot Monitoring ...... 93 Clean Air Gasoline ...... 237 If Deployment Occurs ...... 113 Bodywork (Cleaning And Cleaning Knee Impact Bolsters ...... 111 Maintenance) ...... 224 Wheels ...... 219 Maintaining YourAir Bag Brakes ...... 232 Climate Control ...... 41,44 System ...... 116 Brake Fluid Level ...... 198 Compact Spare Tire ...... 218 Maintenance ...... 116 Bulbs, Light ...... 128 Contract, Service...... 245 Redundant Air Bag Warning Light ...... 109 Camera, Rear ...... 164 Courtesy Mirror Light (Bulb Replacement) ...... 175 Side Air Bags ...... 111 Carbon Monoxide Warning ...... 126 Cruise Control (Speed Control) . . . .148 Transporting Pets ...... 126 Cargo Tie-Downs ...... 53 Cupholders ...... 57 Air Bag Light...... 108,127 Certification Label ...... 167 Customer Assistance ...... 244 Chart, Tire Sizing ...... 207 Daytime Running Lights...... 34 Emission Control System Fuel Deck Lid Maintenance...... 87 Additives ...... 238 Power Release ...... 52 Engine ...... 229 Clean Air ...... 237 INDEX Defroster, Windshield ...... 127 Block Heater ...... 133 Ethanol ...... 237 Dimensions ...... 235 Engine Coolant Level ...... 197 Materials Added ...... 238 Dimmer Switch Exhaust Gas Caution ...... 126 Methanol ...... 237 Headlight...... 39 Fuel Requirements ...... 237 Fuse Boxes ...... 179 Direction Indicators (Changing A Jump Starting ...... 184 Fuses (Replacement) ...... 177 Bulb)...... 175 Overheating ...... 185 Doors...... 20 Engine Compartment ...... 196 Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) ....54 Drive Train Control (DTC) System ....90 Engine Compartment (Washing) . . . .225 Gasoline, Clean Air ...... 237 Driving Modes ...... 142 Engine Oil Gasoline, Reformulated ...... 237 Dynamic Steering Torque (DST) Level Check ...... 197 Gauges System ...... 92 Enhanced Accident Response Engine Oil Temperature ...... 61 Feature ...... 114,189 Fuel ...... 61 Electric Park Brake...... 134 Environmental Protection Systems. . .58 Speedometer ...... 61 Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Ethanol ...... 237 Control) ...... 148 Tachometer ...... 61 Exhaust Gas Cautions ...... 126 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) General Information ...... 95,99,156 System ...... 91 Exhaust System ...... 126 Glove Compartment Light (Bulb Emergency Exterior Lights ...... 34,128 Replacement) ...... 176 In Case Of ...... 172 Glove Compartment Storage ...... 54 Emergency Refuelling ...... 185 Flashers GVWR...... 167 Turn Signals ...... 128 Emergency, In Case Of Jacking ...... 206 Fluid Leaks ...... 128 Hazard Warning Flashers ...... 172 Jump Starting ...... 183 Fluids And Lubricants ...... 240 Overheating ...... 185 Fog Lights, Rear ...... 34 Tow Hooks ...... 188 Forward Collision Warning ...... 95 Towing...... 186 Front Light Cluster With Main Beam Xenon Gas Discharge Headlights (Bulb Replacement)...... 175 Head Restraints ...... 29 Instrument Panel Daytime Running ...... 34 Head Rests ...... 29 Features ...... 60 Exterior ...... 34,128 Headlights...... 34 Interior And Instrument Lights . . .38,39 Fog...... 34 Automatic ...... 34 Interior Lights...... 37 Hazard Warning Flasher ...... 172 Delay ...... 35 Interiors (Cleaning)...... 226 High Beam/Low Beam Select ....35 High Beam ...... 35 Internal Equipment ...... 54 Interior ...... 37 Switch ...... 34 Cupholders ...... 57 Park...... 34 Headlights (Cleaning) ...... 225 Turn Signals ...... 36,128 Heated Mirrors ...... 33 Jacking And Tire Changing ...... 206 Loading Vehicle ...... 167 Heated Seats ...... 27 Jump Starting ...... 183 Tires...... 210 Heated Steering Wheel ...... 32 Locks Keyless Enter-N-Go ...... 21 Heater, Engine Block...... 133 Child Protection ...... 24 Passive Entry ...... 21 Hill Start Assist (HSA) System...... 92 Luggage Compartment Light (Bulb Keys...... 14 HomeLink (Garage Door Opener) ....54 Replacement) ...... 176 Hood Lane Change And Turn Signals ...... 36 Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Closing ...... 51 Lane Change Assist ...... 36 Engine) ...... 87 Opening ...... 51 LaneSense...... 161 Manual Hood Release ...... 51 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 103 Service ...... 247 Latches...... 128 Methanol...... 237 Identification Data ...... 228 Leaks, Fluid ...... 128 Mirrors Ignition...... 16 Life Of Tires ...... 217 Automatic Dimming ...... 32 Switch ...... 16 Light Bulbs...... 128 Electric Powered ...... 32 Immobilizer (Sentry Key) ...... 18 Types Of Bulbs ...... 173 Exterior Folding ...... 32 In Case Of Emergency ...... 172 Lights...... 128 Heated ...... 33 Installing Electrical/Electronic Rearview ...... 32 Devices...... 3 AirBag...... 108,127 Instrument Cluster Ambient ...... 38 OBD System ...... 87 Display ...... 62 Courtesy/Reading ...... 37,38 Occupant Restraints...... 102 Operator Manual Rear Cross Path ...... 93 Energy Management Feature . . . .107 Owner's Manual ...... 247 Reformulated Gasoline ...... 237 Front Seat ...... 102,103 Refueling Procedure ...... 165 Inspection ...... 127 INDEX Paintwork (Cleaning And Refueling The Vehicle ...... 165 Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . .105 Maintenance) ...... 225 Refuelling ...... 239 Lap/Shoulder Belts ...... 103 Panic Brake Assist (PBA) System ....91 Reminder, Seat Belt ...... 103 Pregnant Women ...... 106 ParkSense System ...... 156 Remote Keyless Entry...... 14 Pretensioners ...... 106 Passive Entry ...... 21 Remote Starting System ...... 130 Rear Seat ...... 103 Performance (Top Speed)...... 242 Remote Trunk Release ...... 52 Reminder ...... 103 Pets...... 126 Replacement Tires ...... 217 Seat Belt Pretensioner ...... 106 Pinch Protection ...... 51 Replacing A Bulb ...... 172 Untwisting Procedure ...... 105 Placard, Tire And Loading Information ...... 210 Replacing An External Bulb ...... 175 Seats ...... 25 Power Replacing An Internal Bulb ...... 175 Adjustment ...... 25 Deck Lid Release ...... 52 Reporting Safety Defects ...... 246 Head Restraints ...... 29 Seats ...... 25 Restraints, Child ...... 117 Heated ...... 27 Sunroof...... 49 Rims And Tires ...... 206 Power...... 25 Power Supply ...... 230 Security Alarm ...... 19 Power Windows ...... 48 Safety Checks Inside Vehicle...... 127 Service Assistance...... 244 Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . .106 Safety Checks Outside Vehicle.....128 Service Contract ...... 245 Pretensioners Safety Defects, Reporting ...... 246 Service Manuals ...... 247 Seat Belts ...... 106 Safety Information, Tire...... 206 Servicing Procedures ...... 200 Prolonged Vehicle Inactivity ...... 223 Safety Tips ...... 126 Shoulder Belts ...... 103 Safety, Exhaust Gas ...... 126 Signals, Turn...... 128 Radial Ply Tires ...... 216 Saving Fuel ...... 168 Snow Chains...... 220 Radio Frequency Scheduled Servicing ...... 192 Snow Tires...... 220 General Information ...... 16,17,24 Scheduled Servicing Program Spare Tires ...... 218 (2.0 T4 MAir Engine Versions) . . .193 Radio Transmitters And Mobile Speed Control Phones ...... 4 Seat Belts ...... 102,127 Accel/Decel ...... 149 Rear Camera ...... 164 Child Restraints ...... 117 Accel/Decel (ACC Only) ...... 152 Tire And Loading Information Transmission ...... 231 Cancel ...... 149 Placard ...... 210 Transporting Animals ...... 169 Distance Setting (ACC Only) . . . .153 Tire Markings ...... 206 Transporting Passengers ...... 169 Resume ...... 149 Tire Safety Information ...... 206 Transporting Pets ...... 126 Set...... 148 Tires ...... 128,213,218,222 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 216 Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . .148 Aging (Life Of Tires) ...... 217 Trunk Lid (Deck Lid) ...... 52 Speed Limiter...... 147 Air Pressure ...... 213 Turn Signals ...... 36 Starting Compact Spare ...... 218 Button ...... 16 General Information ...... 213,218 Uconnect Settings Cold Weather ...... 131 High Speed ...... 214 Customer Programmable Features ...... 21 Starting The Engine ...... 130 Inflation Pressure ...... 213 Passive Entry Programming .....21 Steering Life Of Tires ...... 217 Tilt Column...... 31 Load Capacity ...... 210 Uniform Tire Quality Grades ...... 222 Wheel, Heated ...... 32 Quality Grading ...... 222 Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)...... 54 Wheel, Tilt ...... 31 Radial ...... 216 Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt. . . .105 Steering System ...... 234 Replacement ...... 217 Use Of The Owner’s Manual ...... 5 Stop/Start System...... 145 Safety ...... 206,213 Storage Sizes ...... 207 Vehicle Changes/Alterations ...... 3 Console...... 57 Snow Tires ...... 220 Vehicle Identification Number .....228 Glove Compartment ...... 54 Spare Tires ...... 218 Vehicle Loading ...... 167,210 Suggestions For Driving...... 168 Spinning ...... 216 Vent Operation ...... 41 Sun Roof...... 49 Tread Wear Indicators ...... 216 Sun Visor ...... 54 Tow Hooks...... 188 Warranty Information ...... 246 Supplemental Restraint System – Towing Washer Fluid For AirBag...... 109 Disabled Vehicle ...... 186 Windshield/Headlights...... 198 Suspension ...... 233 TowingTrailers ...... 168 Washers, Windshield...... 40 Symbols ...... 6 TPMS (Tire Pressure Monitoring Weights ...... 236 System)...... 99 Wheel And Wheel Tire Care ...... 219 Tie Down Hooks, Cargo ...... 53 Traction Control System (TCS)...... 91 Wheel And Wheel Tire Trim ...... 219 Wheels And Tires ...... 206 Windows (Cleaning) ...... 225 Windshield Defroster ...... 127 INDEX Windshield Washers ...... 40 Windshield Wiper Replacing Blades ...... 202 Windshield Wipers ...... 39 Wipers, Intermittent...... 40 Wipers, Rain Sensitive ...... 40
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING normal may require special precautions. EQUIPMENT All installations should be checked for possible interfer- Special design considerations are incorporated into this ence between the communications equipment and the vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio vehicle’s electronic systems. frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone equipment must be installed properly by trained person- nel. The following must be observed during installation. WARNING: The positive power connection should be made directly to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible. Operating, servicing and maintaining a The negative power connection should be made to body passenger vehicle or off-road highway sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection. motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals This connection should not be fused. including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the phthalates, and lead, which are known to roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used the State of California to cause cancer and in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may birth defects or other reproductive harm. affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on To minimize exposure, avoid breathing vehicles so equipped. exhaust, do not idle the engine except as The antenna cable should be as short as practical and necessary, service your vehicle in a routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use well-ventilated area and wear gloves or only fully shielded coaxial cable. wash your hands frequently when servicing Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to your vehicle. For more information go to ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR). www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle. OWNER’S MANUAL 2019 OWNER’S
2019 GIULIA Printed in U.S.A. Printed ©2018 FCA US LLC. All Rights Reserved. All Rights Reserved. US LLC. ©2018 FCA S.p.A., used with permission. Group Marketing of FCA ROMEO is a registered trademark ALFA 19GABASE-126-AB ROMEO GIULIA ALFA Second Edition Manual Owner’s